Oracle Applications Technical and Functional Interview Questions

Oracle Applications Technical and Functional Interview Questions and Answers
FAQS
1.
Difference b/w procedure and function?
A procedure may return (one or more values using OUT & INOUT Parameters) or may not
return a value. But a function has to return a single value and has the return clause in its
definition. Function can be called in select statements but procedure can only be called in a pl/sql
block. Procedure's parameters can have IN or OUT or INOUT parameters. But function's
parameters can only have IN parameters.
2.
Difference b/w ROWID and ROWNUM?
ROWID : It gives the hexadecimal string representing the address of a row.It gives the location in
database where row is physically stored.
ROWNUM: It gives a sequence number in which rows are retrieved from the database.
3.
Give some examples of pseudo columns?
NEXTVAL, CURRVAL, LEVEL, SYSDATE
4.
Difference b/w implicit cursor and explicit cursor?
Implicit cursors are automatically created by oracle for all its DML stmts. Examples of implicit
cursors: SQL%FOUND, SQL%NOTFOUND, SQL%ROWCOUNT, SQL%ISOPEN; Explicit
cursors are created by the users for multi row select stmts.
5.
How to create a table in a procedure or function?
See the below piece of code: Since create stmt can be used only at the sql prompt, we have used
dynamic sql to create a table.
DECLARE
l_stmt
VARCHAR2 (100);
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.put_line ('STARTING ');
l_stmt := 'create table dummy1 (X VARCHAR2(10) , Y NUMBER)';
EXECUTE IMMEDIATE l_stmt;
DBMS_OUTPUT.put_line ('end ');
END;
The above piece of code can be written In procedure and function DDL's can be used in function
provided that function should be invoked in Begin-End block not from Select statement.
6.
Explain the usage of WHERE CURRENT OF clause in cursors ?
Look at the following pl/sql code:
DECLARE
CURSOR wip_cur
IS
SELECT
acct_no, enter_date
FROM wip
WHERE enter_date < SYSDATE - 7
FOR UPDATE;
BEGIN
FAQS
FOR wip_rec IN wip_cur

LOOP
INSERT INTO acct_log
(acct_no, order_date
)
VALUES (wip_rec.acct_no, wip_rec.enter_date
);
DELETE FROM wip
WHERE CURRENT OF wip_cur;
END LOOP;
END;
"WHERE CURRENT OF" has to be used in concurrence with "FOR UPDATE" in the cursor select
stmt.
"WHERE CURRENT OF" used in delete or update stmts means, delete/update the current record
specified by the cursor.
By using WHERE CURRENT OF, you do not have to repeat the WHERE clause in the SELECT
statement.
7.
What is the purpose of FORUPDATE?
Selecting in FOR UPDATE mode locks the result set of rows in update mode, which means that
row cannot be updated or deleted until a commit or rollback is issued which will release the
row(s). If you plan on updating or deleting records that have been referenced by a Select For
Update statement, you can use the Where Current Of statement.
8.
What is RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR?
The RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR is a procedure defined by Oracle that allows the developer
to raise an exception and associate an error number and message with the procedure other than
just Oracle errors. Raising an Application Error With raise_application_error
DECLARE
num_tables
NUMBER;
BEGIN
SELECT COUNT (*)
INTO num_tables
FROM user_tables;
IF num_tables < 1000
THEN
/* Issue your own error code (ORA-20101) with your own error
message.
Note that you do not need to qualify raise_application_error
with
DBMS_STANDARD */
raise_application_error (-20101, 'Expecting at least 1000
tables');
ELSE
FAQS
NULL;
-- Do the rest of the processing (for the non-error
case).
END IF;
END;
/
The procedure RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR lets you issue user-defined ORA- error messages
from stored subprograms. That way, you can report errors to your application and
avoid returning unhandled exceptions.
9.
What is mutating error?
Mutating error occurs in the following scenario:
WHEN WE ARE UPDATING A TABLE (TRIGGER WRITTEN ON A TABLE FOR UPDATE) AND
AT THE SAME TIME TRYING TO RETRIEVE DATA FROM THAT TABLE. IT WILL RESULT
INTO MUTATING TABLE AND IT WILL RESULT INTO MUTATING ERROR.
10.
Can we have commit/rollback in DB triggers?
Having Commit / Rollback inside a trigger defeats the standard of whole transaction's commit /
rollback all together. Once trigger execution is complete then only a transaction can be said as
complete and then only commit should take place. If we still want to carry out some action which
should be initiated from trigger but should be committed irrespective of trigger completion /
failure we can have AUTONOMUS TRANSACTION. Inside Autonomous transaction block we
can have Commit and it will act as actual commit.
11.
Can we make the trigger an autonomous transaction?
This makes all the difference because within the autonomous transaction (the trigger), Oracle will
view the triggering table as it was before any changes occurredthat is to say that any changes
are uncommitted and the autonomous transaction doesnt see them. So the potential confusion
Oracle normally experiences in a mutating table conflict doesnt exist.
12.
What is autonomous transaction?
Autonomous transaction means a transaction that is embedded in some other transaction, but
functions independently.
13.
What is a REF Cursor?
The REF CURSOR is a data type in the Oracle PL/SQL language. It represents a cursor or a result
set in Oracle Database.
14.
What is the difference between ref cursors and normal pl/sql cursors?
DECLARE
TYPE rc IS REF CURSOR;
CURSOR c
IS
SELECT *
FROM DUAL;
FAQS
l_cursor
rc;
BEGIN
IF (TO_CHAR (SYSDATE, 'dd') = 30)
THEN
OPEN l_cursor FOR
SELECT *
FROM emp;
ELSIF (TO_CHAR (SYSDATE, 'dd') = 29)
THEN
OPEN l_cursor FOR
SELECT *
FROM dept;
ELSE
OPEN l_cursor FOR
SELECT *
FROM DUAL;
END IF;
OPEN c;
END;
Given that block of code you see perhaps the most "salient" difference, no matter how many
times you run that block The cursor C will always be select * from dual. The ref cursor can be
anything.
15.
Is Truncate a DDL or DML statement? And why?
Truncate is a DDL statement. Check the LAST_DDL_TIME on USER_OBJECTS after truncating
your table. TRUNCATE will automatically commit, and it's not rollback able. This changes the
storage definition of the object. That's why it is a DDL.
16.
What are the actions you have to perform when you drop a package?
If you rename a package, the other packages that use it will have to be MODIFIED. A simple
compilation of the new renamed package won't do. If you have toad, go to the "used by" tab that
will show you the packages that call the package being renamed.
17.
What is cascading triggers?
When a trigger fires, a SQL statement within its trigger action potentially can fire other triggers,
resulting in cascading triggers.
18.
What are materialized views?
A materialized view is a database object that stores the results of a query (possibly from a remote
database). Materialized views are sometimes referred to as snapshots.
Example :
If the materialized view will access remote database objects, we need to start by creating a
database link to the remote DB:
CREATE DATABASE LINK remotedb
CONNECT TO scott IDENTIFIED BY tiger
FAQS
USING 'orcl';
Now we can create the materialized view to pull in data (in this example, across the database
link):
CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW items_summary_mv
ON PREBUILT TABLE
REFRESH FORCE AS
SELECT a.PRD_ID, a.SITE_ID, a.TYPE_CODE, a.CATEG_ID,
sum(a.GMS)
GMS,
sum(a.NET_REV)
NET_REV,
sum(a.BOLD_FEE) BOLD_FEE,
sum(a.BIN_PRICE) BIN_PRICE,
sum(a.GLRY_FEE) GLRY_FEE,
sum(a.QTY_SOLD) QTY_SOLD,
count(a.ITEM_ID) UNITS
FROM items@remotedb a
GROUP BY a.PRD_ID, a.SITE_ID, a.TYPE_CODE, a.CATEG_ID;
Materialized view logs:

Materialized view logs are used to track changes (insert, update and delete) to a table. Remote
materialized views can use the log to speed-up data replication by only transferring changed
records.
Example:
CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW LOG ON items;
19.
Commonly occurring Errors in Reports?
Some of the errors are defined below
1. There Exists uncompiled unit: When the report is not compiled before loading in the Oracle
Applications.
2. Report File not found: When the rdf is not uploaded in proper directory
3. Width or margin is zero: When the repeating frame is not within proper frames
4. Not in proper group: When the repeating frame is not referred to proper group
20.
What is the difference between Compile and Incremental Compile in oracle reports?
In Full compile all the PL/SQL within the reports are compiled but in incremental compile only
the changed PL/SQL units are compiled.
When compiling the report for the first time, we should do the full compilation and not the
Incremental compile.
21.
How to compile Procedures and Packages?
ALTER <proc/package> <name>COMPILE;
FAQS
1) What is ERP?
A packaged business software system that lets a company automate and integrate the majority of
its business processes; share common data and practices across the enterprise; [and] produce and
access information in a real-time environment.
2) Tell me some thing about SQL-LOADER?

Sql * loader is a bulk loader utility used for moving data from external files into the oracle
database.
Sql * loader supports various load formats, selective loading, and multi-tables loads.
Conventional: The conventional path loader essentially loads the data by using standard insert
statement.
Direct: The direct path loader (direct = true) by possess of logic involved with that, and loads
directly in to the oracle data files.
EX:My data.csv file
1001, scott tiger,1000,40
1002,oracleapps4u,2345,50
Load data
Infile c:\data\mydata.csv
Into table emp
Fields terminated by , optionally enclosed by
(empno, empname,sal,deptno)
>sqlldr scott/tiger@vis
control=loader.ctl log= gvlog.log bad=gvbad.bad discard=gvdis.dsc .
3) How to dump data from pl/sql block to flat files?
Using utl_file package, we can dump data from pl/sql block to flat file.
PRE-REQUIREMENTS for UTL_FILE is specify the accessible directories for the UTL_FILE
function in the initialization file (INIT.ORA) Using the UTL_FILE_DIR parameters.
Ex: UTL_FILE_DIR = <Directory name>
EX:- remember to update INITSID.ORA, utl_file_dir = c:\oradata
Declare
Fp utl_file.file_type;
Begin
Fp := utl_file.fopen(c:\oradata,tab1.txt,'w');
Utl_file.putf(fp,'%s %s \n 'text field, 55);
Utl_file.fclose(fp);
End;
4) What is SET-OF-BOOKS?
Collection of Chat of Accounts and Currency and Calendars is called SOB
FAQS
5) What is the interface Table?

Interface Table is a table which is used as medium for transfer of data between two systems.
6) What is invoice?
A request sent for payment
7) What is INBOUND and OUT BOUND? (Different types of interfaces)
Inbound Interface:
For inbound interfaces, where these products are the destination, interface tables as well as
supporting validation, processing, and maintenance programs are provided.
Outbound Interface:
For outbound interfaces, where these products are the source, database views are provided and
the destination application should provide the validation, processing, and maintenance
programs.
10) What is the procedure to develop an interface?
First we will get the Requirement document.
We will create control file based on that plot file.
Then the control files which loads the data into staging tables.
Through pl/sql programs we will mapping and validate the data and then dump into the
interface tables.
Through the standard programs we will push the data from interface tables to Base tables.
11) What are the validations in customer interface?
customer name : The same customer reference cant have different customer names with
in this table HZ_PARTIES.PARTY_NAME
customer number: must be null if your r using automatic customer numbering, must exit
if you are not using automatic customer numbering. This value much be unique with in
HZ_PARTIES
customer status : must be A for active or I for inactive
HZ_PARTIES_STATUS
bank account num or bank account currency code :
if the bank a/c already exist do not enter a value
if the bank a/c does not exist you must enter a value
bank a/c name : it must exist in AP_BANK_ACCOUNTS or if it does not exist values must
exist for BANK_A/C_CURRENCY_CODE
BANK_A/C_NUM
BANK_NAME
BANK_BRANCH_NAME
Note : every interface table has two error msg
1) Error code.
2) Error msg.
12) How to submit a concurrent program from sql or pl/sql code?

FND_REQUEST.SUBMIT_REQUEST (PO,EXECUTABLE NAME,,,, PARAMETERS)
13) List out some APIs?
FND_FILE.PUTLINE(FND_FILE.LOG)
FND_FILE.PUTLINE(FND_FILE.OUTPUT)
14) What are profile options?
It is some set of options based on which the Functional and Technical behavior
of Oracle Applications depends.
EX: - I want to assign the user3 responsibility to p4 printer then
System Administrator > Profile System
(FND_PROFILE_OPTIONS)
15) What are the User PARAMETERS in the Reports?
P_CONC_REQUEST_ID
P_FLEX_VALUE
17) What are the two parameters that are mandatory for pl/sql type concurrent prog?
Procedure/Function (ERRBUF OUT, RETCODE OUT)
ERRBUF: Used to write the error message to log or request file.
RETCODE: Populate log request file with program submission details info.
18) What are different validation types in value sets?
1) None ------validation is minimal.
2) Independent ------ input must exist on previously defined list of values
3) Dependent------ input is checked against a subset of values based on a
prior value.
3) Table ----- input is checked against values in an application table
4) Special ------values set uses a flex field itself.
5) Pair ------ two flex fields together specify a range of valid values.
6) Translatable independent ----- input must exist on previously defined list
Of values; translated values can be used.
7) Translatable dependent ------ input is checked against a subset of values
Based on a prior values; translated value can be used.
20)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Form development process?

open template form
Save as <your form>.fmb
Change the form module name as form name.
Delete the default blocks, window, and canvas
Create a window.
Assign the window property class to window
Create a canvas (subclass info)
FAQS

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
FAQS
Assign canvas property class to the canvas

assign the window to the canvas and canvas to the window
Create a data block
Modify the form level properties. (sub class item Text item)
Modify the app_custom package in the program unit.
Modify the pre-form trigger (form level)
Modify the module level properties ((console window, First navigation
Save and compile the form.
Place the .fmx in the server directory.
Register in the AOL
APPLICATION -> FORM
APPLICATION -> FUNCTION
APPLICATION -> MENU
21) How to customize the Reports?

Identify the Short name of the report and the module in which we have to place the
customization
Ex: - if you want to customize in the AR module, path is
Appl \ar\11.5.0\reports\US\ .rdf
FTP back the file to the local system in Binary mode
Open the .rdf file in Report builder and change the name of the module.
Open the data model and Layout mode, perform all the required changes.
Go to report wizard and select the newly created columns.
Compile it. Save it.
Then Register in the AOL
Concurrent > executable.
Concurrent > program.
Go to system administrator Security > Responsibility > request
Add and assign a concurrent program to a request group
22) List some report names in oracle apps?
1) OPEN-DEBIT MEMO REPORT?
This report shows all the open-debit memo transactions, based on customer number and dates.
Columns: type, customer_no, trx_no, amt_due, remaining.
Parameter: type, customer, from_date, to_date.
2) GENERATING POSITIVE PAY FILE FOR BANK REPORT?
Basically this report generates a flat file of all the payments in order to send in to the bank.
3) UPDATE POSITIVE PAY CHECKS REPORT?
This report which updates the data into the (AP) account payables system from the plot file, the
file which is sent by bank
4) UPDATE POSITIVEPAY OUT STANDING CHECKS?
This report which shows the out standing checks
5) CUSTOMER PAYMENT DETAILS REPORT?
This report shows each customer original amount, amount pay and due amount based on
transaction type (books, pens)
FAQS
Transaction types in AR
Credit memo transaction types
Invoice, debit memo, and charge back transaction types
Commitment transaction types
23) HOW DO YOU RECTIFY THE ERRORS IN INTERFACE TABLES?
Depending on the naming convention used, errors appear in either alphabetical order or by error
code number.
24) What are WHO Columns in oracle apps tables?
1) Created by
2) Creation date
3) Last _updated by
4) last_update_date
5) last_update_value
25) What are FLEX FIELDS?
Flexfields are used to capture the additional business information.
DFF
KFF
Additional
Unique Info, Mandatory
Captured in attribute prefixed columns
Segment prefixed
Not reported on standard reports
Is reported on standard reports
To provide expansion space on your

form With the help of []. [] Represents
descriptive Flex field.
Used for entering and displaying key information

For example Oracle General uses a key Flex field called
Accounting Flex field to
Uniquely identifies a general account.
FLEX FILED : KEY : REGIGSTER
FLEX FILED : DESCRIPTIVE :

REGIGSTER
Oracle Applications KEY FLEX FIELDS

1) GL: ACCOUNTING
2) AR: SALES TAX LOCATION, TERRITORY,
3) AP: BANK DETAILS, COST ALLOCATION, PEOPLE GROUP
Oracle Applications DESCRIPTIVE FLEX FIELDS (Partial)
1) GL: daily rates
2) AR: credit history, information
3) PA: bank branch, payment terms, site address,
26) What are different concurrent requests?
a) Single request: this allows you to submit an individual request.
b) Request set:
this allows you to submit a pre-defined set of requests.
27) What are the activities in Sys Admin Module?
FAQS
a) Define Custom Users, b) Define Login Users, c) Register oracle DB users,

d) Define Concurrent Programs, e) Register Concurrent Executable,
f) Setting Profile Option Values, g) Define Request Types.
28) What activities can be performed in AOL?
a) Registering tables. b) Registering views c) Registering db sequences
d) Registering profile options e) Registering lookups and lookup codes
f) Registering forms g) Registering Form and Non-Form functions
i) Registering menus and sub-menus j) Registering DFF and KFF k) Libraries
29) What are the type Models in the system parameters of the report?
1) Bit map
2) Character mode
30) What is SRW Package?(Sql Report Writer): The Report builder Built in package know as SRW
Package This package extends reports ,Control report execution, output message at runtime,
Initialize layout fields, Perform DDL statements used to create or Drop temporary table, Call
User Exist, to format width of the columns, to page break the column, to set the colors
Ex: SRW.DO_SQL, Its like DDL command, we can create table, views , etc.,
SRW.SET_FIELD_NUM
SRW. SET_FILED_CHAR
SRW. SET FILED _DATE
31) Difference between Bind and Lexical parameters?
BIND VARIABLE:
-- are used to replace a single value in sql, pl/sql
-- Bind variable may be used to replace expressions in select, where, group, order
by, having, connect by, start with cause of queries.
-- Bind reference may not be referenced in FROM clause (or) in place of
reserved words or clauses.
LEXICAL REFERENCE:
-- You can use lexical reference to replace the clauses appearing AFTER select,
from, group by, having, connect by, start with.
-- You cant make lexical reference in a pl/sql statement.
32) Matrix Report: Simple, Group above, Nested
Simple Matrix Report : 4 groups
1. Cross Product Group
2. Row and Column Group
3. Cell Group
4. Cell column is the source of a cross product summary that
Becomes the cell content.
Frames:
1. Repeating frame for rows (down direction)
FAQS
2. Repeating frame for columns (Across)

3. Matrix object the intersection of the two repeating frames
33) What is Flex mode and Confine mode?
Confine mode:
On: child objects cannot be moved outside their enclosing parent objects.
Off: child objects can be moved outside their enclosing parent objects.
Flex mode:
On: parent borders "stretch" when child objects are moved against them.
Off: parent borders remain fixed when child objects are moved against them.
34) What is Place holder Column?
A placeholder is a column is an empty container at design time. The placeholder can hold a value
at run time has been calculated and placed in to It by pl/sql code from anther object. You can set
the value of a placeholder column is in a Before Report trigger. Store a Temporary value for
future reference. EX. Store the current max salary as records are retrieved.
35) What is Formula Column? A formula column performs a user-defined computation on
another column(s) data, including placeholder columns.
36) What is a Summary column?
A summary column performs a computation on another column's data. Using the Report Wizard
or Data Wizard, you can create the following summaries: sum, average, count, minimum,
maximum, % total. You can also create a summary column manually in the Data Model view,
and use the Property Palette to create the following additional summaries: first, last, standard
deviation, variance.
37) What is cursor?
A Cursor is a pointer, which works on active set, I.e. which points to only one row at a time in the
context areas ACTIVE SET. A cursor is a construct of pl/sql, used to process multiple rows using
a pl/sql block.
38) Types of cursors?
1) Implicit: Declared for all DML and pl/sql statements. By default it selects one row only.
2) Explicit: Declared and named by the developer. Use explicit cursor to individually process
each row returned by a multiple statements, is called ACTIVE SET.
Allows the programmer to manually control explicit cursor in the pl/sql block
Declare: create a named sql area
Open: identify the active set.
Fetch: load the current row in to variables.
Close: release the active set.
CURSOR ATTRIBUTES:
%is open: evaluates to true if the cursor is open.
%not found: evaluates to true if the most recent fetch does not return a row
FAQS
%found: evaluates to true if the most recent fetch returns a row.

%row count: evaluates to the total number of rows returned to far.
EXAMPLE:
Begin
Open emp_cursor;
Loop
Fetch when emp_cursor % rowcount >10 or
Emp_curor % not found;
dbms_output_put_line(to_char(vno)|| || vname);
End loop;
Close emp_cursor;
End;
CURSOR FOR LOOP
A) cursor for loop is a short cut to process explicit cursors
B) it has higher performance
C) cursor for loop requires only the declaration of the cursor, remaining things like opening,
fetching and close are automatically take by the cursor for loop
Example:
1) Declare
Cursor emp_cursor is
Select empno,ename
From emp;
Begin
For emp_record in emp_cursor loop
Dbms_output.putline(emp_record.empno);
Dbms_output.putline(emp_record.ename)
End loop
End;
39) Can we create a cursor without declaring it?
Yes by using cursor for loop using subqueries.
BEGIN
FOR emp_record IN ( SELECT empno, ename
FROM emp) LOOP
-- implicit open and implicit fetch occur
IF emp_record.empno = 7839 THEN
...
END LOOP; -- implicit close occurs
END;
40) Attribute data types?
1) %type 2) %row type.
FAQS
41) Exception Handling?

Is a mechanism provided by pl/sql to detect runtime errors and process them with out
halting the program abnormally
1) pre-defined
2) user-defined.
PRE-DEFINED:
1) cursor_already_open ------ attempted to open an already open cursor.
2) Dup_val_on_index ------ attempted to insert a duplicate values.
3) Invalid_cursor
------ illegal cursor operation occurred.
4) Invalid_number
------ conversion of character string to number fails.
5) Login_denied
------ loging on to oracle with an invalid user name
and password.
6) program_error
------ pl/sql has an internal problem.
7) storage_error
------ pl/sql ran out of memory or memory is corrupted.
8) to_many_row
------ single row select returned more than one row.
9) value_error
------ arithmetic,conversion,truncation or size constraint error
10) zero_devided
------ attempted to divided by zero.
USER-DEFINED:
Declare : name the exception
Raise
: explicitly raise the exception by using the raise statements
Reference: exception handing section.
The Raise_Application_Error_Procedure:
n
You can use this procedure to issue user-defined error messages from stored sub programs.
n
You can report errors to your applications and avoid returning unhandled exceptions.
Raise_Application_Error(error_number,message[,{true/false}]
Error number between -20000 to -20999
pragma exception_init?
It tells the compiler to associate an exception with an oracle error. To get an error
message
of a specific oracle error.
Ex: pragma exception_init(exception name, oracle error number)
Example for Exceptions?
1) Check the record is exist or not?
Declare
E emp% rowtype
Begin
e.empno := &empno;
select * into e from emp where empno =e.empno;
Dbms_output.putline(empno || e.empno);
Exception
When no_data_found then
FAQS
Dbms_output.putline(e.empno ||doest exist);

End;
2) User defined exceptions?
Define p_dept_desc =OracleApplications
Define p_dept_number =1236
Declare
E_invalid_dept exception;
Begin
Update departments
Set dept_name=&p_dept_desc
Where dept_id =&p_dept_number;
If sql% not found then
Raise e_invalid_departments;
End if;
Commit;
Exception
When e_invalid_departments then
Dbms_output.putline(no such dept);
End;
42) Can u define exceptions twice in same block?
No
43) Can you have two functions with the same name in a pl/sql block?
Yes
44) Can you have two stored functions with in the same name?
Yes
45) Can function be overload?
Yes
46) What is the maximum number of statements that can be specified in a trigger statement?
One
47) Can functions be overloaded ?
Yes
48) Can 2 functions have same name & input parameters but differ only by return data type
No
49) What is a package?
Group logically related pl/sql types, items and subprograms.
1) Package specification
FAQS
2) Package body
Advantages of a package:
Modularity
Easier Application Design
Information Hiding
Overloading
You cannot overload:
Two subprograms if their formal parameters differ only in name or parameter mode. (datatype
and their total number is same).
Two subprograms if their formal parameters differ only in datatype and the different datatypes
are in the same family (number and decimal belong to the same family)
Two subprograms if their formal parameters differ only in subtype and the different subtypes
are based on types in the same family (VARCHAR and STRING are subtypes of VARCHAR2)
Two functions that differ only in return type, even if the types are in different families.
50) What is FORWARD DECLARATION in Packages?
PL/SQL allows for a special subprogram declaration called a forward declaration. It consists of
the subprogram specification in the package body terminated by a semicolon. You can use
forward declarations to do the following:
Define subprograms in logical or alphabetical order.
Define mutually recursive subprograms.(both calling each other).
Group subprograms in a package
Example of forward Declaration:
CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY forward_pack
IS
PROCEDURE calc_rating(. . .);
-- forward declaration
PROCEDURE award_bonus(. . .)
IS
-- subprograms defined
BEGIN
-- in alphabetical order
calc_rating(. . .);
...
END;
PROCEDURE calc_rating(. . .)
IS
BEGIN
...
END;
END forward_pack;
FAQS
Oracle Apps Interview Questions

Q1: Difference between customization, enhancement and implementation?
Ans: Customization: Customization is the developing of the forms, reports and SQL script from
the beginning or changing the existing.
Enhancement: Enhancement is the modification of forms & Other components according to
client user requirement.
Implementation: Implementation is the testing of Applications.
Q2: What are the Types of Customizations?

Ans: There are two types of customizations.
1). Customization by extensions
2). Customizations by Modifications.
Customization by extensions: Customization by extension means developing new:
Component for existing Oracle applications and develop new application using the
Development feature of AOL (Application object Library).
Customization by extensions means Copying an Existing Oracle Application Component (Forms,
Report, PL/SQL etc.) to a custom application directory and modifying the Copy.
Customizations by Modifications: Modifying existing oracle application Component to meet
your specific Requirement.
Q3: What are the most Common Types of Customization?
Ans:
TYPE 1: # Changing Forms:
1) . Changing Forms
2) . Validation logic
3) . Behavior
TYPE2: # Changing Report or Program
1) . Appearance
2) . Logic
TYPE3: # Database Customizations:
1) . Adding read only Schema
2) . Augment (add) logic with database Triggers.
TYPE4: # integrating third Party Software
(NOTE: For more Information on customization goes 115devg.pdf Chapter Twenty-Seven)
Q4: What is Legacy system?
Ans: System other than Oracle is legacy System. Like FoxPro, spreadsheet.
Q5: What is ERP?
Ans: Resource Planning with in Enterprise. ERP is a term that covers whole Product line. ERP
means integration of different module. Any business will greatly benefits by
FAQS

adapting this feature because u can customize it or integrate it with other Packages
unique requirements.
to satisfy
BENEFITS OF ERP: 1). Flow of Information Effectively.

2). Maintaining Standardizations.
Q6: What is Oracle Apps ?
Ans: Oracle-apps is an ERP Package. The Key Feature of all the oracle-Application
module is Data Integration.
Master data is Integrated: All the application share common files of customers, suppliers,
employee, items and other entities that are used by multiple applications.
Transaction data is Integrated: Oracle automatically bridge transactions from one system to
another.
Financial data is integrated: Financial data is carried in a common format, and financial data is
transmitted from one application to another.
Q7: What is ad-hoc Report?
Ans: Ad-hoc Report is made to meet one-time reporting needs. Concerned with or formed for a
particular purpose. For example, ad hoc tax codes or an ad hoc database query
Q8: What is Localization?
Ans: Localization is designed to meet the specific needs of certain territories or countries. Most
localization is necessary because the local laws or accountings practice differ from country to
country.
Region of Localization: Three Region of Localization.
1). EMEA REGION: Europe, Middle East, Asia pacific and Africa.
2). America REGION: Canada plus Latin America.
3). Global REGION: localization that applies territories through the world. For example
Localization used in both Europe and Latin America are classified in the Global Region.
Q9: Library used in Localization?
Ans: #Globe: Globe library allows Oracle Application developer to incorporate global
Or regional feature into oracle application forms without modification of
The base Oracle Application forms.
# JA: JA library contains codes specific to Asia\Pacific Region. And is called
Globe Library.
# JE: JA library contains codes specific to EMEA Region. And is called
By Globe Library.
# JL:
The JL Library contains code specific to Latin America Region.
And is called by Globe Library.
Q10: How forms are attached.
Ans: STEP- ONE: First put the form in corresponding module like AP, AR, GL
FAQS
In appropriate server directory.

STEP-TWO: Second step register form with AOL.
STEP-THREE: Attach form with Function.
STEP-FOUR: Attach function with menu.
STEP-FIVE: Attach menu with responsibility.
STEP-SIX:
Attach responsibility to user.
Q11: How Report is attached.
Ans11: STEP- ONE: Register the application.
STEP-TWO: Put Report in appropriate server directory.
STEP-THREE:
STEP-FOUR:
STEP_FIVE: Define Responsibility (Sysadmin responsibility).
STEP-SIX:
est)
STEP-SEVEN:
STEP-EIGHT: Run the request through SRS. A request Id is created
Through which u can view the request.
Q12: What is workflow?
Ans: To automate and continuously increase business process we use workflow.
Workflow processes represent business process flows and information routings.
Main Function:
1). Routing Informations (sending or receiving information).
2). Defining & modifying Business Rule.
3). Delivering electronic notification. (By emails).
Q13: What is main workflow Component?
Ans13: 1). Workflow Builder. Workflow is the component that provides user interface For
creating, reviewing and maintaining workflow Definitions.
2). Workflow Engine.:workflow is the component that executes and enforces The defined
workflow Process.
3). Workflow Monitor Workflow is the component of oracle workflow that
Allow you to review the state or status of an item through any particular workflow process.
4). Workflow Definition Loader: allows u to download the text file.
5). Workflow Directory Services: Tells workflow how to find users.
6). Notification System: Send emails and receives responses from the Oracle Workflow
notification system.
Q14: What are Interface table in AP, AR & GL?
Ans:

AP INTERFACE TABLE:
FAQS
1). AP_INTERFACE_CONTROLS.
2). AP_INTERFACE_REJECTIONS
3). AP_INVOICE_INTERFACE
4). AP_INVOICE_LINES_INTERFACE.
AR INTERFACE TABLE:
1). AR_PAYMENTS_INTERFACE_ALL
2). AR_TAX_INTERFACE
3). HZ_PARTY_INTERFACE
4). HZ_PARTY_INTERFACE_ERRORS
5). RA_CUSTOMERS_INTERFACE_ALL
6). RA_INTERFACE_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL
7). RA_INTERFACE_ERRORS_ALL
8). RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL
9). RA_INTERFACE_SALESCREDITS_ALL
GLINTERFACE TABLE:
1). GL_BUDGET_INTERFACE
2). GL_DAILY_RATES_INTERFACE
3). GL_IEA_INTERFACE
4). GL_INTERFACE
5). GL_INTERFACE_CONTROL
6). GL_INTERFACE_HISTORY
Q15 Total numbers of Tables in AP, AR, GL?
Ans; AP 173
AR 294
GL 165
FA 160
PO 132
OE 109
Q16: How will u customize a form?
Ans: STEP1: Copy the template.fmb and Appstand.fmb from AU_/forms/us.
Then put in custom directory. The libraries (FNDSQF, APPCORE, APPDAYPK,
GLOBE, CUSTOM, JE, JA, JL, VERT) are automatically attached.
STEP2:
Create or open new Forms. Then customize.
STEP3:
Save this Form in Corresponding Modules.
Q17: What are non-financial modules?
Ans: 1). Projects
2). Manufacturing
3). Supply chain management
4). HR
5). Front Office
6). Strategic Enterprise management.
FAQS
Q18: Explain Order- cycle in OE.

Ans: Step1: Enter sales order.
Step2: Book the sales order.
Step3: Pick release order.
Step4: Ship or confirm order.
Step5: Backorder Release
Step6: Receivable Interface
Step7: Complete line
Step8: Complete order
Q19: What is AU_.
Ans: This is the Application utility contains PL/SQL library used by oracle forms, reports, oracle
form source files and a copy of all Java used to generate the desk Client.
Q20: What is ad_?
Ans: ad_ (Application DBA). Contain installation and maintenance utility.
Such as Auto upgrade, Auto Patch and Admin Utility.
Q21: Can we make transaction in close Periods?
Ans: No, we can make only reports.
Q22: If Period is closed how we can enter transactions? (Doubt)
Ans: No, we cannot enter transaction.
Q23: what is SQl*Loader?
Ans: This tool is used to move data from a legacy system to oracle database.
In this two type of inputs to be provided to SQL * Loader.
First is data file, containing the actual data.
Second is the control file containing the specification which drive the
SQL* Loader.
Q24: How can u relate order management with AR?
Ans: sales orders are displayed after confirm release of sales in order management.
Q25: What is the Field of GL_interface?
Ans: 1). SET_OF_BOOKS_ID
2). ACCOUNTING_DATE
3). CURRENCY_CODE
4). DATE_CREATED
5). CREATED_BY
6). CURRENCY_CONVERSION_DATE
7). ENCUMBRANCE_TYPE_ID
8). BUDGET_VERSION_ID
9). CURRENCY_CONVERSION_RATE
FAQS
10). ACCOUNTED_DR
11).ACCOUNTED_CR
12).TRANSACTION_DATE
Q26: In which directory u store your custom form?
Ans:
App_ is directory. We have Core directory Adm., ad (application dba),
Au (application utility), fnd (Foundation), Cust-Dem is Custom directory where
Have 11.0.28 version then we have forms directory. Inside the form we have US
Directory. Where we stand forms.
Q27: Who is Holder of Alerts?
Ans: ALERT Manager.
Q28: Steps for upgradation of 11 to 11i?
Ans28: STEP1: Perform category 1,2,3. (Preupgrade steps).
STEP2: Run auto grade
STEP3: Apply database patch to bring your database to the
Current oracle apps release level.
STEP4: Install online help (optional).
STEP5: Perform Category 4, 5, 6 Steps (Post-upgrade steps).
STEP6: Perform product specific implementation steps as listed in your products Users guide.
STEP7: perform upgrade finishing step.
Q28: How interface program is written and for what purpose
Ans28: Interface Program is written through SQL, PL/SQL.
PURPOSE: 1)Basic Integration
2)Imports valid data that is meaningful to Organization
integrity of any data
Before introducing into oracle apps.
4). Imports data from legacy system.
5). Import data from one module to another.
Q29: What is AOL.
Ans: AOL stands for Application Object Library used for customization
And implementation of forms and Reports.
Q30: which Columns are taking care of descriptive flex fields?
Ans: Attribute Columns
Q31: Can u attach two sets of books with single profile?
Ans: yes we can attach.
Q32: How U Can u attaches two sets of books with single profile.
3). Validate the
FAQS
Ans: we can attach different set of Books with different responsibility

In a single profile.
Q33: can we run FSG report other than GL?
Ans: No, we cannot run. Because FSG reports can only run in GL.
Q34: What are the common libraries in AOL.
Ans34: libraries contain reusable client-side code.
Common Libraries in AOL.
FNDSQF: Contain packages for procedures for Message Dictionary,
Flex fields, profiles, and concurrent processings.
APPCORE: Contain packages for procedures for Menus and Toolbar.
APPDAYPK: contain packages that control application Calendar.
APPFLDR: packages for Folder.
Qns35: What is Multilanguage support.
Ans35: Oracle Application provides some feature to support multi language support.
Qns36: Can u delete the posted Journals? Can U make Changes in Posted Journals?
Ans36: No, once the posting program in oracle financial has updated accounts balances, you
cannot alter the posted journals; you can only post additional entries that negate the original
values. These entries contain either the negative values of the original posted amounts or the
original values but with the debit amounts and credit amounts reversed.
These approaches are known as reversal method.
Qns37: When u r taking bulk of reports.
Ans37: At midnight because traffic is less.
Qns38: Who is Holder of Alerts?
Ans38: Alert Manager.
Qns39: What is TOAD.
Ans39: Tool for managing database activity,
Qns40: What is Flexfield?
Ans40: Oracle Application uses Flexfield to capture information about
Your organization. Flexfield have flexible structure for storing key information.
Like Company, Cost Center, and Account. They also give u highly adaptable
Structure for storing customized information in oracle Applications.
Qns41: What are the elements of Flex field?
Ans41: 1). Structure
2). Segment
3). Segment value 4). Value set
FAQS
Qns42: What do u means by structure?

Ans42: Structure as the name implies defines how Flexfield is constructed. A Flex
field structure determines how many Segments it has, as well as how the segments are
sequenced. Each structure is mapped to a structure ID Column in the database table for key
Flexfield. Each Structure is mapped with context sensitive column in the database table for
descriptive Flexfield.
Qns43: What do u means by Segment?
Ans 43: Each Segment represents an element of your business structure
Such as Employee, Cost Center, Account. A Flexfield can have
Multiple Field. A segment is a single field with in a Flexfield.
Qns44: What do u means by Value set?
Ans 44: Value set identifies a list of valid value for the segment.
Value set also governs the segment values length, its data type.
Qns45: What do u means by Segment value?
Ans45: Value for each segment of flex field.
Qns46: What is Key and Descriptive Flexfield.
Ans46: Key Flexfield: #unique identifier, storing key information
# Used for entering and displaying key information.
For example Oracle General uses a key Flexfield called Accounting
Flexfield to uniquely identifies a general account.
Descriptive Flexfield: # To Capture additional information.
# To provide expansion space on your form
With the help of []. [] Represents descriptive flexfield.
Qns47: Difference between Key and Descriptive Flexfield?
Ans47:
Key Flexfield
Descriptive Flefield
1. Unique Identifier
1.To capture extra information
2. Key Flexfield are stored in segment
2.Stored in attributes
3.For key flex field there are flex field
3. Context-sensitive flex field is a
Qualifier and segment Qualifier
feature
of DFF.(descriptive flex field)
Qns48: Difference between Flexfield Qualifier and Segment Qualifier.
Ans48: Flexfield qualifier is used to identify a particular segment within a Key flexfield.
While segment qualifier is used to capture value for any particular Segment.
Qns49:
What is Cross Validation Rule?
Ans 49: To prevent users from entering invalid combinations of segments Oracle General Ledger
allows u to set up cross validation rule. There are two types of cross-validation
FAQS
Rule element: include and exclude. For example, to secure a balance sheet account to be
associated with the balance sheet cost center or the corporate cost center only,U must include
every possible combination then exclude the balance Sheet account range for the cost center.
Qns50: Purpose of Cross Validation rule.
Ans50: u can use Cross Validation rule to perform certain validations in your
Accounting
flex field. For example, u can use Cross Validation rule To secure all balance sheet account to be
associated only with the balance Sheet cost center, corporate cost center and profit and loss
account to be associated with the specific cost center other than the corporate Center.
Qns51: What are types of segment for Descriptive Flexfield.
Ans51: Two types
1). Global segments
2). Context-sensitive segment.
Global Segment: global segment maps one to one to a database column.
DFF segment stored in ATTRIBUTE. Global segment always
Displayed in a descriptive flex field.
Context-Sensitive Segment: Context sensitive segment can share a single database
Column because the context sensitive will be
Mutually exclusive and
will never overlap.
Qns52: What is Key Flexfield in AP, AR, GL.
Ans52: Key Flexfield in GL: Accounting Flexfield.
Accounting Flexfield is chart of account flex field.
It is used for identifying an account combination.
It must have a balancing segment, cost center segment, Natural account segment.
Combination table in Acct. FF: GL_CODE_COMBINATION_ID.
Structure column: chart_of_accounts_id.
Maximum number of Segments: 30.
Key flex field in AR: 1). Sales Tax Location Flexfield.
2). Territory Flexfield
Sales Tax Location Flexfield: to calculate sales tax.
Combination table: AR_LOCATION_COMBINATION
Max number of segment: 10
Territory Flexfield: This is used to group territories according to company needs
Combination table: RA_TERRITORIES.
Qns53: What is purpose of Token Field.
Ans53: To define parameter name defined in oracle reports.
Qns54: What is Template form?
Ans54 Template form is the starting point for all development of new form.
Start developing new form by copying template.fmb file located in
AU_/forms/us to local directory and renaming it as appropriate.
FAQS
Template Form Contains

--Several libraries like FNDSQF, APPDAYPK, and APPCORE.
--STANDARD_TOOLBAR, STANDARD_CALENDER
--Several form level trigger with required code.
Qns55: What are Handlers?
Ans55: Oracle application uses group of packaged procedure called handlers,
To organize PL/SQL code in the form so that it is easier to develop,
Maintain and debug.
Types Of handler: 1). Item handler
2). Event handler
3). Table handler.
Item handler: An item handler is a PL/SQL Procedure.
That encapsulates all of the code that acts upon an item.
Event handler: An item handler is a PL/SQL Procedure.
That encapsulates all of the code that acts upon an event.
Table handler: An item handler is a PL/SQL Procedure.
That manages interaction between block and base table.
Qns56: What is Appstand Form.
Ans56: Appstand form contains the Following.
1). Object Group STANDARD_PC_AND_VA.
Which contain the visual attribute and property class.
2). Object group STANDARD_TOOLBAR which contains the windows
Canvasses blocks and item of application toolbar.
3). Object group STANDARD_CALENDER which contains the windows
Canvasses blocks and item of application calendar.
4). Object groups QUERY_FIND, which contains a window, blocks and item
Used as a starting point for coding a find window.
Qns56: What is set of books.
Ans56: A financial reporting entity that uses a particular chart of accounts, functional currency
and accounting calendar. You must define at least one set of books for each business location.
Qns57: what are four options that are tied to defined set of books.
Ans57: 1. Standard option (supenseposting, automatic posting, Average balance posting)
2). Average Balance option.
3). Budgetary control option.
4). Reporting Currency option.
Qns58: What is FSG.
ns58: A powerful and flexible tool you can use to build your own custom
Reports without programming.
Qns59: What are the components of FSG?
FAQS
Ans59: 1). Row set

2). Column set
3). Row order
4). Display set
5). Content set.
Qns60: What is MRC.
Ans60: The Multi Reporting Currency Feature allows u to report and maintain records at
the transaction level in more than one Functional currency. You can do by defining one or more
set of books in adition to primary set of books.
Qns61: What are Alerts.
Ans61: Oracle alert is an application module that reports exception actions based
on
detected exceptions. U can create alert when specific event occur or that run
periodically. Oracle alert provides a reliable way to monitor database activity. As well as keeping
u informed of unusual condition. We can monitor your business performance through alerts.
Qns62: Types of alerts?
Ans62: Two types of alerts.
1.
Event alert
2.
Periodic Alert
Event alerts: An event alert is a database trigger that notifies u when a specified database event
occurs and a particular condition is met.
Periodic event: A periodic alert on the other hand is not immediate.
It is executed according to a predefined frequency
Qns63: What are three alert action types?
Ans63:1.Detail(An action defined atdetail level is initiated once for each exception
found
Meaning once for each row returned by the select statement
in the alert definition.
2). Summary (An exception defined at the summary level is initiated
Once for
all exceptions found or once for each unique output combination.)
3). No Exception (An action defined at the no-exception level is initiated once if no data is
returned from the select statement).
Qns64: What are the advantages of alert.
Ans64: 1). Integration with email.
2). Automatic processing
3). Performing routine transactions
4). Maintaining information flow without a paper trail.
Qns65: What is Currency.
Ans65: Two types of Currency.
1). Foreign Currency: A currency that you define for your set of books for recording and
conducting accounting transactions in a currency other than your functional currency
FAQS
2). Functional Currency: The principal currency you use to record transactions and
maintain accounting data within General Ledger. The functional currency is usually the
Currency in which you perform most of your Business transactions. You specify the functional
currency for each set of books in the Set of Books window.
Qns66: Types of matching.
Ans66: Two way Matching: The process of verifying that purchase order and invoice
information matches within accepted tolerance levels. Payables uses the following criteria to
verify two-way matching:
Invoice price <= Order price
Quantity billed <= Quantity ordered
Three way matching: The process of verifying that purchase order, invoice, and receiving
verify three-way matching:
Invoice price <= Purchase Order price
Quantity billed <= Quantity received
Four way Matching: The process of verifying that purchase order, invoice, and receiving
verify four-way matching:
Invoice price <= Order price
Quantity billed <= Quantity accepted
Qns67: What is the difference between Master table, setup table, and transaction table.
Ans 67: Master table: Created in any module and accessible across the application.
Like GL_CODE_COMBINATIONS, GL_SET_OF_BOOKS.
Transaction Table: transaction tables are tables that store day-to-day transaction
Data. Such as payable invoice, receivable invoice.
Set-Up table: Created once with in Application. Like FND_CURRENCY.
Qns68: Name Few Master tables, Set up table I, transaction table in AP, AR, GL.
Ans68:
Modul Master table
setup table
Transaction table
e
Name
GL
1.GL_SET_OF_BOOKS
FND_CURRENC GL_JE_LINES
2.GL_CODE_COMBINATION Y
GL_JE_HEADRES
S
GL_JE_BATCHES
AP
PO_VENDORS
AP_BANK_BRANCHES
PO_VENDOR_SITES
AP_HOLD_CODES
FND_CURRENC
Y
AR
HZ_CUST_ACCOUNT
FND_CURRENC
Y
GL_interface
GL_CONSOLIDATION
GL_SUSPENSE_ACCOUNTS
GL_INTERCOMPANY_ACCOUN
TS
AP_BATCHES_ALL
AP_INVOICE_ALL
AP_DISTRIBUTION_ALL
AP_CHECKS_ALL
AP_PAYMENTS_HISTOTRY_ALL
AR_ADJUSTEMENT_ALL
AR_PAYMENTS_SCHEDULE_AL
L
AR_CASH_RECEIPT_ALL
AR_DISTRIDUTION_ALL
AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATION
_ALL.
Qns69: What do u means by FIFO pick and FIFO ship.

Ans69: FIFO pick: First in first out. (Order comes from customer).
FIFO ship: order ship to customer.
Qns70: Difference between SC and NCA.
Ans70:
SC
NCA
1. SMART CLIENT
1. Network computing Architecture
2. No form server in SC. All form is in
2. Forms are in the server. Thus making
directory, which is on the client.
security higher.
Qns71: What is first step in GL.
Ans71: Creating chart of account.
Qns72: What are standard reports in GL?
Ans72: Trial Balance Report
Journal Report
FSG REPORT
Account Analysis Report.
Qns73: What are standard reports in AP?
Ans73: 1. Supplier Report
2). Payment Report
Qns74: What are standards reports in AR.
FAQS
FAQS
Ans74:
1. Tax Report
2. Customer Profile Report
3.
Aging Report
4. Dunning Letter Report
Qns75.What are customer table, transaction table, and Receipt table in AR.
Ans
Modul Customer Table
Transaction Table
e
AR
HZ_CUST_PROFILE_CLASS
RA_CUTOMER_TRX_ALL
HZ_CUST_PROF_CLASS_AMTS
RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_LINES_ALL
HZ_CUSTOMERS_PROFILES
RA_CUST_TRX_TYPES_ALL
HZ_CUST_PROFILE_AMTS
RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_SALESREPS
HZ_CUST_ACCOUNTS
_ALL
HZ_CUST_ACCT_SITES_ALL
HZ_CUST_CONTACT_POINTS
HZ_CUST_ACCT_RELATES_ALL
HZ_CUST_SITES_USES_ALL
RECEIPT Table
AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL
AR_RECEIPT_METHOD
AR_CASH_RECEIPT_HISTORY_ALL
AR_INTERIM_CASH_RECEIPT_ALL
Qns76: What is Custom-Library.
Ans76: The custom library allows extension of oracle application without modification
of oracle application code. U can use the custom library for customization Such as zoom (moving
to another form), enforcing business rule (for example Vendor name must be in uppercase
letters) and disabling field that do not apply for your site.
Custom library is placed in AU_ / resource directory.
Event Passed to Custom-Library:
1). WHEN_FORM_NAVIGATE
2). WHEN_NEW_FORM_INSTANCE
3). WHEN_NEW_BLOCK_INSTANCE
4). WHEN_NEW_RECORD_INSTANCE
5). WHEN_NEW_ITEM_INSTANCE.
Qns78: What is the Component of alerts.
Ans78: 1. Message
2.SQL SCRIPT
3.Operating system script
4. Concurrent request.
FAQS
Qns79: What is difference between charge back and adjustment?

Ans79:
CHARGEBACK
ADJUSTMENT
A new debit item that u assign to your A receivable feature that allows u to
customer closing an existing,
increase or decrease the amount due of
outstanding debit item.
your invoice, debit memos, charge
back.
Qns80: What are types of invoice?
Ans80:
TYPES OF
INVOICES
NINE Type:
Standard
Credit memo
Debit memo
Expense Report
PO default
Prepayment
Quick match
Withholding tax
Mixed
Qns81: What are sub modules in Financials?

Ans81:
Sub module in
Financials
GL
AP
AR
FA
CM (cash
management)
Financial Analyzer
Qns82: Concept of Multiorganisation, Explain?

Ans82: Multi organization allows u to setup multiple legal entities within a single installation of
oracle applications.
ARCHITECTURE OF MULTIPLE ORGANISATIONS
SET OF BOOKS : Within one set of books u may define one or more legal entities.
FAQS
LEGAL ENTITY: each legal entity has its own employer tax identification number.
And prepare its own tax forms. Each legal entity has its own Tax forms. Each legal entity has its
own set of federal tax rule, State tax rule and local tax rule. Legal entities consist of one or More
operating units.
OPERATING UNIT: operating units represents buying and selling units with in your
Organization. Oracle order Entry, Oracle receivables, Oracle Purchasing,
And
Oracle Payables.
INVENTORY ORGANIZATION: an Inventory organization is a unit that has inventory
transactions. Possibly manufactures and or distribute products.
Qns83: How will u attach SOB?
Ans83: STEP1: Create a new Responsibility.
STEP2: Attach the new responsibility to an existing user.
STEP3: Defining a new Period Type.
STEP4: Defining an accounting calendar.
STEP5: Defining a set of books.
STEP7: Signing on as new responsibility.
Qns84: What are key functions provided by Oracle General Ledger?
Ans84:
Function Provided by GL
General Accounting
Budgeting
Multiple Currencies
Intercompany Accounting
Cost Accounting
Consolidation
Financial Reporting
Qns85: What do u means by cost center?
Ans85: COST center gives the information about investment and returns on different projects.
Qns86: what is Fiscal Year.
Ans86: Any yearly accounting Period without relationship to a calendar year.
Qns87: What is Credit-memo?
Ans87: A document that partially or reverse an original invoice.
Qns88: How data is transferred from legacy system to Oracleapps table.
Ans88: A system other than oracle apps system is called legacy System.
Qns89: What is Chart of Accounts?
FAQS
Ans89: The account structure your organization uses to record transaction and maintain account
balances.
Qns90: What are different types of budgets?
Ans90:
Types of Budgets
Operating
Capital
Master Production Schedule
Variable
Time-Phased
Qns91: How others modules are integrate through GL.
Ans91: Integration of module With GL
Qns92: Explain Payable Cycles
Ans92: Four steps in AP Cycle
PAYABLE CYCLE
Four steps in Payable Cycles:
STEP1: Enter Invoice (this process may or may not include matching each invoice with PO).
STEP2: Approve invoice payment.
STEP3: Select and pay approval invoices.
STEP4: Reconcile the payment with bank statement
Qns95: AGING BUCKETS?
A. Time periods you define to age your debit items. Aging buckets are used in the Aging reports
to see both current and outstanding debit items. For example, you can define an aging bucket
that includes all debit items that are 1 to 30 days past due.
Payables uses the aging buckets you define for its Invoice Aging Report
Q96. CREDIT INVOICE?
A. An invoice you receive from a supplier representing a credit amount that the supplier owes to
you. A credit invoice can represent a quantity credit or a price reduction.
Q97. CREDIT MEMO?
A document that partially or fully reverses an original invoice.
Q98.CUTOFF DAY?
The day of the month that determines when an invoice with proximate payment terms is due. For
example, if it is January and the cutoff day is the 10th, invoices dated before or on January 10 are
due in the next billing period; invoices dated after the 10th are due in the following period.
Q99. DEBIT INVOICE?
FAQS
A. An invoice you generate to send to a supplier representing a credit amount that the supplier
owes to you. A debit invoice can represent a quantity credit or a price reduction.
Q100. JOURNAL ENTRY HEADERS?
A. A method used to group journal entries by currency and journal entry category within a
journal entry batch. When you initiate the transfer of invoices or payments to your general ledger
for posting, Payables transfers the necessary information to create journal entry headers for the
information you transfer. Journal Import in General Ledger uses the information to create a
journal entry header for each currency and journal entry category in a journal entry batch. A
journal entry batch can have multiple journal entry headers.
Q101 What is Oracle Financials?
Oracle Financials products provide organizations with solutions to a wide range of long- and
short-term accounting system issues. Regardless of the size of the business, Oracle Financials can
meet accounting management demands with:
Oracle Assets: Ensures that an organization's property and equipment investment is accurate and
that the correct asset tax accounting strategies are chosen.
Oracle General Ledger: Offers a complete solution to journal entry, budgeting, allocations,
consolidation, and financial reporting needs.
Oracle Inventory: Helps an organization make better inventory decisions by minimizing stock
and maximizing cash flow.
Oracle Order Entry: Provides organizations with a sophisticated order entry system for
managing customer commitments.
Oracle Payables: Lets an organization process more invoices with fewer staff members and
tighter controls. Helps save money through maximum discounts, bank float, and prevention of
duplicate payment.
Oracle Personnel: Improves the management of employee- related issues by retaining and
making available every form of personnel data.
Oracle Purchasing: Improves buying power, helps negotiate bigger discounts, eliminates paper
flow, increases financial controls, and increases productivity.
Oracle Receivables:. Improves cash flow by letting an organization process more payments faster,
without off-line research. Helps correctly account for cash, reduce outstanding receivables, and
improve collection effectiveness.
Oracle Revenue Accounting gives organization timely and accurate revenue and flexible
commissions reporting.
Oracle Sales Analysis: Allows for better forecasting, planning and reporting of sales information.
FAQS
Q102 What is the most important module in Oracle Financials?

The General Ledger (GL) module is the basis for all other Oracle Financial modules. All other
modules provide information to it. If you implement Oracle Financials, you should switch your
current GL system first. GL is relatively easy to implement. You should go live with it first to
give your implementation team a chance to be familiar with Oracle Financials.
Q103 What is MultiOrg and what is it used for?
MultiOrg allows multiple operating units and their relationships to be defined within a single
installation of Oracle Applications. This keeps each operating unit's transaction data separate and
secure. Use the following query to determine if MultiOrg is intalled: Select multi_org_flag from
fnd_product_groups;
Oracle apps Interview questions - 4
1.
Q: How do you make your own query when you are in forms query mode? A: You can use
a placeholder to achieve this. If you enter a single colon ( : ) in one of your query fields during the
Enter Query mode, Oracle Forms Run Query will prompt you to enter the text of SQL Where
clause.
2.
Q: What is concurrent processing? A: Concurrent processing is a process that
simultaneously runs programs in the background (usually on the server rather than your
workstation) while working online.
3.
Q: What is a Concurrent Manager? A: A Concurrent Manager is a component of
concurrent processing that monitors and runs requests while you work online. Once the user
submits a request to run the job, the information is stored in the request table. A concurrent
manager gets the information from the request table and executes the specified concurrent job.
4.
Q: What is a request set? A request set is a collection of reports or programs grouped
together. Once you submit a request set job, it executes all the programs in a report set
sequentially or in a parallel manner as defined in the request set.
5.
Q: What are the four phases of a concurrent request? The four phases are as follows:
inactive, pending, running, and completed.
6.
Q: How would you identify the results of the request in the Concurrent View Requests
window? Whenever a concurrent job is submitted, Applications creates a Request ID. You can
use this Request ID to view the results.
7.
Q: What are the profile options? How many levels of profile options are available? Profile
options are set to determine how the applications look and feel. There are four levels of profile
options available: site level, application level, responsibility level, and user level. You can have
various categories of profile options, such as personal options, system options, auditing profile
options, currency options, Flexfield options, online reporting options, personal output viewer
options, and user profile options.
8.
Q: What is a document sequence? A document sequence assigns unique numbers to the
documents (transactions) generated by Oracle Applications. For example, each invoice has its
own unique invoice number and each purchasing document has its own unique purchase order
(PO) number.
9.
Q: What are the steps involved in adding a custom program to Oracle Applications?

a)
b)
c)
d)
FAQS
Develop a concurrent program or report.

Identify the corresponding executable and register it with the application.
Create a concurrent program and its parameters.
Add a concurrent program to a request set.
10.
Q: How do you register a printer? To add a new printer, go to Install Printer Register.
11.
Q: What is a Flexfield? How many types of Flexfields exist? A Flexfield is a field made up
of segments. Each segment has an assigned name and a list of valid values. Two types of
Flexfields exist: Key Flexfields and Descriptive Flexfields (DFFs).
12.
Q: What is a Key Flexfield? A Key Flexfield is a unique identifier that is made up of
meaningful segments to identify GL account numbers and item numbers. Key Flexfields are
usually stored in SEGMENT1...SEGMENTn database columns.
Some examples would be Item No 34H-AFR-223-112.G and GL Account No:
100-00-1000-324-11100.
For an example GL Account, segments could be identified as Organization, Cost Center,
Account, Product, Product Line.
13.
Q: What are the Key Flexfields in Oracle Applications? The following table lists some of
the Key Flexfields available in Oracle Applications.
Key Flexfields
Using Applications
Accounting
General Ledger
Asset Key
Fixed Assets
Location
Fixed Assets
Category
Fixed Assets
Account Aliases
Inventory
Item Catalogs
Inventory
Item Categories
Inventory
System Iitems
Inventory
Stock Locators
Inventory
Sales Orders
Inventory
Sales Tax Location
Receivables
Territory
FAQS
Receivables
Job
Human Resources
Grade
Human Resources
Position
Human Resources
Soft Coded Key
Human Resources
14.
Q: What is a Descriptive Flex Field? A DFF lets you define the custom fields into Oracle
Application forms without customizing the program code. DFFs in forms are represented by a
"beer mug" field (a single space field enclosed by brackets) that looks like the following symbol: [
]. They are usually stored in ATTRIBUTE1...ATTRIBUTEn database columns. DFFs can also be
used to accept report parameters.
15.
Q: What types of segments can be set up for DFFs? Global or context-sensitive.
16.
Q: What is a value set? A value set is a list of values validated against segments. You can
create a value set and assign it to a Flexfield segment.
17.
Q: How many validation types are there? Six validation types exist:none, dependent,
independent, table, special, and pair.
18.
Q: What are the required and optional steps for setting up Flexfields? The required steps
are as follows: define the value sets, define the structures, and define the values, if needed. The
optional steps are as follows: define the security rules, define the cross-validation rules, and
define the shorthand aliases, if necessary.
19.
Q: Can you define cross-validation rules for DFFs? No, you cannot. You can only define
them for Key Flexfields.
20.
Q: Can a value set be shared between Flexfields? Yes, value sets can be shared between
Flexfields.
21.
Q: Can a value set be shared within a Flexfield structure? No, value sets cannot be shared
between segments within a Flexfield as long as they do not carry the same type of information.
For example, date information can be shared between segments within a Flexfield.
22.
Q: What are the advanced validation options? Three types of advanced validation options
are available. $PROFILES$, which references the current value of a profile option. An example
would be $PROFILES$.profile_option_name. Block.field, which references the block field.
$FLEX$, which refers to the current value of a previously used value set. An example would be
$FLEX$.value_set_name (cascading dependencies).
23.
Q: What is the next step after defining the segments for Flexfields? Freezing and compiling
the structure.
24.
Q: What are the steps required to set up value security rules? Make sure security is
enabled, define rules for the value set, and assign rules to the user's responsibility.
25.
Q: What is Oracle Alert? Oracle Alert is an exception reporting system. It keeps you
informed on an as-needed basis. It also communicates with other users through e-mail regarding
exception messages.
FAQS
26.
Q: How many types of alerts are there? Two types of alerts exist: Periodic Alerts and Event
Alerts. Periodic Alerts fire at a time interval, and Event Alerts are fired by database table
changes.
27.
Q: What are Quick Codes? Quick Codes, also known as Quickpicks, are standard sets of
user-defined values. Lookup is a combination of a code and a description. The lookup tables are
generally populated by the scripts located in /install/odf directory.
28.
Q: What is an Open Interface in Oracle Applications? Open Interface, also known as the
Application Programmer Interface (API), is a process whereby the Oracle Applications are linked
with external or legacy systems. Open Interface works as a temporary staging area to load the
external information into Oracle Applications tables. Once the data is validated, it sends the
information to the permanent tables. Rejected transactions can be corrected and resubmitted.
29.
Q: Which schema has complete access to the Oracle Applications data model? The APPS
schema. AutoInstall automatically sets the FNDNAM environment variable to the name of the
APPS schema.
30.
Q: What is the directory in Oracle Applications? $APPL_.
31.
Q: What is a product directory? It starts with the product shortname and is suffixed with ,
such as . For example, General Ledger's directory is GL_.
32.
Q: What are the log and output directory names for a product group? The product group
environment file sets the APPLLOG variable to log and APPLOUT to out. For example, the
output directory for General Ledger is $GL_/$APPLOUT. For log, it is $GL_/_$APPLLOG.
33.
Q: What data dictionary tables do you use to obtain detailed information regarding? You
can write a query by joining the FND_TABLE and FND__COLUMNS tables. FND_INDEXES and
FND_INDEX_COLUMNS tables are part of the data dictionary. All the FND_ table names are
self-explanatory.
34.
Q: What are the primary underlying tables for concurrent
processing? FND_CONCURRENT_PROGRAMS,
FND_CONCURRENT__REQUESTS, FND_CONCURRENT_PROCESSES, and
FND_CONCURRENT_QUEUES tables.
35.
Q: What are the primary underlying tables for
Flexfields? FND_DESCR_FLEX_CONTEXTS,
FND_FLEX_VALIDATION__RULES, FND_FLEX_VALUE_SETS, FND_ID_FLEXS,
FND_ID__FLEX_SEGMENTS, and FND_ID_FLEX_STRUCTURES tables.
36.
Q: What is the primary underlying table for AOL QuickCodes? FND_LOOKUPS table.
37.
Q: What is the application dummy table used by a form block? FND_DUAL table.
38.
Q: What is the main underlying table for Profile Options? FND_PROFILE_OPTIONS table.
39.
Q: What are the main prerequisites for creating a custom application or responsibility? Set
up a directory structure for a custom application, and define an environment variable that
translates to your application base path.
40.
Q: What are the WHO columns? WHO columns are used to track the changes to your data
in the application tables. WHO columns exist in all Oracle Applications standard tables. The
following five are considered WHO columns:
Column Name
CREATED_BY
CREATION_DATE
FAQS
LAST_UPDATED_BY
LAST_UPDATE_DATE
LAST_UPDATE_LOGIN
41.
Q: Do I need to have WHO column information in custom forms? Yes. It is strongly
recommended to add WHO columns to the custom tables and call standard API,
FND_STANDARD.SET_WHO in PRE-INSERT, and PRE-UPDATE triggers in each block of the
form. Also, specify these fields as hidden in each block of the form.
42.
Q: What are the additional WHO columns used for concurrent programs? Concurrent
programs use all the following WHO inncluding the following four.
Column Name
PROGRAM_APPLICATION_ID
PROGRAM_ID
PROGRAM_UPDATE_DATE
43.
Q: Can you disable the WHO columns' information in a form block? Yes. You can disable
HELP -> ABOUT THIS RECORD information within a block. Call the following procedures in a
block level WHEN-NEW-BLOCK-INSTANCE
Trigger:app_standard.event('WHEN-NEW-BLOCK-INSTANCE');
app_standard.enable('ABOUT','PROPERTY_OFF');
44.
Q: How do you register your custom tables in PL/SQL? You can use AD_DD package to
register custom tables in PL/SQL.
45.
Q: How do you define the passing arguments in SQL/PLUS and PL/SQL concurrent
programs? You must name your passing arguments as &1, &2, &3 and so on.
46.
Q: How do you call your custom reports from a form? You can call your custom Oracle
reports in a form using the FND_REQUEST.SUBMIT_REQUEST procedure.
47.
Q: What is a template form? A template form is a starting point for the development of
custom forms. Copy the Template.fmb file from $AU_/forms/US directory to your local
directory and rename it.
48.
Q: Which libraries are attached to the template form? The following main libraries are
directly attached to the template form. APPCORE contains packages and procedures for standard
menus, toolbars, and so on. APPDAYPK contains a calendar package. FNDSQF contains
packages and procedures for Flexfields, concurrent processing, profiles, and a message
dictionary.
49.
Q: What is a calendar? A calendar is an object that lets you select the date and time. It is
automatically included in the template form. A Calendar package example would be
calendar.show.
50.
Q: Which template form triggers require some modifications? The ACCEPT,
FOLDER_RETURN_ACTION, KEY-DUPREC, KEY-MENU, KEYCLRFRM, ON-ERROR, KEYLISTVAL, POST-FORM, PRE-FORM, QUERY_FIND, WHEN-NEW-FORM-INSTANCE, WHEN-
FAQS
NEW-BLOCK-INSTANCE, WHEN-NEWRECORD-INSTANCE, and WHEN-NEW-ITEMINSTANCE triggers.

51.
Q: Which template form triggers cannot be modified? The CLOSE_WINDOW, EXPORT,
FOLDER_ACTION, KEY-COMMIT, KEY-EDIT, KEY-EXIT, KEY-HELP, LASTRECORD, WHENWINDOW-CLOSED, WHENFORM-NAVIGATE, and ZOOM triggers.
52.
Q: What are the main template files for Pro*C concurrent programs? The main template
files are EXMAIN.c and EXPROG.c .
53.
Q: What is the Oracle-recommended application short name for extensions? Oracle
recommends an application short name begin with XX. As an example, extensions to Oracle
Purchasing would be XXPO.
54.
Q: Where do you maintain the list of your custom programs? All custom programs should
be listed in the applcust.txt file. This file is located in the $APPL_/admin directory. When you
apply the patches, Oracle Applications uses this file for informational purposes.
55.
Q: What are the steps involved in modifying an existing form? First, you identify the
existing file and then you copy the file to a custom application directory, making sure to rename
it. You then make the necessary modifications, generate the form, and document it in the custom
program list using applcust.txt file.
56.
Q: Where do you maintain database customizations? You can maintain all your table
changes by creating a new schema. You can use your custom application short name (such as
XXPO) as your Oracle schema name for easy identification. The new schema must be registered
in the Oracle AOL.
57.
Q: Can you create extensions to Oracle Applications without modifying the standard form
code? Yes. This can be done using the CUSTOM library, which is an Oracle Forms PL/SQL
library. You can integrate your custom code directly with Oracle Applications without making
changes to your Oracle Applications forms code. The CUSTOM library is located in the
$AU_/res/plsql directory. Once you write the code, you compile and generate the CUSTOM
procedures to make your changes.
58.
Q: When do you use the CUSTOM library? You can use the CUSTOM library in a variety
of cases. You can use it to incorporate Zoom logic, logic for generic events, logic for productspecific events, and to add entries for the special menu.
FAQS
Oracle Apps Interview questions - 6

1. What are the various types of Exceptions?
User defined and Predefined Exceptions.
2. Can we define exceptions twice in same block?
No.
3. What is the difference between a procedure and a function?
Functions return a single variable by value where as procedures do not return any variable
by value. Rather they return multiple variables by passing variables by reference through their
OUT parameter.
4. Can you have two functions with the same name in a PL/SQL block ?
Yes.
5. Can you have two stored functions with the same name ?
Yes.
6. Can you call a stored function in the constraint of a table ?
No.
7. What are the various types of parameter modes in a procedure ?
IN, OUT AND INOUT.
8. What is Over Loading and what are its restrictions?
Over Loading means an object performing different functions depending upon the no. of
parameters or the data type of the parameters passed to it.
9. Can functions be overloaded?
Yes.
10. Can 2 functions have same name & input parameters but differ only by return data type
No.
FAQS
1. What is the Diff between APPS Schema and other Schemas?

Apps schema contains only Synonyms we can't create tables in apps schema, where as other
schemas contains tables, & all the objects. Here only we will create the tables and giving grants
on created tables. Almost all every time we will connect to apps schema only.
2. What is meant by Custom and what is the Purpose?
Custom is nothing but Customer , which is created for customer only. we can have multiple
custom
s based on client requirement. It is used to store developed & customized components.
Whenever oracle corp applying patches it will over ride on all the modules except custom .
Thats why we will use custom .
3. What is the Significance of US Folder?
It is nothing but language specification by default it is in american language. We can have
multiple languages folders based on installed languages. from backend we can get it from
FND_LANGUAGES -- COL --INSTALLED_FLAG I,B,D
I--INSTALLED,
B--BASE,
D--DISABLE
select language_code,nls_language from fnd_languages where installed_flag like 'B'
4. Where did U find the Application short name and basepath names?
select basepath,application_short_name from fnd_application from the backend. From the
from end we can get it Navigation Application Developer.-----> Application---->Register The
application name we will get from FND_APPLICATION_TL
5. Where can U find the release version from backend?
SELECT release_name from FND_PRODUCT_GROUPS; ---11.5.10.2
.
6. What are the Folders we will find below the 11.5.0 Folder?
Reports,forms,sql,lib,log,out,bin,admin,html,xml,msg,def, etc
7. Can we create Tables in the Apps Schema?
No.
8. Can we have custom schema when it it required?
yes, we can have custom schema, when we want to create a new table we required custom
schema.
9. What is meant by concurrent Program?
It is nothing but Instance of the execution along with parameters & Incompatables. Here
Incompatables nothing but if we are submiting cc programs if any one can be execute in those
program , which programs r not imp yet this time we will mention those programs in
incompatables tab.
10.
What are the steps we will follow to register Reports as Concurrent Program?
First develop the report & save it in local machine. upload into custom_/11.5.0/reports/us/
go to system administrator open executable form create executable by mentioning executable
method as reports ,executable as report name which was created. go to cc program form
FAQS
create ccprogram by attach executable name in executable section. then attach this ccprogram
to request group, Request group to Responsibility.Responsibility to User.
11. What is meant by Request group?
It is nothing but collection of cc programs.
12. What is Application ? What are the types and Purpose?
A) When we connect to the server we will find the called application . Under application we
have
Product .
Custom
Product is the default built by the manufacturer.
Custom is used to select the Client for his business
purposes. Customizations are done with the Custom
.
13. What is US folder in the Custom ?
It is a language specific folder used to store the G.U.I like reports and forms.
14.
Errorbuf: It is used to returns the error messages and sent it to the log file.
Retcode: It is used to show the status of the Procedure with 0, 1, and 2 0 for Completed
Normal
1 for Completed Warning
2 for Completed Error
What are mandatory parameters of Procedures and what the use of those?
15
Schema: Schema is the location in database contains database objects like views,
tables, and synonyms.
Apps Schema: It is used to connect the all schemas to get the information from The
database.
What is Apps Schema and Schema?
16. What is Token?
a) Use to transfer values to report builder and it is not case sensitive.
17.
a) A menu is a hierarchical arrangement of functions and menus. Each responsibility
has a menu assigned to it. A function is a part of an application that is registered under
a unique name for the purpose of assigning it to be including it from a menu.
Difference between FORM, Function and Menu?
18.Tell me something about SQL-LOADER.
FAQS
Sql * loader is a bulk loader utility used for moving data from external files into the
oracle database.
Sql* loader supports various load formats, selective loading, and multi-tables loads.
1) Conventional --The conventional path loader essentially loads the data by using
standard insert statement.
2) Direct -- The direct path loader (direct = true) by possess of logic involved with that,
and loads directly in to the oracle data files.
EX:- My data.csv file
1001, scott tiger,1000,40
1002,gvreddy,2345,50
Load data
Infile c:\data\mydata.csv
insert Into table emp Fields terminated by , optionally enclosed by
(empno, empname,sal,deptno)
>sqlldr scott/tiger@vis control=loader.ctl log= gvlog.log bad=gvbad.bad
discard=gvdis.dsc .
19. What is SET-OF-BOOKS?
Collection of Chart of Accounts and Currency and Calendars is called SOB
20. Tell me what r the Base tables in the AR?
hz_parties (party_id) (store info about org, groups and people)
HZ_PARTIES stores information about parties such as organizations,
people, and groups, including the identifying address information for the party.
hz_cust_accounts (cust_account_id)
HZ_CUST_ACCOUNTS stores information about customer relationships. If a
party becomes a customer, information about the customer account is stored in this
table. You can establish multiplecustomer relationships with a single party, so each
party can have multiple customer account records in this table.
hz_cust_acct_sites_all (cust_acct_site_id)
HZ_CUST_ACCT_SITES_ALL stores information about customer sites. One
customer account can have multiple sites. The address is maintained in
HZ_LOCATIONS.
hz_cust_site_uses_all (site_use_id)
HZ_CUST_SITE_USES_ALL stores information about site uses or business
purposes. A single customer site can have multiple site uses, such as bill to or ship to,
and each site use is stored as a record in this table.
hz_party_sites (party_site_id)
HZ_PARTY_SITES stores information about the relationship between Parties
and Locations. The same party can have multiple party sites. Physical addresses are
stored in HZ_LOCATIONS.
hz_locations (location_id)
HZ_LOCATIONS stores information about physical locations.
hz_Person_Profiles (person_profile_id)
HZ_PERSON_PROFILES stores detail information about people.
hz_Organization_Profiles (organization_profile_id)
FAQS
HZ_ORGANIZATION_PROFILES stores credit rating, financial statistics,

socioeconomic and corporate linkage information for business sites. The primary key
for this table is ORGANIZATION_PROFILE_ID.
21. FND USER EXITS:FND SRWINIT sets your profile option values, multiple organizations and allows
Oracle Application Object Library user exits to detect that they have been called by an
Oracle Reports program.
FND SRWEXIT ensures that all the memory allocated for AOL user exits have been
freed up properly.
FND FLEXIDVAL are used to display flex field information like prompt, value etc
FND FLEXSQL these user exits allow you to use flex fields in your reports
FND FORMAT_CURRENCY is used to print currency in various formats by using
formula column
22. What is Value Set?
The value set is a collection (or) container of values.
Whenever the value set associated with any report parameters. It provides list of
values to the end user to accept one of the values as report parameter value.
If the list of values needed to be dynamic and ever changing and define a table
based values set.
12) What are the validation types?
1) None -------- validation is minimal.
2) Independent ------input must exist on previously defined list of values
3) Dependent ------input is checked against a subset of values based on a
Prior value.
3) Table ----- input is checked against values in an application table
4) Special ------values set uses a flex field itself.
5) Pair ------ two flex fields together specify a range of valid values.
6) Translatable independent ----- input must exist on previously defined list
of values; translated values can be used.
7) Translatable dependent ------- input is checked against a subset of values
based on a prior values; translated value can be used.
23. Form development process?
a) Open template form
b) Save as <your form>.fmb
c) Change the form module name as form name.
d) Delete the default blocks, window, and canvas
e) Create a window.
f) Assign the window property class to window
g) Create a canvas (subclass info)
h) Assign canvas property class to the canvas
FAQS
I) assign the window to the canvas and canvas to the window

j) Create a data block
k) Modify the form level properties. (sub class item Text item)
l) Modify the app_custom package. In the program unit.
m) Modify the pre-form trigger (form level)
n) Modify the module level properties ((console window, First navigation
p) Save and compile the form.
Place the .fmx in the server directory.
24. How does u customize the Reports?
a. Identify the Short name of the standard report in which module we have
to customize
Ex: - if u wants to customize in the AR module path is
Appl \ar\11.5.0\reports\US\ .rdf
b. Open the .rdf file in Report builder and change the name of the module.
c. Open the data module and modify the query (what is client requirements)
assign the columns to the attributes.
d. Go to report wizard and select, what r the newly created columns.
e. Then Compile it. Then u will get a .rep file in the specified module. If it is
not in the specified directory then we have to put in the server directory.
f. Then Register in the AOL Concurrent Executable and
Concurrent Program.
g. Go to system administrator Security Responsibility request.
h. Add and assign a concurrent program to a request group
25. FLEX FIELDS?
Used to capture the additional business information.
DFF
KFF
Additional
Unique Info, Mandatory
Captured in attribute prefixed columns
Segment prefixed
Not reported on standard reports
Is reported on standard reports
Used for entering and displaying key

information
For example Oracle General uses a key
Flex field called Accounting Flex field to
uniquely identify a general account.
FLEX FILED : KEY : REGISTER
26. Difference between Bind and Lexical parameters?
BIND VARIABLE:
are used to replace a single value in sql, pl/sql
bind variable may be used to replace expressions in select, where, group, order
by, having, connect by, start with cause of queries.
bind reference may not be referenced in FROM clause (or) in place of
reserved words or clauses.
LEXICAL REFERENCE:
You can use lexical reference to replace the clauses appearing AFTER select,
To provide expansion space on your form
With the help of [].
[] Represents descriptive Flex field.
FLEX FILED : DESCRIPTIVE : REGISTER
FAQS
from, group by, having, connect by, start with.

You cant make lexical reference in pl/sql statements.
27. what is Flex mode and Confine mode?
Confine mode:
On: child objects cannot be moved outside their enclosing parent objects.
Off: child objects can be moved outside their enclosing parent objects.
Flex mode:
On: parent borders "stretch" when child objects are moved against them.
Off: parent borders remain fixed when child objects are moved against
them.
28. What is Place holder Columns?
A placeholder is a column is an empty container at design time. The placeholder can
hold a value at run time has been calculated and placed in to It by pl/sql code from
anther object.
You can set the value of a placeholder column is in a Before Report trigger.
Store a Temporary value for future reference. EX. Store the current max salary as
records are retrieved.
29. What is Formula Column?
A formula column performs a user-defined computation on another column(s) data,
including placeholder columns.
30. What is Summary columns?
A summary column performs a computation on another column's data. Using the
Report Wizard or Data Wizard, you can create the following summaries: sum, average,
count, minimum, maximum, % total. You can also create a summary column manually
in the Data Model view, and use the Property Palette to create the following additional
summaries: first, last, standard deviation, variance.
31. What is TCA (Trading Community Architecture)?
Ans. Oracle Trading Community Architecture (TCA) is a data model that allows you
to manage complex information about the parties, or customers, who belong to your
commercial community, including organizations, locations, and the network of
hierarchical relationships among them. This information is maintained in the TCA
Registry, which is the single source of trading community information for Oracle EBusiness Suite applications.
32. Difference between Application Developer and System Administrator?
Ans.
Role of Technical Consultant:
a. Designing New Forms, Programs and Reports
b. Forms and Reports customization
c. Developing Interfaces
d. Developing PL/SQL stored procedures
e. Workflow automations
FAQS
Role of System Administrator:

a. Define Logon Users
b. Define New/Custom Responsibility
c. Define Data Groups
d. Define Concurrent Managers
e. Define Printers
f. Test Network Preferences
g. Define/Add new Modules
Role of an Apps DBA:
a. Installing of Application
b. up gradation
c. Migration
d. Patches
e. Routing maintenance of QA
f. Cloning of OA
33. What are Flex fields?
Ans.
Ans. A Flex field is a customizable field that opens in a window from a regular Oracle
Applications window. Defining flex fields enables you to tailor Oracle Applications to
your own business needs. By using flex fields, you can:
(a) Structure certain identifiers required by oracle applications according to your own
business environment.
(b) Collect and display additional information for your business as needed.
Key Flex fields: You use key flex fields to define your own structure for many of the
identifiers required by Oracle Applications. Profile Flexfields:Open Key Window
(FND_ID_FLEXS)
Descriptive Flex field: You use descriptive flex fields to gather additional information
about your business entities beyond the information required by Oracle Applications.
Profile Flex fields: Open Descr Window (FND_DESCRIPTIVE_FLEXS)
34. Report registration process?
Ans.
1. Create the report using the report builder.
2. Place the report definition file in the module specific reports directory.
3. Create an executable for the report definition file.
4. Create a concurrent program to that executable.
5. Associate the concurrent program to a request group.
35. Define Request Group?
Ans.
A request security group is the collection of requests, request sets, and concurrent
programs that a user, operating under a given responsibility, can select from the
Submit Requests window.
36. Value Sets?
FAQS
Ans.
Oracle Application Object Library uses values, value sets and validation tables as
important components of key flex fields, descriptive flex fields, Flex Builder, and
Standard Request Submission.
When you first define your flex fields, you choose how many segments you want to
use and what order you want them to appear. You also choose how you want to
validate each of your segments. The decisions you make affect how you define your
value sets and your values.
You define your value sets first, either before or while you define your flex field
segment structures. You typically define your individual values only after your flex
field has been completely defined (and frozen and compiled). Depending on what type
of value set you use, you may not need to predefine individual values at all before you
can use your flex field.
You can share value sets among segments in different flex fields, segments in
different structures of the same flex field, and even segments within the same flex field
structure. You can share value sets across key and descriptive flex fields. You can also
use value sets for report parameters for your reports that use the Standard Report
Submission feature.
Navigation Path:
Login Application Developer -> Application -> Validation -> Set
37. Value Validation Types?
Ans.
1. Dependant
2. Independent
3. None
4. Pair
5. Special
6. Table
7. Translate Independent
8. Translate Dependent
38. Incompatibility in report registration and Run Alone?
Ans.
Identify programs that should not run simultaneously with your concurrent program
because they might interfere with its execution. You can specify your program as being
incompatible with itself.
Application: Although the default for this field is the application of your concurrent
program, you can enter any valid application name.
Name: The program name and application you specify must uniquely identify a
concurrent program. Your list displays the user-friendly name of the program, the
short name, and the description of the program.
Scope: Enter Set or Program Only to specify whether your concurrent program is
zincompatible with this program and all its child requests (Set) or only with this
program (Program Only).
FAQS
Run Alone: Indicate whether your program should run alone relative to all other
programs in the same logical database. If the execution of your program interferes
with the execution of all other programs in the same logical database (in other words,
if your program is incompatible with all programs in its logical database, including
itself), it should run alone.
Oracle apps Interview questions - 7

1.
Q: How do you make your own query when you are in forms query mode?
A: You can use a placeholder to achieve this. If you enter a single colon ( : ) in one of your query
fields during the Enter Query mode, Oracle Forms Run Query will prompt you to enter the text
of SQL Where clause.
2.
Q: What is concurrent processing?
A: Concurrent processing is a process that simultaneously runs programs in the background
(usually on the server rather than your workstation) while working online.
3.
Q: What is a Concurrent Manager?
A: A Concurrent Manager is a component of concurrent processing that monitors and runs
requests while you work online. Once the user submits a request to run the job, the information is
stored in the request table. A concurrent manager gets the information from the request table and
executes the specified concurrent job.
4.
Q: What is a request set?
A: A request set is a collection of reports or programs grouped together. Once you submit a
request set job, it executes all the programs in a report set sequentially or in a parallel manner as
defined in the request set.
5.
Q: What are the four phases of a concurrent request?
The four phases are as follows: inactive, pending, running, and completed.
6.
Q: How would you identify the results of the request in the Concurrent View Requests
window?
Whenever a concurrent job is submitted, Applications creates a Request ID. You can use this
Request ID to view the results.
7.
Q: What are the profile options? How many levels of profile options are available?
Profile options are set to determine how the applications look and feel. There are four levels of
profile options available: site level, application level, responsibility level, and user level. You can
have various categories of profile options, such as personal options, system options, auditing
profile options, currency options, Flexfield options, online reporting options, personal output
viewer options, and user profile options.
8.
Q: What is a document sequence?
FAQS
A document sequence assigns unique numbers to the documents (transactions) generated by

Oracle Applications. For example, each invoice has its own unique invoice number and each
purchasing document has its own unique purchase order (PO) number.
9.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Q: What are the steps involved in adding a custom program to Oracle Applications?
Develop a concurrent program or report.
Identify the corresponding executable and register it with the application.
Create a concurrent program and its parameters.
Add a concurrent program to a request set.
10.
Q: How do you register a printer?
To add a new printer, go to Install Printer Register.
11.
Q: What is a Flexfield? How many types of Flexfields exist?
A Flexfield is a field made up of segments. Each segment has an assigned name and a list of valid
values. Two types of Flexfields exist: Key Flexfields and Descriptive Flexfields (DFFs).
12.
Q: What is a Key Flexfield?
A Key Flexfield is a unique identifier that is made up of meaningful segments to identify GL
account numbers and item numbers. Key Flexfields are usually stored in
SEGMENT1...SEGMENTn database columns.
Some examples would be Item No 34H-AFR-223-112.G and GL Account No:
100-00-1000-324-11100.
For an example GL Account, segments could be identified as Organization, Cost Center,
Account, Product, Product Line.
13.
Q: What are the Key Flexfields in Oracle Applications?
The following table lists some of the Key Flexfields available in Oracle Applications.
Key Flexfields
Using Applications
Accounting
General Ledger
Asset Key
Fixed Assets
Location
Fixed Assets
Category
Fixed Assets
Account Aliases
Inventory
Item Catalogs
Inventory
Item Categories
FAQS
Inventory
System Iitems
Inventory
Stock Locators
Inventory
Sales Orders
Inventory
Sales Tax Location
Receivables
Territory
Receivables
Job
Human Resources
Grade
Human Resources
Position
Human Resources
Soft Coded Key
Human Resources
14.
Q: What is a Descriptive Flex Field?
A DFF lets you define the custom fields into Oracle Application forms without customizing the
program code. DFFs in forms are represented by a "beer mug" field (a single space field enclosed
by brackets) that looks like the following symbol: [ ]. They are usually stored in
ATTRIBUTE1...ATTRIBUTEn database columns. DFFs can also be used to accept report
parameters.
15.
Q: What types of segments can be set up for DFFs?
Global or context-sensitive.
16.
Q: What is a value set?
A value set is a list of values validated against segments. You can create a value set and assign it
to a Flexfield segment.
17.
Q: How many validation types are there?
Six validation types exist:none, dependent, independent, table, special, and pair.
18.
Q: What are the required and optional steps for setting up Flexfields?
The required steps are as follows: define the value sets, define the structures, and define the
values, if needed. The optional steps are as follows: define the security rules, define the crossvalidation rules, and define the shorthand aliases, if necessary.
19.
Q: Can you define cross-validation rules for DFFs?
No, you cannot. You can only define them for Key Flexfields.
FAQS
20.
Q: Can a value set be shared between Flexfields?
Yes, value sets can be shared between Flexfields.
21.
Q: Can a value set be shared within a Flexfield structure?
No, value sets cannot be shared between segments within a Flexfield as long as they do not carry
the same type of information. For example, date information can be shared between segments
within a Flexfield.
22.
Q: What are the advanced validation options?
Three types of advanced validation options are available.
$PROFILES$, which references the current value of a profile option. An example would be
$PROFILES$.profile_option_name. Block.field, which references the block field. $FLEX$, which
refers to the current value of a previously used value set.
An example would be $FLEX$.value_set_name (cascading dependencies).
23.
Q: What is the next step after defining the segments for Flexfields?
Freezing and compiling the structure.
24.
Q: What are the steps required to set up value security rules?
Make sure security is enabled, define rules for the value set, and assign rules to the user's
responsibility.
25.
Q: What is Oracle Alert?
Oracle Alert is an exception reporting system. It keeps you informed on an as-needed basis. It
also communicates with other users through e-mail regarding exception messages.
26.
Q: How many types of alerts are there?
Two types of alerts exist: Periodic Alerts and Event Alerts. Periodic Alerts fire at a time interval,
and Event Alerts are fired by database table changes.
27.
Q: What are Quick Codes?
Quick Codes, also known as Quickpicks, are standard sets of user-defined values. Lookup is a
combination of a code and a description. The lookup tables are generally populated by the scripts
located in /install/odf directory.
28.
Q: What is an Open Interface in Oracle Applications?
Open Interface, also known as the Application Programmer Interface (API), is a process whereby
the Oracle Applications are linked with external or legacy systems. Open Interface works as a
temporary staging area to load the external information into Oracle Applications tables. Once the
data is validated, it sends the information to the permanent tables. Rejected transactions can be
corrected and resubmitted.
29.
Q: Which schema has complete access to the Oracle Applications data model?
The APPS schema. AutoInstall automatically sets the FNDNAM environment variable to the
name of the APPS schema.
FAQS
30.
Q: What is the directory in Oracle Applications?
$APPL_.
31.
Q: What is a product directory?
It starts with the product shortname and is suffixed with , such as . For example, General
Ledger's directory is GL_.
32.
Q: What are the log and output directory names for a product group?
The product group environment file sets the APPLLOG variable to log and APPLOUT to out. For
example, the output directory for General Ledger is $GL_/$APPLOUT. For log, it is
$GL_/_$APPLLOG.
33.
Q: What data dictionary tables do you use to obtain detailed information regarding?
You can write a query by joining the FND_TABLE and FND__COLUMNS tables. FND_INDEXES
and FND_INDEX_COLUMNS tables are part of the data dictionary. All the FND_ table names
are self-explanatory.
34.
Q: What are the primary underlying tables for concurrent processing?
FND_CONCURRENT_PROGRAMS, FND_CONCURRENT__REQUESTS,
FND_CONCURRENT_PROCESSES, and FND__CONCURRENT_QUEUES tables.
35.
Q: What are the primary underlying tables for Flexfields?
FND_DESCR_FLEX_CONTEXTS, FND_FLEX_VALIDATION__RULES,
FND_FLEX_VALUE_SETS, FND_ID_FLEXS, FND_ID__FLEX_SEGMENTS, and
FND_ID_FLEX_STRUCTURES tables.
36.
Q: What is the primary underlying table for AOL QuickCodes?
FND_LOOKUPS table.
37.
Q: What is the application dummy table used by a form block?
FND_DUAL table.
38.
Q: What is the main underlying table for Profile Options?
FND_PROFILE_OPTIONS table.
39.
Q: What are the main prerequisites for creating a custom application or responsibility?
Set up a directory structure for a custom application, and define an environment variable that
translates to your application base path.
40.
Q: What are the WHO columns?
WHO columns are used to track the changes to your data in the application tables. WHO
columns exist in all Oracle Applications standard tables. The following five are considered WHO
columns:
FAQS
Column Name
CREATED_BY
CREATION_DATE
LAST_UPDATED_BY
LAST_UPDATE_DATE
LAST_UPDATE_LOGIN
41.
Q: Do I need to have WHO column information in custom forms?
Yes. It is strongly recommended to add WHO columns to the custom tables and call standard
API, FND_STANDARD.SET_WHO in PRE-INSERT, and PRE-UPDATE triggers in each block of
the form. Also, specify these fields as hidden in each block of the form.
42.
Q: What are the additional WHO columns used for concurrent programs?
Concurrent programs use all the following WHO inncluding the following four.
Column Name
PROGRAM_APPLICATION_ID
PROGRAM_ID
PROGRAM_UPDATE_DATE
43.
Q: Can you disable the WHO columns' information in a form block?
Yes. You can disable HELP -> ABOUT THIS RECORD information within a block. Call the
following procedures in a block level WHEN-NEW-BLOCK-INSTANCE
Trigger:app_standard.event('WHEN-NEW-BLOCK-INSTANCE');
app_standard.enable('ABOUT','PROPERTY_OFF');
44.
Q: How do you register your custom tables in PL/SQL?
You can use AD_DD package to register custom tables in PL/SQL.
45.
Q: How do you define the passing arguments in SQL/PLUS and PL/SQL concurrent
programs?
You must name your passing arguments as &1, &2, &3 and so on.
46.
Q: How do you call your custom reports from a form?
You can call your custom Oracle reports in a form using the
FND_REQUEST.SUBMIT_REQUEST procedure.
47.
Q: What is a template form?
A template form is a starting point for the development of custom forms. Copy the Template.fmb
file from $AU_/forms/US directory to your local directory and rename it.
48.
Q: Which libraries are attached to the template form?
The following main libraries are directly attached to the template form.
APPCORE contains packages and procedures for standard menus, toolbars, and so on.
APPDAYPK contains a calendar package. FNDSQF contains packages and procedures for
Flexfields, concurrent processing, profiles, and a message dictionary.
FAQS
49.
Q: What is a calendar?
A calendar is an object that lets you select the date and time. It is automatically included in the
template form. A Calendar package example would be calendar.show.
50.
Q: Which template form triggers require some modifications?
The ACCEPT, FOLDER_RETURN_ACTION, KEY-DUPREC, KEY-MENU, KEYCLRFRM, ONERROR, KEY-LISTVAL, POST-FORM, PRE-FORM, QUERY_FIND, WHEN-NEW-FORMINSTANCE, WHEN-NEW-BLOCK-INSTANCE, WHEN-NEWRECORD-INSTANCE, and
WHEN-NEW-ITEM-INSTANCE triggers.
51.
Q: Which template form triggers cannot be modified?
The CLOSE_WINDOW, EXPORT, FOLDER_ACTION, KEY-COMMIT, KEY-EDIT, KEY-EXIT,
KEY-HELP, LASTRECORD, WHEN-WINDOW-CLOSED, WHENFORM-NAVIGATE, and
ZOOM triggers.
52.
Q: What are the main template files for Pro*C concurrent programs?
The main template files are EXMAIN.c and EXPROG.c .
53.
Q: What is the Oracle-recommended application short name for extensions?
Oracle recommends an application short name begin with XX. As an example, extensions to
Oracle Purchasing would be XXPO.
54.
Q: Where do you maintain the list of your custom programs?
All custom programs should be listed in the applcust.txt file. This file is located in the
$APPL_/admin directory. When you apply the patches, Oracle Applications uses this file for
informational purposes.
55.
Q: What are the steps involved in modifying an existing form?
First, you identify the existing file and then you copy the file to a custom application directory,
making sure to rename it. You then make the necessary modifications, generate the form, and
document it in the custom program list using applcust.txt file.
56.
Q: Where do you maintain database customizations?
You can maintain all your table changes by creating a new schema. You can use your custom
application short name (such as XXPO) as your Oracle schema name for easy identification. The
new schema must be registered in the Oracle AOL.
57.
Q: Can you create extensions to Oracle Applications without modifying the standard form
code?
Yes. This can be done using the CUSTOM library, which is an Oracle Forms PL/SQL library. You
can integrate your custom code directly with Oracle Applications without making changes to
your Oracle Applications forms code. The CUSTOM library is located in the $AU_/res/plsql
directory. Once you write the code, you compile and generate the CUSTOM procedures to make
your changes.
FAQS
58.
Q: When do you use the CUSTOM library?
You can use the CUSTOM library in a variety of cases. You can use it to incorporate Zoom logic,
logic for generic events, logic for product-specific events, and to add entries for the special menu.
FAQS
Frequently Asked Questions in Oracle Apps Order Management (OM) Drop Ship process
Q1. What is a Drop ship PO?
A: Oracle Order Management and Oracle Purchasing integrate to provide drop shipments. Drop
shipments are orders for items that your supplier ships directly to the customer either because
you dont stock or currently dont have the items in inventory, or because its more cost effective
for the supplier to ship the item to the customer directly. Drop shipment was introduced in R11.
Q2. How is a Drop Ship PO created?

A: Drop shipments are created as sales orders in Order Management. The Purchase Release
concurrent program or workflow in Order Management creates rows in the Requisition Import
tables in Purchasing. Then Purchasings Requisition Import process creates the requisitions. Drop
shipments are marked with the Source Type of External in Order Management and Supplier in
Purchasing.
Q3. What is the setup required for Drop ship PO?
A: ITEM ATTRIBUTES:
Navigate: Inventory -> Items - > Organization items
Purchased (PO) Enabled
Purchasable (PO) Enabled
Transactable (INV) Enabled
Stockable (INV) Optional
Reservable (INV) Optional
Inventory Item (INV) Optional
Customer Ordered (OM) Enabled
Customer Orders Enabled (OM) Enabled
Internal Ordered (OM) Disabled
Internal Orders Enabled (OM) Disabled
Shippable (OM) Optional
OE Transactable (OM) Enabled
All Drop Ship items must be defined in the organization entered in the profile option OE: Item
Validation Organization and in the Receiving Organization.
All drop ship sub-inventory must have Reservable box checked. If the sub-inventory is not
Reservable the sales order issue transaction will not be created in
MTL_TRANSACTIONS_INTERFACE. After drop ship inventory organization is created,
subinventories should be defined. To create the subinventory, go to an inventory responsibility
and navigate to Setup -> Organizations -> Subinventories. Asset subinventories must have the
reservable and Asset boxes checked. Expense subinventories must have the Reservable box
checked and the Asset box unchecked.
Subinventory Attributes for Asset Subinventory
Reservable/Allow Reservations
Asset Subinventory
Subinventory Attributes for Expense Subinventory
FAQS
Reservable
Asset-must NOT be enabled.
Q4. How can we avoid the miscounting of supply as logical organization is involved?
A: You must receive drop-ship items in a logical organization. If you use Oracle master
Scheduling/MRP and Oracle Supply Chain Planning, to avoid miscounting supply you may not
want to include logical organizations in your planning. If you choose to include logical
organizations, ensure that doing so does not cause planning and forecasting complications.
Q5. If you make changes to a sales order after the Purchase Order (PO) has been generated,
will the order changes automatically be updated on the PO?
A: Order changes will not be automatically updated on the PO. Pulling up the Discrepancy
report will allow you to view the differences between the Sales Order and PO. However, you will
have to manually update the POs in the Purchasing application.
Q6. If items on a Drop Ship order are cancelled, does the system automatically generate a PO
Change to the PO originally sent to the supplier?
A: No, Drop Ship functionality in this regard remains the same as in R11. There is a discrepancy
report available that will report differences between the PO and the Sales Order.
Q7. Does Order Management 11i have functionality to do serial number management with
Drop Shipments?
A: You are able to receive serial numbered Drop Ship stock. Order Management will receive the
serial number noted on the PO.
Q8. Can Configurable Items be drop shipped?
A: Currently only Standard Items can be drop shipped. Functionality for Configurable Items will
be added in future releases.
Q9. How do I drop ship across operating units?
A: Release 11i does not currently support this functionality.
Q10. How are over/under shipments handled in drop shipment?
A: If part of a drop-ship line ships, and you do not wish to fulfill the remaining quantity, cancel
the line. Over shipments must also be handled manually. If the supplier ships more than the
ordered quantity, you can bill your customer for the additional quantity or request that they
return the item. Use the Drop Ship Order Discrepancy Report to view differences between your
drop-ship sales orders and their associated purchase requisitions and orders.
Q11. Will Blanket PO's work with Drop Shipment?
A: Blanket PO's will not work with Drop shipment because the PO must be created when OM
notifies PO that a drop ship order has been created. This PO is linked to the drop ship order so
that when the receipt is done (partial or complete) .OM is updated to receiving interface eligible.
Drop ship lines do not use the pick release, ship confirm or inv interface order cycles.
FAQS
Q12. Can we cancel drop shipment after it is received?

A: Drop shipments cannot be cancelled once Oracle Purchasing obtains the receipt. A user who
wants to cancel a drop ship sales order line must ensure no receipts have been created against the
line and that the requisition and/or purchase order associated with the line is cancelled.
Cancellation of a Partial Drop Ship receipt is allowable. But only the portion that has not been
received can be cancelled. If you cancel a drop shipment line for which you have not shipped the
entire quantity, the order processing splits the line. The first line contains the quantity shipped
and the second line contains the non-shipped quantity in backorder. You can cancel the second
line the backorder on the sales order. The PO line quantity should be changed to reflect the new
quantity.
Q13. What debugging tools are available for Drop shipments?
A: 1. Diagnostic scripts can be used for troubleshooting problems with sales orders.
2. Debugging receipt transaction or the sales order issue transaction, Set the following profile
options:
RCV: Processing Mode to Immediate or Batch
RCV: Debug Mode to Yes
OM: Debug Level to 5
INV: Debug Trace to Yes
INV: Debug level to 10
TP: INV Transaction processing mode to Background
-Then go to Sys Admin: Concurrent: Program: Define; query up the Receiving Transaction
Processor and check the Enable Trace box.
-Save the receipt for the deliver transaction (destination type will say Inventory for the deliver
transaction).
-View the Receiving Transaction Processor log file, the Inventory Transaction Worker log file, as
well as, the trace for the errors.
Q14. What is the Import source and status of PO generated from Drop Shipment?
A: Import source is Order Entry.
Status of PO will always be Approved.
FAQs on Oracle Alerts
What are Oracle Alerts?
Oracle Alerts are used to monitor unusual or critical activity within a designated database. The
flexibility of ALERTS allows a database administrator the ability to monitor activities from table
space sizing to activities associated with particular applications (i.e. AP, GL, FA). Alerts can be
created to monitor a process in the database and to notify a specific individual of the status of the
process.
What types of Oracle Alerts are there?
There are 2 types of Alerts: Event Alerts and Periodic Alerts.
a) EVENT ALERTS are triggered when an event or change is made to a table in the database.
b) PERIODIC ALERTS are activated on a scheduled basis to monitor database activities or
changes.
FAQS
What types of actions can be generated when an Alert is triggered?

When an alert is executed, the alert can send an email message, run a concurrent program, run an
operating system script, or run a
SQL statement script. Using response processing, Oracle Alerts can solicit a response from a
specific individual and perform an action
based on the response that it receives.
Can I build an Alert to run with my custom applications or tables?
Event or Periodic Alerts can work with any custom application, as long as the application is
properly registered within Oracle
Applications.
Which Email packages work with Alerts?
Since 11i.RUP4, all email is routed through Workflow Mailer.
Can Alerts be triggered using other Tools? (i.e. other than Oracle Forms or concurrent
programs)
Oracle Event Alerts can only be triggered from an application that has been registered in Oracle
Applications. Alerts cannot
be triggered via SQL updates or deletes to a table.
What is Response Processing?
Response processing is a component of Alerts which allows the recipients of an alert to reply
with a message and have the
applications take some action based on the response.
Do I need Oracle Applications to use Alerts?
Yes. Oracle Applications is required to create and run Alerts using Alert Manager Responsibility.
FAQS
Oracle Apps Order Management FAQs

Delivery:
A delivery consists of a set of delivery lines that are scheduled to be shipped to a customers
ship-to location on a specific date and time. In a delivery, you can include items from different
sales orders as well as back orders. You can group multiple deliveries together to create a trip.
More than one trip may be required to complete a delivery. For example, a delivery can consist of
two trips, the first trip by truck and the second trip by rail.
Picking Rules
Move orders will use the picking rules set up in Oracle Inventory to locate the material required
to fulfill the move order line. Together with item-sub inventory defaults (required if the staging
sub inventory is locator controlled), the picking rules suggest the staging transfer transaction
lines with appropriate source information that will be required to obtain enough material in the
staging location for the delivery. The process where the Picking Engine generates these
transaction line suggestions is called allocating.
How system determines Pick from Sub inventory/Locator to do pick release from shipping
Transaction form?
Thru Pick Rule
Based on Picking rule, assigned to the Item (1st in mtl_system_items)
if Null then from mtl_parameters then where it looks for that inv. org
Configuring Your Picking Process:
You can determine the number of pick release steps the system will prompt to move material
from pick release to ship confirmation. These steps are:
1.
Pick Release
2.
Move Order Line Allocation (detailing)
3.
Move Order Line Pick Confirmation
4.
Ship Confirmation
Pick Release
Pick Release finds and releases eligible delivery lines that meet the release criteria, and creates
move orders. You can pick release by order, trip, s, container, delivery, warehouse, and customer,
scheduled, or requested dates, shipment priority or combinations of the above criteria. The
default release criteria are set up in Shipping Parameters, but you can override the default
criteria in the Release Sales Order window at pick release.
The move orders create a reservation, determine the source, and transfer the inventory to staging
areas. Pick Slips can be created after the detailing process completes, and the quantity and source
can be manually verified at pick confirm.
Detailing and pick confirmation can be manually transacted through inventory or set up in
Shipping Parameters to occur automatically at pick release.
You can run one or more releases and customize release criteria to meet your requirements. You
can define:
FAQS
Release Rules to specify youre picking criteria through pick release parameters.
Release Sequence Rules specify the order in which eligible delivery lines are released. The order
in which delivery lines are released using a Release Sequence Rule is based on the following
attributes:
Order number
Outstanding invoice value
Scheduled date
Departure date
Shipment priority
Pick Slip Grouping Rules to determine how released move order lines are grouped onto pick
slips.
Oracle Shipping Executions Pick Release process creates move orders. One order is created per
pick release batch per organization, so if you pick release across multiple organizations, one
move order is generated in each facility. One move order line is generated for each order line
included in the picking batch. That move order line includes the item, quantity, the staging
location (the destination sub inventory and locator) and a source sub inventory and locator if one
was specified on the sales order line or on the Release Sales Orders window.
For non-transactable items, pick release does not use the value of Enforce Ship Sets and Ship
Models in the shipping parameters. However, ship confirm does validate non-transactable items
for broken ship sets and ship models.
For non-reservable items, allocation and pick release run, but suggestions are not created during
pick release, and pick confirm will not run for the item. You can print pick slips, but they will not
be detailed with sub inventory and stock locator to pick from, however they will list the item and
quantity to be picked. Auto-allocate should be Yes and Auto-pick-confirm can be set to any.
Detail Line Allocation (Detailing)
To release the move order lines created at Pick Release to the warehouse and to print pick slips,
the lines must be allocated. The allocation process for a pick wave move order line also creates a
high level (organization level) reservation for the item(s) if no previous reservations exist for
them. You can choose to do this immediately after the move order lines are created or to
postpone this step until a later point in time. Once the lines are allocated, they have a status of
Released to Warehouse.
Postponing the detailing process might be employed by organizations that pick release across
multiple warehouses but prefer to enable each warehouse to determine when to release their
order lines to the floor. Detailing the order lines immediately after they are created is called autodetailing. Postponing the detailing process is referred to as manual-detail. You can set up a
default detailing mode in the Shipping Parameters window. This default can be overridden at
each Pick Release through the Release Sales Orders window.
FAQS
Pick Confirmation
The move order line details must be transacted (in Inventory) to confirm the material drop-off in
staging. Pick confirmation executes the sub inventory transfer that systematically moves the
material from its source location in the warehouse to the staging location. Pick Confirmation
automatically transfers the high level reservation to a allocated reservation (including lots, sub
inventory and locators) in the staging location. Inventory updates Shipping Execution with the
results of the pick confirm:
Pick Confirmed quantity is assigned a status of Staged/Pick Confirmed.
Unconfirmed quantity is assigned a status of Backordered.
At pick confirmation, you can report a missing quantity or change information if material is
picked from a different lot, serial, locator, or sub inventory. Auto pick confirm can be set up as
the default to occur immediately after the lines are detailed if an organizations picks rarely
deviate from the suggested picking lines or the overhead of requiring a Pick Confirmation is
unmanageable. You can set up a default Pick Confirm policy in the Inventory organization
parameters. This default can be overridden at each Pick Release.
Pick confirmation follows the allocation and reservation process automatically if both the Auto
Allocate and Auto Pick Confirm options are selected in the Release Rules window. Pick Confirm
always follows the detailing and reservation process. If Auto Allocate is not chosen, it is not
possible to Auto Pick Confirm.
After you perform a partial move transaction on a move order, the delivery detail shipped
quantity is usually blank. However, if the move order is for a serial controlled item, the shipped
quantity appears. Generally, the requested quantity of a staged delivery detail is the shipped
quantity because the non-shipped quantity is split into separate backorder delivery lines.
However, for delivery details with serial controlled items, the shipped quantity has a value so
that you can enter the serial numbers when transacting.
Pick Release can be run using the following methods:

On-line: You can pick release one order immediately, thereby eliminating time spent waiting for
the order to process through the Concurrent Manager queue. This is done in the Release Sales
Orders for picking window. This window can also be accessed from the Tools menu in the
Shipping Transactions window.
Concurrent: You can run pick release in the background, enabling you to run other processes
simultaneously. This is done in the Release Sales Orders for picking window. This window can
also be accessed from the Tools menu in the Shipping Transactions window.
Standard Report Submission (SRS): You can run a specific release at the same time every day.
SRS runs pick release in the background multiple times. This is done in the Release Sales Orders
for Picking SRS window.
FAQS
Shipping Transactions window: You can run pick release in the Shipping Transactions window
by selecting Launch Pick Release from the Actions menu.
Material Picking or Pick Release:

Oracle shipping execution enables you to use move orders Transactions for generating pick
requests and reservation in Oracle Inventory. With the new pick release engine, you can pick
release all items together on a trip or s. You can also pick release items on a delivery. Using the
new engine can be performed a one-two or three-step process.
One Step process consists of select both auto-detail and auto pick confirm checkboxes on the
inventory tab when you pick release, which means that the pick recommendation is
automatically created and pick confirmed without any manual interaction.
Two Step process consists of selecting auto-detail, but not auto pick confirm, which creates a
move order that is automatically detailed but enables you to view the pick recommendation and
provides the opportunity to change quantity, location, sub inventory and to report a missing
quantity at the pick confirmation step in the transact move orders window. Once you have made
your changes you can transact the move order to pick confirm the inventory.
Three Step process consists of selecting neither the auto-detail or auto pick confirm check boxes,
which creates a move order that you can manually or automatically detail in the transact move
order window. Once detailed, you can transact the mover order to pick confirm the transaction.
What does Detailing mean?
Detailing is the process which Oracle Order Picking and Shipping uses the picking rules to
determine where to source the material to fulfill the request line (move order line). The detailing
process fills in the move order line details with the actual transactions to be performed. If
adequate quantity is not available to detail the mover order, this process can be repeated later. If
no reservations exist before the detailing process, it also creates reservation for the material.
What is the difference between Available Qty and On-Hand Qty?
Available Qty + Reserved Qty = On-Hand Qty
What is the difference between concurrent or on-line pick releases?
Concurrent pick release releases one or more orders in the background improving the
performance for the user. The user can continue working with the application even though the
pick release has not completed yet.
On-line pick release releases the orders while the user waits for the application to returns the
control to the user. The user may feel a lower performance in the applications depending of how
many lines are being processed.
What is meant by Trips? How to create Trips?
Overview:
FAQS
A trip is an instance of a specific freight carrier departing from a particular location containing
deliveries.
A trip is carrier specific and contains at least two ss such as a s to pick up goods and another s to
drop off goods, and may include intermediate ss. Trips can be created automatically or manually.
Creating a Trip
There are several ways to create a trip:
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
If your shipping process does not require advanced planning, you may prefer to automatically
create trips:
Auto-creating a trip for a delivery: You can find the delivery you want to ship, and auto-create a
trip and related trip ss.
Auto-creating a trip for containers and lines: You can find the lines and containers you want to
ship and auto-create a trip which creates a trip, related deliveries, and trip ss.
Manual
During transportation planning, you can manually create a trip and later assign delivery lines or
find the delivery lines and create a trip. For example, for a regular trip scheduled to depart every
Friday, you can manually set up a trip ahead of time and then assign delivery lines. When you
manually create a trip, you can manually assign ss, deliveries, and delivery lines to that trip.
Ship Confirmation
The material picking process ends when the items are ship confirmed out of inventory. Ship
confirming the items removes the existing reservations and performs the sales order issue
transaction. You may choose to ship confirm only part of the sales order quantity. In this case, the
balance of the sales order may be backordered. Back ordering at Ship Confirm automatically
splits the sales order into two lines. The first line represents the shipped quantity, and the second
line represents the backordered quantity. The backordered line is automatically Pick Released by
Oracle Shipping Execution. A move order line is automatically generated for the backordered
quantity.
What is Item Cross References used for?
Cross Reference types define relationship between Items and entities such as Customer Items or
Supplier Items.
What is the effect of the following transactions on On-Hand Qty? Sub Inventory Transfer
Miscellaneous Issue
On-Hand Qty remains same on a Sub-Inventory transfer.
On-Hand Qty reduces on Miscellaneous Issue
FAQS
What is a Modifier?
Modifiers enable you to setup price adjustments. (For example, discounts and surcharges),
benefits (for example, free goods, coupons) and freight and special charges that the price Engine
applies immediately to pricing requests or accrues for later disbursement.
What are the different types of Modifiers?
Discount List, Freight and Special Charges, Promotion surcharge.
Is the Customer Site data available across the operating units?
No, only header data is available.
What are defaulting Rules?
Information that Oracle Order Management automatically enters depending on other
information you enter.
What does Pick Release mean?
An order cycle action to notify warehouse personnel that orders is ready for picking.
Pick release rule
A user-defined set of criteria to define what order lines should be selected during picks release.
What does ATP mean? What is the significance of ATP?
Available to Promise.
What is meant by RMA?
Return Material Authorization- Return Material Order.
Explain Credit Check and Credit Hold for a Customer Site?
Credit Check is a check carried by the System the customer is exceeded his credit limit. Credit
hold is a hold applied on orders when he exceeds his credit limit.
What is Over Picking?
Over picking is a new enhancement included in the Order Management family pack G(2118482)
that allows the Pick Confirm transaction to pick in excess of the requested quantity as long as it
is within the over shipment tolerance.
It also allows the user to prevent breaking LPNs or lots by small amounts when the quantity
requested does not match the quantity in inventory. For example, if the customer ordered 5 cans
and the warehouse have only 6-packs, and the warehouse either is out of individual cans or has a
policy against loose cans. The over picking functionality allows the picker to pick a 6-pack (6
cans wrapped) to fulfill the order, instead of picking exactly 5 cans.
FAQS
This functionality will not be offered prior to OM Family Pack G code release. This means that
there will not be an option for backporting of this code. In order to receive this code, OM Family
Pack G or higher family pack needs to be applied.
What is Back order? When it occurs?
In the Back Order the material gets unreserved. . Backorders caused by Pick Releasing (PR) order
lines when there is no or not enough stock available. And backorders caused by shipping less, at
Ship confirm, than what was released.
How are Backorders handled /processed?
As in previous releases, Order Management and Shipping Execution has two types
of Backorders. Backorders caused by Pick Releasing (PR) order lines when there is no or not
enough stock available. And backorders caused by shipping less, at Ship confirm, than what was
released.
A. Backorders after Pick Releasing with Insufficient Stock
Pick Release will process all order (more correctly shipping) lines that you selected when
submitting PR. It will create move order lines for each line, whether there is stock available or
not. You (or the system) will however, not be able to (auto) detail and (auto) Pick Confirm the
lines where there is not enough stock available. In R11i, you cannot switch off reservations for
PR. Also, the system will not print pick slips for lines that are not detailed.
The delivery line, which was 'Ready to Release' before running PR will be split into a quantity
that was available for picking and a unavailable quantity. The first delivery line will become
status Released (Pick Confirmed), the second 'Submitted for Release' (Move Order created, but
not confirmed). In the latter case, the Details Required' status is checked. The order line will not
split at this point, but receives a 'Picked partial' status. After Ship Confirming the Released
delivery line, the original order line will be split into a 'Shipped' and a 'Submitted for Release'
line (unless the shipped quantity falls within the under shipment tolerance). The latter will be
available for Pick Release as a 'Backorder' as soon as there is stock available. On the sales order,
there is no order or workflow status called 'Backorder'. You will not really see any difference
between a scheduled order line that was never released and a backordered line. Pick Release is
able to distinguish between the two, because it allows you to release them separately.
B. Backorders Caused by shipping less than what was Released

Before Ship Confirming a Released (Pick Confirmed) delivery line, you have the option to update
the shipped quantity. If the shipped quantity is less than the picked quantity, you have can
either designate the remaining quantity as 'Backordered' (meaning the quantity was
lost
somewhere along the picking/staging process) or leave it in staging in to assign it to a
different delivery (i.e. truck was full and wait for next pick up).
At Ship Confirm, any staged quantities will be split off in a separate delivery line that is
immediately ready to be shipped in a subsequent delivery. A backordered quantity will remain
FAQS
noted on the same delivery line. Only when the original delivery line is interfaced
through
Inventory Interface/Order Management Interface, will the order line be split into a
line for the shipped quantity and a new line for the backordered quantity (Awaiting
shipping). This enables you to pick the remaining quantity again in order to fulfill the complete
order quantity. This split will only happen if the backordered quantity is greater than the Under
Shipment Tolerance.
How come when I ship confirm a delivery the Inventory and OM Interface are not run?
When ship confirming a delivery, there is a check box labeled Close Trip. If that check box is
checked, the Trip and associated ss are closed when the delivery is closed.
If the check box is not checked, then you have to manually go to the s tab and close a s. Once a s
is closed, the Inventory and OM Interface are submitted.
How can lines that were unassigned from a delivery a time of ship confirm due to a credit
hold, be released after the hold has been removed?
Create a new delivery, assign the lines to the new delivery and perform the ship confirm process.
How can I ship the fastest way?

Check the Autodetail option in Pick Release. It can be defaulted from the Shipping Parameters
form. Set the profile INV: Detail Serial Numbers to Yes. Inventory will then suggest serial
numbers during the Detailing process. Do not check the Pick Confirmation Required flag in the
Organization Parameters form.
What criteria use the process to release the eligible order lines?
This is indicated by the Release Sequence Rule. It uses the following attributes: order number,
outstanding invoice value, schedule date, departure date and shipment priority.
How does the pack slip report groups the released lines?
It uses the pick slip grouping rule assigned during the pick release. A pick release process may
print more that one report for the same picking batch.
ORG_ID can be set at Master Level or Transaction Level?
ORG_ID can be set at Transaction Level.
How do restrict data for a responsibility as per the ORG_ID?
Through Multi-Org you can restrict data for a responsibility as per the ORG_ID. Only in GL, Set
of book id should have the value to restrict the data for a responsibility.
What is meant by drop shipment order type? What are the different steps involved in
executing sales order?
FAQS
In the Drop shipment order, there is no shipping involved. The steps involved are Book the
Order, Purchase release, Invoicing. The invoice can be done only after the receipt is made for the
purchase order created by the purchase requisition created from the Purchase release.
Warehouses are what organizations in Oracle Manufacturing?
Inventory
What is meant by shipment tolerance?
Over/Under shipment tolerance, While shipping we can over/under shipping the quantity in
the sales order.
What is the difference between Standard Sales Order Cycle and Drop Shipment Order Cycle?
Shipment is the difference.
What is Hold management?
Hold
A feature that prevents an order or order line from progressing through the order cycle. You can
place a hold on any order or order line.
Hold criteria
A criterion used to place a hold on an order or order line. A hold criteria can include customers,
customer sites, orders, and items.
Hold source
An instruction for Order Management to place a hold on all orders or lines that meet criteria you
specify. Create a hold source when you want to put all current and future orders for a particular
customer or for a particular item on automatic hold. Order Management gives you the power to
release holds for specific orders or order lines, while still maintaining the hold source. Oracle
Order Management holds all new and existing orders for the customer or item in your hold
source until you remove the hold source.
Hold type
Indicates the kind of hold you place on an order or order line.
What is the Item attributes for an Item to create Drop Ship Order?
Purchased (PO)
Enabled
Purchasable (PO)
Enabled
Translatable (INV)
Enabled
Stock able (INV)
Optional
Reserveable (INV)
Enabled
Customer Ordered (OM)
Enabled
Customer Orders Enabled (OM)
Enabled
Default SO Source Type
Optional
Shippable (OM)
Enabled
Transact able (OM)
Enabled

Costing
Inventory Asset Value
FAQS
Enabled (enabled for items that are to

be costed)
Enabled (for asset items) (nonexpense items)
What is the Item attributes for an Item to create Internal Sales Order?
Main Tab
Standard
Inventory Tab
*Inventory Item,*Stock able, Transact able,
Revision Control Receivable, Check Material Storage
Bill of Material Tab
BOM Allowed
Purchasing Tab
Purchased Purchasable Use Approved Supplier
General Planning Tab
Make or Buy Source Type: Supplier
Lead Times Tab
Preprocessing give some values
Work-in-process Tab
Build in WIP
Order Management Tab
Customer Ordered, Customer Enabled,
Shippable, *Internal Order, *Internal Order Enabled,
*OE Transact able, Assemble To Order, Returnable
*Customer should be Internal
Can you update the Sales Order once it is Booked?

Depends on the Processing Constrains setup.
What are the prerequisites of the Sales Order?
Customer, Price List and Order Type.
What are different order types?

Order
Return
Mixed
FAQS
Oracle Apps Purchasing FAQs

Q1. What is the difference between 'Accrue On Receipt' and 'Accrue at Period End'?
A: Accrue On Receipt means that when a receipt is saved, accrual transactions are immediately
recorded and sent to the general ledger interface. This is also known as "online" accruals. Accrue
at Period End means that when a receipt is saved, the accrual transactions are not immediately
recorded and sent to the general ledger; instead, the accounting entries are generated and sent at
the end of the month by running the Receipt Accruals - Period-End Process.
All items with a destination type of either Inventory and Outside Processing are accrued on
receipt. For items with a destination type of Expense, you have the option of accruing on receipt
or at period end.
Q2. Why are expense items typically accrued at period-end, and why are inventory
items always accrued on receipt?
A: One should accrue on receipt if perpetual inventory is adopted to facilitate reconciliation
between inventory valuation reports and accounting entries. Expense items typically are not
accounted for on a daily basis, and most companies find it easier to account for and reconcile
these expenses at month-end rather than at the time each individual expense is incurred.
When both inventory and expense items are accrued on receipt, the following problems may be
encountered:
A) Receiving inspection balances will include both inventory assets and expenses, so at the end
of the month, they will need to be manually reclassified.
B) The number of entries needed to research and reconcile the perpetual A/P Accrual Account(s)
becomes significantly increased. Since the expense receipts could double the number of accrual
accounting entries to process, the Accrual Reconciliation Report could take twice as long to run.
The amount of time required by your staff to research any discrepancies would also increase.
Q3. Which Purchasing report should be used to review period-end accruals?

A: The Uninvoiced Receipts Report should be used to view period-end accruals.
Q4. Which Purchasing report should be used to review online accruals?
A: The Accrual Rebuild Reconciliation Report should be used to view accrual transactions for
inventory items and expense items which are set to accrue on receipt (online accruals). These
transactions can also be included on the Uninvoiced Receipts Report by setting the parameter
'Include Online Accruals' to Yes when submitting the report.
Q5. After entering receipts and running the Receipt Accruals - Period-End Process, the new
journals do not appear in the General Ledger. Should the transactions automatically appear in
GL after performing these steps?
A: The transactions from Oracle Purchasing are only sent to the GL_INTERFACE table; in order
to create the journals and see them in General Ledger, the Journal Import concurrent program
must be run from a General Ledger responsibility. Be sure to review the output file from the
FAQS
Journal Import request to ensure that the records imported successfully.
Q6. How can one tell whether each journal in the general ledger is for period- end or on
receipt (online) accruals?
A: Period-end and online accrual entries may be contained in the same GL batch, but there will
be separate journals created for each. Journals created by the Receipt Accruals - Period-End
Process will have a category of 'Accrual'; journals created for online accruals with have a category
of 'Receiving'. Here is some technical table-level information that may provide assistance: Table:
GL_INTERFACE Column : USER_JE_SOURCE_NAME = Purchasing Column :
USER_JE_CATEGORY_NAME = Accrual (for period-end accruals) - OR USER_JE_CATEGORY_NAME = Receiving (for online accruals) Table: GL_JE_HEADERS
Column : JE_SOURCE = Purchasing JE_CATEGORY = Accrual (for period-end accruals) - OR JE_CATEGORY = Receiving (for online accruals)
Q7. Does the process of reversing journals for period-end accruals occur automatically in GL?
A: The process of reversing the accrual journals does not occur automatically; they must be
manually reversed in the general ledger.
Q8. For the Uninvoiced Receipts Report, what is the purpose of the parameter 'Accrued
Receipts'?
A: This parameter should be set to 'No' to see only the uninvoiced receipts which have not yet
been accrued by running the Receipt Accruals - Period-End process. This parameter should be set
to 'Yes' to see all uninvoiced receipts, including those which have been accrued by running the
Receipt Accruals - Period-End Process.
Q9. Records are appearing on the Uninvoiced Receipts report for expense items which have
been received but not invoiced. How can these records be removed from the report and kept
from accruing each month?
A: There are a couple of methods that can be used to remove records from the report and to keep
them from accruing each month: A) Close the purchase order shipment line. Closing the
purchase order at the Header or Line level will also have the same effect. On the Purchase Order
Summary form, select Special -> Control, then 'Close'. NOTE: Selecting 'Cancel' will not keep
receipts from accruing each month. Refer to question/answer #10 below for an explanation of
this. B) Create an invoice in AP and match it to the purchase order for the entire received
quantity. Some users choose to create a 'dummy' invoice for $0.00 in this case.
Q10. A purchase order shipment was received against, then canceled. It now appears on the
Uninvoiced Receipts report and accrues each month when running the Receipt Accruals Period-End process. Why is this happening?
A: When a purchase order is canceled (whether at the header, line, or shipment level), only the
unreceived quantity is actually canceled. Cancellation does not effect quantities already received,
as an obligation still remains for these receipts. If the quantity received is equal to the quantity
invoiced (billed), or if no receipts have been entered against the purchase order shipment, then
FAQS
cancellation sets the Canceled flag of the shipment to 'Yes' and the Closure Status to 'Closed'. In
this case, no accrual transaction will be generated. If the quantity received is not equal to the
quantity invoiced, then cancellation sets the Canceled flag of the shipment to 'Yes' and the
Closure Status remains in its current status (i.e., not 'Closed'). The difference between quantity
received and quantity invoiced will appear on the Uninvoiced Receipts report, and will continue
to accrue each month until an invoice is matched for the entire received quantity, or until the
received items are returned to the Supplier.
Q11. What is the difference between the Accrual Reconciliation Report and the Accrual
Rebuild Reconciliation Report?
A: The report is available as two (2) separate concurrent programs: the Accrual Reconciliation
Report and the Accrual Rebuild Reconciliation Report. Both reports run using the same report
definition file: POXACREC.rdf. When the Accrual Rebuild Reconciliation Report is selected, the
following events occur: - The program will delete all records currently stored in the
PO_ACCRUAL_RECONCILE_TEMP_ALL table - Accounting entries are selected from the
appropriate sources (sub ledgers) based on the parameters entered at the time of report
submission - The temporary table PO_ACCRUAL_RECONCILE_TEMP_ALL is repopulated with
these accounting entries - Report output is generated based on this information When the
Accrual Reconciliation Report is run, the report does not reselect the information from the sub
ledgers; instead, it reports only on the data currently stored in the
PO_ACCRUAL_RECONCILE_TEMP_ALL table. This feature saves time and decreases the
performance impact on the system, because the accrual information does not have to be
regenerated from the original sources every time the report is submitted. Typically, the Accrual
Rebuild Reconciliation Report is run at the end of the period, and the Accrual Reconciliation
Report is used for interim reporting. Note that the title showing on the report output remains the
Accrual Reconciliation Report regardless of which process is actually submitted.
Q12. How do transactions which have subtotals of $0.00 get removed from the Accrual
Reconciliation Report?
A: When submitting the report, setting the following parameters as shown will allow for these
transactions to not show on the report output: Include All Transactions = No Transaction
Amount Tolerance = 0 (or higher)
Q13. Several transactions appear on the Accrual Reconciliation Report which were charged to
the accrual account in error. Manual journal entries have already been created in GL to correct
these transactions. How do these transactions now get removed from the report?
A: In Oracle Purchasing, go to the Accrual Write-Offs form. Responsibility: Purchasing Super
User Navigation: Accounting/Accrual Write Offs Select the lines that need to be removed from
the report and save Then, run the Accrual Reconciliation Report again, setting the parameter
'Include Written-Off Transactions' to No. The written-off transactions will no longer be included
in the report. NOTE: You can run the Accrual Write-Off Report to review the transactions that
were written off; this can be used to support the manual journal entry created in the general
ledger.
FAQS
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. Is it possible to show more than two decimal places in the "PRICE" column that is
currently being printed on the 'Printed Purchase Order Report - (Landscape or Portrait)'?
A: Currently, it is not possible to print more than two decimals in the 'PRICE' field without
customizing the reports. There is currently an enhancement request (628857) under review that
will, if approved, bring this desired functionality to future releases. This answer holds true to
Releases 10.7, 11.0, and 11.5 (11i).
Q2. When I print out a purchase order from the Document Approval window, does it only
print in Portrait style?
A: Currently this is the only way it will print from the Document Approval window. An
enhancement request (466551) has been filed to allow the choice of either Portrait or Landscape
as the format when printing purchase orders from the Document Approval window.
Q3. Why does the blanket purchase agreement print every time a release is printed?
A: This is the current functionality of the application. The blanket purchase agreement will be
printed every time you choose to print an associated release. An enhancement request (432017)
has been filed to allow only the release to be printed.
Q4. What is the name of the file that controls printing of reports related to Oracle Purchasing,
and where is it located on the system?
A: The name of the file is porep.odf. This file creates the Oracle Purchasing views which generate
the data that is printed by the reports. The file can be found in the following locations:
$PO_/admin/odf This is where the base release version of the file is seeded by the install.
$PO_/patch/110/odf This is where the most current version of the file resides on your system
for Release 11.
$PO_/patchsc/107/odf This is where the most current version of the file resides on your system
for Release 10.7.
For Windows NT, it is best to use the FIND FILE utility to locate the various versions of the file.
Q5. How can a report file name and version be located?
A: There are two methods that can be used to find the report short (file) name:
1. Please see Note 106968.1, titled "Purchasing: PO Report Short Names". This note contains an
alphabetical listing of all Oracle Purchasing reports and lists the short name for each one.
2. Each report is a concurrent process that can be found in System Administration.
- Responsibility: System Administrator
- Navigation: Concurrent > Program > Define
- Select the Program Name
Under the Program Name field, you will see a field called Short Name. This is the name of the
report file. This name should be the same as the name of the file in the Executable field.
To find the version of the file:
FAQS
For Unix
********
For Release 10.7, go to $PO_/srw
For Release 11, go to $PO_/reports
Type the following command at a Unix prompt:
strings -a <FILENAME.rdf>|grep Header:
For Windows NT
**************
Use the FIND FILE utility to locate the file. Use MS-DOS to navigate to the
file and type the following command at the prompt:
find /i "Header:" <FILENAME.rdf>
Q6. Why do asterisks (******) appear on report output in place of the quantity?
A: Oracle Reports will allow a maximum of 13 characters to be printed in the Quantity column.
These characters include a -/+ sign at the beginning and then a combination of 12 more
characters, including commas, periods, and digits. Therefore, if the quantity on a report contains
more than 13 characters, you will see the asterisks show in place of the quantity.
Examples:
9,999,999.00 actually contains 13 characters and will be displayed. Remember, the + sign is
holding the first character position in the database.
-1.2245833524335 would print asterisks, as more than 13 characters are involved.
You do have the ability to change the way your reports print out the numbers in the Quantity
region; this may make the difference in allowing you to see the actual quantity. You cannot
change the number of characters in the field, but you can change the way they display. This will
give you more options. To do this:
Responsibility: System Administrator
Navigation: Profiles/System
Query the profile 'INV: Dynamic Precision Option for Quantity on Reports'
Click on the List of Values and you will see the different options available for you to use on your
reports. You will notice that all options still only represent 13 characters; it just changes the way
they are represented.
See Note 1072855.6 for further clarification.
Q7. When a report has been submitted to print, the output can be viewed by using the View
Output button, but no hard copies of the report print out. What causes this to occur??
A: The number of copies Oracle Reports will print is controlled in System Administration.
Query the profile 'Concurrent: Report Copies'

If this profile is not populated, Oracle will not print any copies of any report.
FAQS
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. Will end-dating a position with approval authority have no effect on the employees who
are tied to that position in terms of their ability to approve?
A: End-dating a position would not directly affect the approval capability of the employees who
still have active assignments to that position. Basically the approval activities are meant to
revolve around the position assignments rather than the position itself. The integration coupling
point of HRMS and PO is at the position assignment level. Until the assignments are also
modified, end-dating a position would not immediately change the forwarding hierarchy.
Q2. What impact, therefore, would end-dating a position have? The customer knows that in
HR they cannot assign employees to end-dated positions.
A: End-dating a position would prevent new assignments to be made to this position. Besides,
this position should not be used in new hierarchies that customers might design. The System
gives a warning if the end-dated position is chosen in a new hierarchy. But end dating a position
would not directly translate into the position assignments becoming end-dated that has to be
done by customers. Now, since the assignments are still active, employees should be enabled in
continuing to do the tasks (e.g. approval) pertaining to those assignments.
Q3. What does the status 'INVALID' do to the position?
A: This is same as what end dating does to the position.
Q4. The errors in the log file of the Fill Employee Hierarchy report are a result of employees
not being tied to a position. In the hierarchy, won't there be positions with no Employees tied
to them from time to time? Does it mean that the customer has to disassociate the employees
from the end-dated positions manually? Wouldn't this cause this type of error?
A: Yes there can be positions which are vacant. That is perfectly valid. But having employees
with assignments on expired positions is different and not so desirable. Therefore, you should
indeed terminate the existing assignments and make new ones for the employees on an expired
position. This need not be done manually. Check the 'Mass Move' functionality.
Q5. What are the actions for which we need to run the Fill Employee Hierarchy process?
A: You must run this process before any of the following changes can take effect:
- Add or delete an employee.
- Change an employee name or an employee position. (See: the online help for the Enter Person
window.)
- Add, delete, or modify a position. (See: Representing Jobs and Positions, Oracle Human Resource
Management Systems User's Guide.)
- Add, delete, or modify a position hierarchy. (See: Representing Jobs and Positions, Oracle
Human Resource Management Systems User's Guide.)
Q6. Why does the Fill Employee Hierarchy report take a long time to complete?
A: There have been lot of performance improvements done to this process. The Fill Employee
Hierarchy report first deletes all the records from the po_employee_hierarchies table and then
recreates the hierarchies and this process will take some time.
FAQS
Q7. Is the PO_EMPLOYEE_HIERARCHIES_ALL table defined at the operating unit level or at

the Business Group level?
A: Before the bug fix 2058578, we used to define the data in this table at the operating unit level.
But we have changed the design and populate the data at the Business Group level. This is
because Positions and Employees are defined at the Business Group level but not at the operating
unit level, therefore now we define the data in the PO_EMPLOYEE_HIERARCHIES_ALL table at
Business Group level.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What does the status Pre-Approved mean, and how does a document reach this status?
A: The status of Pre-Approved is the outcome of a person forwarding a document for approval
even though the forwarding person has the necessary authority to approve it. The document may
have been forwarded by mistake or for business reasons. It is not possible to perform a receipt
against a document with a status of Pre-Approved.
Q2. What is the difference between DIRECT and HIERARCHY forwarding methods?
A: The document forwarding method is selected in the Document Types form: Responsibility:
Purchasing Super User
Navigation: Setup -> Purchasing -> Document Types
The two choices for the document forwarding method are Direct and Hierarchy; both options are
always available regardless of whether Position Hierarchies (positions) or Employee-Supervisor
Relationships (jobs) are being used.
A. Direct Forwarding Method
Using this forwarding method, at the time which a document is submitted for approval,
validation will occur up the approval chain until an approver is located that has the ability to
approve the document in question.
- If Position Hierarchies are being used, then the validation will occur against positions listed in
the position hierarchy specified in the document approval window. Once a position that has
approval authority has been located, the system will locate the employee assigned to this position
and designate him as the Forward-To. The selection of the employee is based on alphabetical
context.
- If Employee/Supervisor Relationships are being used, then validation will occur against, first,
the supervisor's job of the employee submitting the document for approval; then, if that
supervisor does not have authority, the system will look to the supervisor's supervisor. The
validation process will continue up this employee/supervisor chain until an approver with the
proper authority is located.
B. Hierarchy Forwarding Method
Using this forwarding method, validation is not performed to locate the next possible approver
with sufficient authority; the documents will simply route to each person in the approval chain.
The document, once submitted for approval, will move to either the person assigned to the next
position in the position hierarchy if positions are being used, or the employee's supervisor if
employee/supervisor relationships are being used.
The key difference between the two options is that Direct forwarding will move the document to
the first person with authority to approve, whereas Hierarchy will simply move the document to
the queue of the next employee in the approval chain, whether that
person has the approval authority or not.
FAQS
Q3. What is the significance of the Document Total and Account Range types on the Approval
Groups form?
A: The Document Total type sets the maximum limit for any approval actions taken by the user
whom the approval group applies to. If multiple Document Totals are specified, the restriction
will be to the Document Total, which is the lowest. The Account Range also allows for a
document total which is then tied to a specific range of accounts listed on the same line. It is
possible to have different account ranges with different amount Limits. This allows the same user
to have a different dollar/account limit. It is mandatory to have an account range specified in
each approval group defined. By default, if there is not an account range defined, all accounts
will then be excluded from the document approval process, which means that the documents
will not have an ability to become approved.
Q4. What is the significance of using jobs or positions, and what effect will choosing one or
the other have on the document approval routing?
A: The choice of whether or not jobs or positions are going to be used is made at the operating
unit level within the Financial Options form. Responsibility: Purchasing Super User
Navigation: Setup -> Organizations -> Financial Options select the Human Resources alternate
region
If the option Use Approval Hierarchies is checked, then positions and position hierarchies are
going to be utilized for the operating unit in question; if left unchecked, employee/supervisor
relationships will be used for the approval hierarchy routing path.
NOTE: If positions are being used, then position hierarchies will need to be created as they are
going to be the roadmap for document approvals. If jobs are being used, then the
employee/supervisor relationship will serve as the roadmap.
Q5. What is the difference between archiving on Approve versus Print?
A: The archiving method determines at which point revision data will be written to the
document archive tables. Archive on Approve designates an update to the Purchasing archive
tables at the time of document approval; each time a revision is made to a document and the
document enters a Requires Re-approval state, the new revision information will be archived at
the time the document is approved again. Archive on Print designates an update to the
document archive tables at the time the purchase order is printed.
The following graph illustrates the difference between the two settings. The Archive Rev
columns denote the highest revision of the purchase order currently residing in the purchase
order archive tables. The Current Rev columns denote the current revision level of the purchase
order, as seen in the header region of the Purchase Orders form.
S
tAction
e
Archive on Archive on Archive Archive

Approve Approve on Print on Print
FAQS
p
#
Archive
Revision
1Create Purchase
None
. Order
Change
2
Controlled
None
.
Information
3Approve
0
. Purchase Order
Change
4
Controlled
0
.
Information
5Approve
1
. Purchase Order
6Print Purchase
1
. Order
Change
7
Controlled
1
.
Information
8Approve
2
. Purchase Order
9Print Purchase
2
. Order
1Change
0Controlled
2
. Information
1
Print Purchase
1
2
Order
.
1
Approve
2
3
Purchase Order
.
Current
Revision
Current
Archive
Revisio
Revision
n
None
None
None
None
None
Q6. In Release 11.X, every time attempting to approve a document it remains in the status of
'Incomplete' - why?
A: Sometime, a documents may still have a status of Incomplete after an attempt to approve the
FAQS
document has been made; this indicates a failure in the validation of the approval authority for
the document creator, along with the inability to locate an employee with the proper authority to
forward the document.
Q7. How is it possible to approve a blanket release when the blanket purchase agreement is
showing that the full amount has already been released?
A: The validation of a release dollar amount is not against the amount agreed on the header of
the blanket purchase agreement; instead, it validates against the Amount Limit specified in the
Terms and Conditions window of the Purchase Orders form. If this field is left blank, then the
release can be for any amount. Therefore, it is imperative that the Amount Limit field be
populated with the same dollar amount as the Amount Agreed field in the header region of the
Purchase Orders form, depending on the business needs. It should also be noted that Release 11i
also has introduced an Amount Limit field that can be defined at the line level of the blanket
agreement.
Q8. I am delegating the approval of a PO to someone who doesn't have access to open this PO.
Would he be able to approve it?
A: Since he has been 'delegated' the approval authority from you, his approval actions would be
adjudged as if you were taking those actions on this document. However, the document would
remain inaccessible to him. This is because by 'Delegating', you are only allowing him to act on
approval decisions on your behalf, rather than also delegating him the access authority.
Q9. I have end-dated a position but still have the employees assigned to this position. These
employees continue to be able to approve the POs as before. Why?
A: They would continue to be able to approve as long as they have valid assignments!
When you are altering your organization structure by expiring a position, you MUST also make
alternatives for the open assignments on this position. This should be a part of your organization
structure migration process. Once you have migrated completely to the new Position Structure,
including the proper employee-position assignments, run the Fill Employee Hierarchy program.
This would affect the PO Approval accordingly.
FAQ Details
Q1. Does autocreate copies descriptive flexfields from the requisition to the document you
create?
A: Yes, but it does not validate the information. For example: If in the requisition desc flex is not
mandatory and in the purchase order it is mandatory, autocreate will not error out. It will just
copy as is.
FAQS
Q2. Does autocreate copy Notes from the requisition to the document you are creating?
A: Yes, Notes are copied from the requisition lines and the corresponding requisition header.
Q3. What are the columns on which autocreate combines the requisition lines into a single
document lines?
A: For purchase order, Purchasing combines the quantities of all requisition lines that have the
same item, item revision, line type, transaction reason, and unit of measure onto a single
document line. For RFQs, quantities of all requisition lines that have the same item, revision,
and line type are combined.
Q4. What price becomes the actual price in case multiple requisition lines with different prices
are combined to single PO line?
A: The lowest unit price from the combined requisition lines becomes the actual price of the
purchase order line.
Q5. What are the columns based on which Shipping information is combined in case of
autocreate?
A: For purchase orders and releases, Purchasing combines shipment information only if the
requisition lines have the same needby date, shipto location, organization, Accrual type
(periodend or online), and shipment type
Q6. Does autocreate add to an existing PO shipment that has been encumbered?
A: Purchasing does not add to an existing purchase order shipment if that shipment has been
encumbered even though all the grouping columns necessary to combine shipping information
are there.
Q7. What can be done to open the created document directly once autocreate is done
successfully?
A: Set the profile option PO: Display the autocreated Document to Yes, Purchasing displays the
Purchase Orders, Releases, or RFQ window, as appropriate, after creating your document lines.
Q8. Can requisition line with item number and without item number [one time item] be
combined to single document line in autocreate?
A: If you want to combine two requisition lines for the same item, one with an item number and
FAQS
one without, you have to manually autocreate the document and use Modify on the Tools menu
to add the predefined item to the requisition line for the onetime item.
Note: You cannot use Modify with outside processing items or if you are using encumbrance or
budgetary control.
Q9. Can you autocreate a release if the description of the requisition created in PO is different
of the description of the Blanket?
A: No, If we do not choose an item, that is if the requisition and blanket are created with one
time/expense items the autocreate process tries to match the descriptions as item id's are null.
The only differentiating factor in one time items (item id null) is the description.
Q10. How do you prevent autocreate from seeing requisitions from another organization?
A: Requisitions and Purchase Orders are not organization specific. If you do not want to be able
to see or access requisitions across different organizations, then you need to set up different
operating units with different responsibilities tied to each one.
Q11. Can you autocreate from a quotation and tie the PO to the associated quotation and
requisition?
A: Yes, you can autocreate from a Quotation.
Navigation:
1. Create and approve a requisition.
2. Go to the AutoCreate Screen, chose the requisition form the pool of approved requisitions.
3. Change the Document Type field to RFQ and click the automatic button.
4. The RFQ is created and appears on the screen.
5. Enter the required fields on the RFQ (quote affectivity), click on the Supplier button and
choose the list of suppliers.
Change status to active and save.
6. To enter the vendor responses a Quote must be created.
Go to the RFQ screen and query up the RFQ you just created.
Click Special on the Tool bar and choose Copy Document.
This will create your quotation.
7. Go to the Quotation screen and query up the new quotation and enter
the price break information. Change the description (if PO attribute is set to allow the description
to be changed).
8. Approve the quotation.
9. AutoCreate the PO from the requisition.
Delete the description if the quote has a description different than the requisition
Click on the catalog button - Receive message
Your can update only the price for the saved record.
FAQS
Open the Catalog to select price only

Click YES
10. Select the quote.
11. You will now have both the requisition and quote tied to the PO.
Q12. Where does the note to buyer show on an autocreated PO?

A: On the AutoCreate form, go to the Folder menu and choose Show Field. Select Note to Buyer
and click OK. The field will now be displayed.
If you would like this field to be displayed every time you use autocreate, go to Folder -> Save
As... Give the folder a name and check the Open as Default box.
Q13. Does the supplier name from a requisition get carried over to an autocreated purchase
order?
A: The standard functionality is that if the requisition has a the "suggested supplier name" field
populated, it would carry over to the autocreated PO. The "suggested supplier name" field will
only carry to the autocreated PO if it was selected from the list of values on the requisition. If it is
typed in manually, it will not carry over.
Q14. What causes the app-14090 error when autocreating a requisition?

A: There are several things that must be performed to address this issue:
* Profile Option in MRP must be set as follows:
- MRP: Sourcing Rule Category Set value must be set to Purchasing in the Purchasing
application.
* AutoCreate Blanket PO
- Revisions do not default for Items when autocreating Blanket PO and the Item Revision # must
be entered.
- The Item Revision number on the requisition must match the Item Revision number on the PO.
* Navigate: Setup -->Organization -->Financial Options; and in the Alternate Region
ENCUMBRANCE, verify if the REQUISITION ENCUMBRANCE checkbox is checked.
* In the Sys Admin Responsibility navigate to:
Profiles=> query for the Profile Option PO: AUTOCREATE GL DATE.
If using the Encumbrance for Requisitions, then this Profile Option can be set to either
AUTOCREATE DATE or REQUISITION GL DATE. If not using Encumbrance, then you may set
it to NULL. This will solve the problem.
The Profile Option PO: AUTOCREATE GL DATE is applicable only if you are using
Encumbrance for Requisitions.
FAQS
Q15. How do you autocreate a requisition with a document type as blanket release when
requisitions were imported from a 3rd party system?
A: Ensure the line types selected for Requisitions are appropriate.
You need to have Requisition Line types and PO Line types correctly associated.
Rerun the process and verify that the system does not error out.
Submit the request for requisition import and use the AutoCreate window to create document
with type as Blanket Release against the requisition. Navigation:
Purchasing -> Reports -> Submit a request for Requisition Import
Purchasing -> AutoCreate
Q16. How do you autocreate mrp generated requisitions to a blanket purchase order?
A: First initiate the Release Purchase Requisitions from the Planners Workbench.
Navigation:
Material Planning -> MRP -> Workbench
Second, in the Purchasing Responsibility, AutoCreate the requisition to a Blanket PO.
Navigation: AutoCreate
For Autocreate to find these requisition lines from MRP, the Blanket PO line type must be set to
Goods because the MRP Purchase Requisition is always created with a line type of Goods. The
reason that MRP uses the line type of Goods is because Goods is seeded data and because the
MRP Planner Workbench uses MRPPRELB.pls to insert a record into the
PO_REQUISITION_INTERFACE table.
Q17. Can you autocreate more than one standard PO in one autocreate session?
A: Yes,
1) Find the requisition lines to be autocreated.
2) Choose a line.
3) Autocreate the purchases order using the automatic button.
4) Do not leave the requisition lines screen.
5) Choose a different line.
6) Try to autocreate another standard purchase order by clicking the automatic button.
7) The system gives the message: app-14090: no requisition lines were autocreated.
Q18. Try to autocreate, but the system hangs, how to cancel the requisition that are locked?
A: Check if there is a lock on the PO related tables.
Select object_id, session_id, oracle_username, os_user_name,
Process, locked_mode
From sys.v_$locked_object;
FAQS
Select a.object_name, b.oracle_username

From all_objects a, v$locked_object b
Where a.object_id = b.object_id
And a.object_name like 'po%';
If you have any records returned, you have a lock. To disable the lock, kill the session.
Regenerating the form and bouncing the database will unlock all the objects.
Q19. What is the package or procedure that stores the autocreate process?
A: Poxbwp1b.pls - autocreate po package body.
Description: this package contains all the functions to create purchase orders, releases and rfq's
from data stored in the po_headers_interface, po_lines_interface and po_distributions_interface
tables. When a user selects a line to be autocreated, it loads the above interface tables. At that
point the functions which are part of this package are called and move to create the req line into a
release or purchase order.
Q20. What does the grouping method 'default' indicate in the autocreate form?
A: With the grouping method 'default' requisition lines for the same item, revision, line type, unit
of measure, and transaction reason are combined into individual purchase order lines; and
requisition lines for the same item, revision, and line type are combined into individual rfq lines.
Q21. I autocreated a PO with two lines. When I go to the purchase order entry screen and
query the PO, instead of showing the lines created, it only shows a new line with number 3.
Why?
A: Make sure Inventory organization field is populated in Financial Options.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What do I do if I am unable to Approve a Requisition?
A: 1. Check that the Document Manager is up.
2. Check and resolve the Document Manager error.
3. Run wfstat.sql and check its output.
4. If the above have been performed, check if you have set up approval assignments correctly.
To set up approval assignments navigate to:
Purchasing>Setup>Approvals>Approval Assignments
On the find job approval assignments form, search and select the appropriate position (e.g.
VPM200 Vice President of Materials) which will display the "Assign Approval Groups" window.
On this window, make sure you have an approval group selected for each document type you
work with.
Q2. How do I check the Status of Deferred Activities?

A: 1. Run wfbkgchk.sql available at $FND_/sql
2. For example, log on to the database by doing sqlplus username/password@database
3. Then run the sql file, wfbkgchk.sql, by doing @wfbkgchk.sql
Q3. What do I do if I get the 'PO_ALL_EXIT_ERROR' error?
A: Have you performed the following?
1. Check if the message file is <lang.msb> is present. If not regenerate messages using adadmin
utility.
2. Set the Profile Option 'PO: Document Approval Mode' correctly.
Set the profile for one of the following options:
- Standard User Exit
- Document Approval Manager ( Which occurs twice in the List of values for the Profile option.
The correct profile option is the one which occurs the second time)
Explanation:
As the System Administrator responsibility, the list of values for the system profile option 'PO:
Document Approval Mode' should contain 3 entries:
1. Document Approval Manager
2. Standard User Exit
3. Document Approval Manager
Note that the option 'Document Approval Manager' appears twice in the list.
The first one listed was actually obsoleted in 10.7 . Development will not be providing a script
which will remove or inactivate the old profile option. The application does not offer the ability
to inactivate or remove profile option values.
To resolve the issue, either of the other two values (the second and third as mentioned above) in
the list of values can be used for the profile option and users should then be able to approve a
purchase order.
FAQS
Q4. How do I identify Document Manager failures while Approving a Document?

A: To identify the document manager error number, please look at the attribute
DOC_MGR_ERROR_NUM in the wfstat log provided.
DOC_MGR_ERROR_NUM VALUE - MEANING:
1 Document Manager Timed Out (It is taking more than 180 sec to complete the activity). Bounce
the Database and Restart the PO Approval Document Manager.
2 Document Manager is Down. Please restart the PO Approval Document Manager.
3 Exception in the Code. In this case look at SYSADMIN_ERROR_MSG attribute for more details.
Q5. What do I do when I get a Document Manager Failure Notification?
A: For customers on Family Pack and above:
1. A new item type POERROR is created for handling the error process in case of any document
manager related issues.
2. The following workflow attributes are defined with implementation specific values. (These
need to be set in POERROR wf) DOC_MGR_WAIT_RELATIVE_TIME - amount of time processes
will have to wait before getting picked again. (default 0) RETRY_COUNT - number of attempts
to get document manager for approval (default 0) TIMEOUT_VALUE - amount of time for
notification to automatically close itself. (default 0) SYSADMIN_USER_NAME - application user
(typically system administrator) who can receive notifications for document manager related
errors in status 1 and 2. (MUST BE SET BY CUSTOMER TO A VALID USERNAME)
3. The workflow background engine always needs to be running for the POERROR item type.
The interval between document manager retries is dependent on the following factors
- attribute DOC_MGR_WAIT_RELATIVE_TIME
- work flow background engine wait period
Irrespective of the approval mode, there has to be separate workflow background process for the
POERROR item type which will "poll" those processes to complete their "wait" periods and get
picked for processing again. Once the background engine is started, it will try to approve the
document again. Users are not sent any notifications for status 1 and 2 errors. Status 3 errors are
reported to the user and not to the system administrator.
Q6. What is the title of the executable file that represents the Document Approval Manager,
and where is it located on the server?
A: The executable file that contains the code for 'PO: Document Approval Manager' is POXCON.
This file can be found on the database server in the $PO_/bin directory. For a Windows NT
environment, the file will be named POXCON.EXE and the FIND FILE tool should be utilized to
locate it.
FAQS
Q7. Is it necessary to have the Document Approval Manager running, and how many target
processes should be available?
A: Yes, it necessary for the PO Document Approval Manager to be running in order for the
approval process to complete. The number of target processes should be greater than or equal to
the number of processors in the database server (actual processes). Number of Target Processes
=> Number of Processors on Server (actual process)
Q8. How does the Document Approval Manager get restarted?

A: The Document Approval Manager gets restarted on the Administer Concurrent Managers
form, using the following steps:
Navigation: Concurrent -> Manager -> Administer
- Locate the PO Document Approval Manager.
- In the Status column, you should see something saying the manager is not running.
To reactivate the PO Document Approval Manager:
- Click on the line containing the PO Document Approval Manager
- Click the Deactivate button.
- Close and reopen the form.
- Locate the PO Document Approval Manager and click on the line
- Click on the Activate button.
The PO Document Approval Manager should now be restarted.
NOTE: The Internal Manager must be running for this process to work. If it is not running, the
DBA or System Administrator must restart the Internal Manager first.
FAQ Details
Q1. What are the setups required for Encumbrance Accounting?
A: 1) In General Ledger
a) Enable budgetary control in your Set of Books:
Navigation: Setup->Financials->Books
Alternative Region : Budgetary Control Options Flag Enable Budgetary Control.
b) Create budgetary control groups:
Navigation: Budgets->Define->Controls
Create name, description and enter Budgetary control rules. e.g.. Add Purchasing as Source with
category Purchases.
This control group has to be attached at the Site level or User level Profile Option (Budgetary
Control Group) and this will control the behavior regarding the tolerance of budgetary control.
c) Define Budget:
FAQS
Navigation->Budget->Define->Budget
In Budget, basically you set period boundary for your budget i.e. time frame.
Remember to open the periods for the budget by pressing the Open next year button.
NOTE: A prerequisite to the above step is that Encumbrance year should be open at Set of Books
level.
Navigation: Setup->Open/Close
d) Define Budget Organization:
Navigation: Budget->Define->Organization
In this step you choose the accounts for which you want to have control and link it to your
Budget defined in step 'c'. Complete Header of form and Navigate to Ranges and define your
ranges for your organization.
e) Encumbrance types:
Navigation: Setup->Journals->Encumbrances.
Encumbrance types are defined so as to bifurcate the reservation of funds done at different levels
i.e. Requisition, PO or Invoice level, it helps management people in having better financial
control.
2) In Purchasing
a) Enable encumbrance: Encumbrance has to be enabled in Financial Options form in Purchasing
modules.
In Purchasing: Setup->Organization->Financial Options (Alternative region Encumbrance)
Select different encumbrance types for different levels i.e. Requisition, PO and Invoice. Here you
attach the types that you defined in step 1.e of GL setup.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What reference columns does Oracle Purchasing populate in the table gl_bc_packets? And
what information is populated in these columns?
A: Oracle Purchasing populates four of the five reference fields.
Reference1 with the document type, e.g. PO or REQ.
Reference2 with the document header id, po_header_id or requistion_header_id.
Reference3 with the distribution id, po_distribution_id or distribution_id.
Reference4 with the document number, purchase order number or requisition number.
Q2. If over receipt of goods, will Oracle Purchasing reverse encumbrances associated with the
over receipt quantity?
A: No, this is not possible as the budget is only updated with the encumbrance amount when the
purchase order was created. Since this transaction has already been logged in gl_bc_packets and
potentially picked up by the Create Journals program there is no method to modify this
transaction.
Q3. How do I liquidate excess encumbrances for the purchase order, purchase order line or
purchase order shipment?
A: By performing a Final Close on the document. However, this action is irreversible, so be sure
no other transactions need to be completed before the Final Close.
Q4. How can I tell if Oracle Federal Financials is installed in my database?

A: To check if Federal Financials is installed in the application, join the tables
FND_APPLICATION and FND_PRODUCT_INSTALLATIONS as:
SELECT fa.application_id, fa.application_short_name,
fpi.status
FROM fnd_application fa,
fnd_product_installations fpi
WHERE fa.application_id= fpi.application_id
AND fa.application_short_name like 'FV%'
SQL> /
APPLICATION_ID APPLICATION_SHORT_NAME
-------------- ------------------------------------------- 8901 FV I
In addition to the status of installed, you can also query the dba_objects view for the object_name
FAQS
with a prefix of FV, for example:

SELECT object_name
FROM dba_objects
WHERE object_name like 'FV%'
AND owner='APPS';
If there are any objects in the database with the prefix FV, a row will be returned. There are
approximately 500 objects that belong to the Federal Vertical application.
Q5. Is there a way to unreserve or reverse an encumbrance on a purchase order?

A: Beginning with Oracle Applications Release 11, there is the functionality of Unreserving an
encumbrance at the header level of a purchasing document. The unreserve works only if funds
are currently reserved for the document. Once you have unreserved the document you can
modify as needed.
Q6. What is a Transaction Code and how is this defined?

A: Transaction codes are typically used when the budgetary or the fund accounting model is
employed. The vertical application Oracle Federal Financials includes the profile Enable
Transaction Codes which activates this functionality.
Once transaction codes have been enabled, they can be defined in General Ledger (Setup Accounts - Transaction Codes). Transaction codes are used as a shortcut to create debit and credit
pairs for a single transaction.
Q7. What steps do I take when the approval of the purchase order fails due to insufficient
funds?
A: 1. Identify the distribution that is failing, the error message will usually indicate which
distribution is in error. Obtain the ccid of this distribution account.
2. . Check the budget organization for which this code combination id is assigned. This is
accomplished in General Ledger (Budgets - Define - Organization).
a) First find the budget_entity_id (budget that this account is tied to)
select set_of_books_id , budget_entity_id ,
range_id, AUTOMATIC_ENCUMBRANCE_FLAG ,FUNDS_CHECK_LEVEL_CODE from
GL_BUDGET_ASSIGNMENTS where CODE_COMBINATION_ID = '&#####' ;
b) Using the budget_entity_id query the Budget Organization name.
FAQS
select name, set_of_books_id , status_code from GL_BUDGET_ENTITIES

where budget_entity_id = '&####';
Specifically verify the Amount Type, the Boundary and the Funding Budget values. The funding
budget should be active and ensure that your encumbrance amount has not exceeded the funds
available for the funds checking interval (boundary). For example, if the budget total is
$100,000.00, the amount budgeted per quarter is $25,000.00, the Amount type is YTD and the
boundary is QTD, then check that the purchase order encumbrance would not exceed the
boundary amount of $25,000.00.
Q8. The Encumbrance Detail Report does not pick up expected purchase orders.
A: Review the parameters passed to the report to verify that the selection criteria did not exclude
the purchase order. The selection of purchase orders on this report is based on the following
information in the database:
- the setting of the encumbered_flag in po_distributions, needs to be set to Y, and the cancel_flag
in po_line_locations must be set to N and
- the gl_encumbered_date in po_distributions must be between the dates passed to the report for
the encumbered dates and
- the vendor used on the purchase order must be included by the Vendor parameter and
- the po_distributions.prevent_encumbrance_flag must be set to N
Q9. Records are appearing on the Uninvoiced Receipts report for expense items which have
been received but not invoiced. How can these records be removed from the report and kept
from accruing each month?
Q10. A purchase order shipment was received against, then cancelled. It now appears on the
Uninvoiced Receipts report and accrues each month when running the Receipt Accruals Period-End process. Why is this happening?
A: These questions pertain to Oracle Purchasing release 10.7. The quantity on an approved,
encumbered Purchase Order can be changed by deleting and creating a new line with a revised
quantity.
There are restrictions regarding modifications to encumbered Purchase Orders after being
approved, and the following is standard functionality:
An encumbered Purchase Order cannot be modified as follows:
- Cannot change price
- Cannot change shipment distribution
- Cannot change shipment quantity
- Cannot change accounts (distributions)
- Cannot change currency
FAQS
The line quantity can be increased as this will create more encumbrance. Upon doing so
additional shipment lines have to be added to resolve the differences in the new quantity. A
change in price would require real time modification to existing rows in the GL_BC_PACKETS
table and there is no provision in the software code to do this.
The most efficient and recommended manner for revision of Purchasing Documents is to cancel
the Purchase Order line, shipment or even the entire Purchase Order then recreate the Purchase
Order with the revised data.
This cancellation does not perform a reversal of funds, but it does a corresponding debit to the
respective accounts to nullify the encumbrance.
Q11. If I go to cancel an encumbered/reserved purchasing document and the period in which it
was created is closed, I cannot cancel the line or document due to the closed period?
A: There are software fixes released which place the reversing funds in the next available open
Purchasing period.
10.7 - pofdo.lpc 80.28
11.0 - pofbd.lpc 110.13
pofin.lpc 110.5
This has been fixed in 11i.
Q12. I click on the Approve button for a Purchase Order and the reserved check box in the
approval window is already enabled as default.
A: This issue is addressed in bug 1535050. Fix will be available in Purchasing Patchset H for
Release 11.
Q13. I am using encumbrance accounting and when I forward a Purchase Order for approval, I
am encountering the following error: APP-14166: Please enter a forward to employee or funds
are not reserved.
A: You must check the Reserve Funds check box when forwarding and/or approving a Purchase
Order if you are using encumbrance. You can check to see if you are using encumbrance in
Purchasing by doing the following:
1. Setup/Organizations/Financial Options
2. Change the Alternate Region to Encumbrance and see if the Use PO Encumbrance check box is
checked.
FAQS
3. Refer Note 1064155.6 for more details.
Q14. I am trying to approve the Purchase Order and get the following error: "This record
cannot be reserved for update. It has already been reserved by another user".
A: This is resolved In file version POXAPAPC.pld 110.37 (758079). This fix moves the document
submission check from document approval manager to client side.
Q15. Blanket Purchase Agreement have "Reserved" box checked on the purchase order lines. I
am not using encumbrance accounting.
A: This issue is Fixed file POXPOEPO.fmb ver 110.88 and also in Release 11i (889797).
Q16. I reserve a requisition with 2 distributions - the 1st distribution succeeds but fails for the
2nd distribution. Distributions quantities for both distributions are changed and re-reserved
but the reserved amount for the 1st distribution is not changed (and is wrong compared to the
quantity on the distribution).
A: This issue has been fixed in the following file versions:
10.7 fixed in POXRQLNS.pld 916.68 Purchasing Patchset P-1618264
11.0 fixed in POXRQLNS.pld 110.65 Purchasing Patchset G-1525417
11.5 fixed in POXRQLNS.pld 115.53 - (Internal bug - 1363372)
Q17. I created a new requisition, then reserved (without approving) the funds are reserved.
Then I delete the requisition from the requisition form, which does not un-reserve funds.
A: This issue has been fixed in the following files:
10.7 -- Patchset O (Patch number 1267514)
POXRQRES.pls 80.1
POXRQREB.pls 80.4
po10sc.msg 80.20
11.0 -- Patchset F (Patch number 1330514)
POXRQR1S.pls 110.1
POXRQR1B.pls 110.5
po11.msg 110.25
11.5 -- Fixed in these files
POXRQR1S.pls-115.1

POXRQR1B.pls-115.1
poencmsg.ldt 115.0.
FAQS
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What are Reminder notifications?
A: Once an approver doesn?t respond to approval notification for quite sometime, then a
reminder notification can be sent out to the approver. You can send up to two reminders to an
approvbper using the Timeout feature. You can also specify that after a certain period of time, the
document be forwarded automatically to the next approver in the hierarchy. This feature has to
be setup by you by changing the PO and/or Requisition approval workflow in Oracle Workflow
Builder.
Q2. How do you setup the timeout feature?

A: In Oracle Workflow Builder, open the ?PO Approval? workflow (for purchase orders) or the
?PO Requisition Approval? workflow for requisitions. To enable the Timeout feature in the PO
Approval workflow, modify the following activities in the Notify Approver sub process by
entering a Timeout period in their Properties windows:
Approve PO Notification, PO Approval Reminder 1, and PO Approval Reminder 2.
To enable the Timeout feature in the PO Requisition Approval workflow, modify the following
activities in the Notify Approver sub process by entering a Timeout period in their Properties
windows: Approve Requisition Notification, Requisition Approval Reminder1, and Requisition
Approval Reminder2.
Q3. Any prerequisite for timeout to work?

A: Workflow Background Process must be running for the reminder notifications to be
generated. Background process must be set to run periodically if you want the reminders to be
regularly generated. Run this program with parameter ?Timeout? set as ?Yes?, and ?Item Type?
parameter as ?PO Approval Process? or ?PO Requisition Approval Process? whichever
appropriate.
Q4. How do you generate the notifications for the documents that need to be started up in
approval yet?
A: You can run ?Send Notifications For Purchasing Documents? program to search the
documents that are incomplete, rejected, or in need of re-approval and send notifications to the
appropriate people informing them about the document?s status.
Q5. What are the different types of reminders that the notifications can be sent for?
A: When ?Send Notifications For Purchasing Documents? program is run, Notifications are
generated regarding the following situations:
FAQS
- POs and requisitions are Incomplete, Rejected or may require re-approval.

- POs and Releases require acceptance and acceptance is not yet received. ?Acceptance past due?
notifications is sent if the acceptance required date is over and no acceptance is entered by this
date.
- RFQ's and Quotations are in status of In Process.
- Active RFQ approaching expiration i.e. current date is between Due Date and Close Date.
- Active Quotation approaching expiration.
General Information
Q: What are the Oracle Applications patch types?
A: All Applications patches are organized by aggregation level.
Stand-alone (one-off) Patch: Addresses a single fix or enhancement. Stand-alone patches

are released only when there is an immediate need for a fix or enhancement that cannot wait
until an aggregate bundling is available. Although stand-alone patches are intended to be as
small as possible, they usually include any dependent files that have changed since the base
release in order to form a complete patch that can be applied by any customer. The actual
number of files changed will depend on the current code level on the system to which the patch
is being applied.
Rollup Patch (RUP): An aggregation of patches that may be at the functional level, or at a
specific product/family release level. For example, a Flexfields rollup patch contains all the latest
patches related to Flexfields at the time the patch was created. A Marketing Family 11.5.9 rollup
patch contains all the latest Marketing patches released since, and applicable to, 11.5.9.
Mini-pack: An aggregation of patches at the product level. For example, Inventory Minipack G (11i.INV.G) contains all the latest patches for the Inventory product at the time the minipack was created. Mini-packs are named in alphabetical sequence such as 11i.INV.E, 11i.INV.F,
11i.INV.G, and so on. Mini-packs are cumulative. In other words, 11i.INV.G contains everything
in 11i.INV.F, which contains everything in 11i.INV.E, and so on. The terms patchset and minipack are often used interchangeably. <
Family Pack: An aggregation of patches at the product family level. For example,
Financials Family Pack C (11i.FIN_PF.C) contains all the latest patches for products in the
Financials family at the time the family pack was created. Family product codes always end in
"_PF" and family packs are given alphabetical sequence such as 11i.HR_PF.B, 11i.HR_PF.C, and
11i.HR_PF.D. Family packs are cumulative. In other words, Discrete Manufacturing Family Pack
G (11i.DMF_PF.G) contains everything in 11i.DMF_PF.F, which contains everything in
11i.DMF_PF.E, and so on.
Maintenance Pack: An aggregation of patches for all products in the E-Business Suite. For
example, Release 11.5.9 Maintenance Pack contains all the latest code level for all products at the
time 11.5.9 was created. Maintenance packs are numbered sequentially such as 11.5.7, 11.5.8,
11.5.9, and are cumulative. In other words, 11.5.9 contains everything in 11.5.8, which contains
everything in 11.5.7, and so on.
In addition to releasing a maintenance pack, Oracle also packages a new Rapid Install at each
maintenance pack release level. So Applications Release 11.5.9 Rapid Install contains the same
applications code level that a customer would get if they applied the Release 11.5.9 Maintenance
Pack on an earlier 11i release level. Note that the technology stack could still be different since
FAQS
Rapid Install includes the latest certified technology stack, but the maintenance pack includes
only Applications code.
Patches can also be organized by purpose.
Diagnostic Patch: Used to gather additional information when a product failure cannot be
reproduced by Oracle. The additional information will assist Oracle Support Services and Oracle
Development in resolving the failure.
Interoperability Patch: Allows Oracle Applications to function properly with a newer

version of the technology stack. Interoperability patches are typically required with new version
of the database or Applications technology stack.
Translated Patch: A non-English version of a patch. Release 11i supports 30 non-English

languages. Customers who are using languages other than English, need to apply the
corresponding translated patch(es) for the languages they are using in addition to any base US
patch(es).
Merged Translation Patch: Provided in real time (without requiring a translator) in the
event a translated patch is not available when a customer needs it. A merged translation patch is
applied just like a fully translated patch. The fully translated patch is escalated and is usually
available within 24 hours. It can be applied safely on of a merged translation patch.
Translation Fix: Provided in the event a translation word choice is inappropriate. A

translation fix is applied just like a translated patch, except there is no corresponding base US
patch.
New Feature Patch: Introduces new functionality and/or products. It is applied using
standard patching utilities.
Consolidated Update: Improves and streamlines the upgrade and maintenance processes
by consolidating certain post-release patches. Most recommended patches and rollups for a
particular maintenance release are consolidated into a single patch that is installed immediately
following the Maintenance Pack or the Rapid Install.
Family Consolidated Upgrade Patch: All upgrade-related patches consolidated from all
the products within a product family. Family consolidated upgrade patches are released as
needed and are only available for upgrading to Release 11i from Release 10.7 or 11.0. The Oracle
Applications Release Notes lists the most recent patches.
Documentation Patch: Updates online help.
Q: How often should customers apply mini-packs, family packs, and maintenance packs?
A: You should keep your maintenance level up to date in order to:
Receive the latest fixes.
Reduce the number of file updates needed for emergency fixes.
Reduce the possibility of unfulfilled prerequisite patches when applying an emergency fix.
Make it easier for Oracle Support and Oracle Development to assist you.
Keep core products such as AD (patches and maintenance fixes), FND (security and
technology stack updates), and HR (legislative updates) up to date.
At a minimum, apply maintenance packs to stay within two maintenance releases. For example,
since 11.5.9 is currently available, customers at the 11.5.7 (or earlier) level should be planning
FAQS
their upgrade to 11.5.9.

Use mini-packs and family packs if you have an immediate need for the latest patch level for a
product or product family and cannot wait to apply the corresponding maintenance pack.
Q: How do I know what patches or files have been applied to a system? What happened to my
applptch.txt?
A: Prior to AD Mini-pack E, patch history was stored in a text file called applptch.txt in the
$APPL_/admin/<SID> directory. Auatch appended the applptch.txt file with information about
each patch applied.
With AD Mini-pack E, the new Patch History feature stores all patch information in database
tables. If the information cannot be written to the database, it is stored in files in the file system,
and is automatically loaded to the database the next time Auatch is run. In AD Mini-pack E, the
temp file is named applptch.txt. In AD Mini-pack H, there are two patch history files:
javaupdates<timestamp>.txt to record patch history about changes to Java files, and
adpsv<timestamp>.txt to record patch history about changes to all non-Java files.
The best way to review patch history information is to use the patch history search pages
provided by Oracle Applications Manager. The patch history database feature allows you to
query on patches or files applied and filter by patch number or file name, as well as date,
product, APPL_ name, server type, or language. See Oracle Applications Maintenance Utilities for
more information.
Q: What is the AD Features matrix printed on the Auatch screen and logfiles?
A: AD Feature Versions is a framework created to handle mismatches between the AD code on
the file system and the AD objects in the database. Both the version of the feature on the file
system and the version of the feature in the database are tracked separately. When the two
versions do not match, the feature is disabled, and when the two versions match, the feature is
(normally) enabled.
The table below is an example of the information displayed by AD Feature Versions in AD utility
log files. The first four columns in the table below represent the name of the feature, whether or
not the feature is enabled, the version of the feature in the APPL_, and the version of the feature
in the database.
Feature
CHECKFILE
PREREQ
CONCURRENT_SESSIONS
PATCH_HIST_IN_DB
Active?
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
APPL
1
2
1
3
Data Model
1
2
1
3
Flags
YYNY
YYNY
YYYN
YYNY
FAQS
The Flags Column values represent:

- 1st flag: Is the feature enabled in the APPL_?
- 2nd flag: Does the feature depend on any database objects?
- 3rd flag: Is the value of the 4th flag relevant?
- 4th flag: Is the feature enabled in the database?
This message is informational in nature only, the AD Feature Versions framework is only used
by AD internally and should not be modified unless under explicit instructions from AD
Development.
Q: What is a patch driver file? What is the difference between the c driver, d driver, g driver, and
u driver?
A: Patch driver files contain commands used by Auatch to direct the installation of a patch. There
are four types of driver files, and a patch can contain more than one driver.
Copy driver (c driver): Named c<patchnumber>.drv, and contains commands to change

Oracle Applications files. The commands include directives to copy/update files, libraries,
and/or Java, and commands for generating JAR files and/or C executables. In a multi-node
system, run it on all application tier APPL_s.
Database driver (d driver): Named d<patchnumber>.drv, and contains commands to

change Oracle Applications database objects, such as PL/SQL and table definitions, or to update
or migrate data. In a multi-node system, run it only on the application tier APPL_ that
implements the admin server.
Generate driver (g driver): Named g<patchnumber>.drv, and contains commands to

generate forms, reports, and/or graphics files. In a multi-node system, run it on all application
tier APPL_s, unless the APPL_ only implements the admin server.
Unified driver (u driver): Named u<patchnumber>.drv, it is a consolidated driver

containing all copy, database, and generate actions. Apply this driver to all APPL_s on all
application tier servers. Auatch knows which command should be run on each type of
application tier. The unified driver requires only a single execution of Auatch. It is currently used
only in the Release 11.5.9 Maintenance Pack.
If you merge a patch that contains a unified driver with patches that contain other drivers, the
resulting merged patch will contain only a merged unified driver.
Q: What are the patching implications of a multi-node environment? How do I know what type
of server/tier/node I am patching?
A: In a multi-node environment, you need to apply the patch, in its entirety, to the node
implementing the admin server first. After that you can apply the patch in any order on the
remaining nodes.
In many cases the terms 'server', 'tier' and 'node' are used interchangeably and the exact meaning
must be inferred from the context. Officially, the terms are different and have a distinct meaning.
FAQS
A node (or machine) is a computer.

A server is a collection of one or more computer processes that perform a specific function.
A tier is a logical grouping of one or more servers or computer processes.
In Release 11i there are three tiers: desk, application, and database.
The desk tier (generally an end-user PC) does not consist of any servers. Rather it consists
of a Web browser that makes use of HTML and a Java applet to provide the user interface.
The application tier (also called the middle tier) consists of a number of servers, such as
the concurrent processing server, web server, forms server, and admin server. These servers are
also referred to as application tier servers. Likewise, the nodes on which such servers run are
referred to as application tier server nodes.
The database tier consists of the database server, which stores all the data in a Release 11i
system.
For example, if a node contains only the database server and no other Release 11i software, it is
called the database server node, and it is part of the database tier only. However, it is possible for
the database server and any of the application tier servers to run on the same node. In this
situation, the node can be called the database server node, the forms server node, the Web server
node, and so on. Because servers from other tiers are running on one node, the node belongs to
more than one tier.
For more information about the Release 11i architecture, see Oracle Applications Concepts.
To determine what application tier servers are on each node, refer to the Applications Dashboard
in Oracle Applications Manager
Q: What is the Auatch checkfile feature?

A: This feature reduces patch application downtime by checking to see if a given database action
has been performed previously for the associated file contained in the patch. If the action has
been performed using the current (or higher) version of the file, Auatch omits the action.
Q: Can I run multiple Auatch sessions at the same time?
A: You cannot currently run multiple sessions simultaneously. However, patches can be merged
and can be applied in a single patching session.
A new AD feature called AD Concurrent Sessions is currently being tested. It uses a system of
locks that will prevent incompatible actions from executing at the same time, so compatible
actions can be run in parallel. This will allow you to run multiple Auatch sessions concurrently.
Help Applying Patches

Q: How can I shorten patch application time when applying patches?
A: There are several tips and tricks for shortening the time it takes to apply patches.
Schedule periodic downtime for proactive maintenance. The more up-to-date your system,
the less likely you are to experience known problems, and the easier it is to resolve new issues.
FAQS
Whenever you can test and schedule downtime to apply the latest maintenance or family packs,
do so.
Keep AD code up-to-date. Oracle has put tremendous effort in reducing downtime and
improving the maintenance experience. Running at the latest AD mini-pack level allows you to
take full advantage of these efforts.
Keep your test system current with your production system. As you test the application of
a patch, it is imperative that the test be realistic in terms of current patch level and transaction
data.
Use the novalidate option (this is the default in AD Mini-pack H) if you know all Oracle
passwords are correct.
Consolidate multiple patches into a single, merged patch with AD Merge Patch.
AD Merge Patch is a utility that merges multiple Applications patches into a single patch. Use it
to apply more than one patch during a single downtime. AD Merge Patch reduces patch
application time by eliminating redundant patching tasks.
All 11i patches can be merged. If you merge translation patches, AD Merge Patch performs
necessary character set conversion at merge time. If you merge patches containing both split
(c,d,g) drivers and unified drivers, AD Merge Patch creates a single, unified driver for the
merged patch allowing the merged patch to be successfully applied.
Employ sufficient space. This includes new tablespace for indexes created by the patch.
For patches containing large numbers of files, you should also make sure there is sufficient space
temporary space to contain the unzipped patch and files to be copied into the APPL_.
Use a Shared APPL_ if you have multiple application tier nodes.

In a Shared APPL_ installation, the APPL_ file system is installed onto a shared disk resource
mounted to each node used in the Applications System. These nodes can be used to provide
standard application tier services, such as forms, web, and concurrent processing.
Use the Distributed AD feature to utilize additional hardware during maintenance.

AD has always used a Parallel Jobs System, where multiple AD workers start and are assigned
jobs. Information for the Jobs System is stored in the database, and workers receive their
assignments by monitoring certain tables in the database.
AD Mini-pack H introduces Distributed AD, which allows workers to be started on remote
machines as well, where they can utilize the additional resources on those machines when
completing their assigned jobs. This capability improves scalability, performance, and resource
utilization because workers in the same AD session can be started on additional application tier
nodes.
Use a Staged APPL_ to reduce the downtime to just the database update.
A staged Applications system represents an exact copy of your Production system including a
copy of the database. Patches are applied to this staged system, while your Production system
remains up. When all patches have been successfully applied to the test system, the reduced
downtime for the Production system can begin. The staged APPL_ is used both to run the
database update into the Production database as well as synchronizing the production APPL_.
Perform uptime maintenance, when possible. Examples of maintenance activities that can
be accomplished while users are on the system include:
Gather Schema Statistics
Patch the Online Help
FAQS
Apply translation patches while users are using different languages (possibly in another
time zone)
Apply the database update component of a translation patch while using the affected
language
Q: How do I run Auatch non-interactively?

A: The AD defaults file allows you to run Auatch (or AD Administration) in non-interactive
mode. It contains tokens to answer defaults-enabled prompts.
Oracle provides a file called adalldefaults.txt that has tokens for all possible default-enabled
prompts. This file is maintained by Autoconfig and can be used as a template when creating
defaults files.
See Oracle Applications Maintenance Procedures for information on running Auatch noninteractively using a defaults file.
Q: Do patches need to be applied in a particular order? What is a prerequisite patch?

A: Patches do not need to be applied in a particular order, even though a readme may state a
specific order is required, unless one of the patches is an AD patch. This is because you may need
to patch the patching utility so that it works properly when you use it to apply subsequent
patches.
A prerequisite patch fulfills a dependency for another patch. Strictly speaking, they are corequisites and can be applied in any order before using the system. We recommend that you
merge a patch with its required prerequisites, with the exception of prerequisite patches for the
AD product.
Starting with AD Mini-pack H, Auatch has a Prereq feature that, when run with patches
containing metadata, automatically determines if prerequisites are not fulfilled and informs you.
At this point, you can download the prerequisites, merge them with the patch, restart Auatch,
and apply the merged patch.
Older patches, or patches whose metadata is missing the prerequisite information, may list
prerequisite patches in the patch README.
Q: How can I determine the effects a patch will have on my system?

A: You can submit a specific patch analysis request through the Patch Advisor to determine the
impact of a patch on your system. Patch Advisor Impact Analysis provides reports on:
The total number of files in the patch
The number of files the patch will install
FAQS
The products that will have updated files

The files that will be introduced by the patch
The files on the target system that will be changed by the patch
The files with dependencies on patched files
See Oracle Applications Maintenance Utilities for more information.
Q: What happens if I run a driver on the wrong application tier server?

A: Because Auatch applies only the necessary actions for each type of application tier, any driver
can be applied to any APPL_ on any node. However, the sequence is important. Patches without
unified drivers must have the drivers applied in the following order: copy driver, database
driver, and generate driver.
Q: What are Auatch restart files?

A: Restart files store information about completed processing in the event of a patch or system
failure. They allow Auatch, AutoUpgrade, and AD Administration to continue processing at the
point where they sped. Do not modify or delete restart files unless specifically told to do so by
Oracle Support Services.
The restart files reside in $APPL_/admin/<SID>/restart (UNIX) or in
%APPL_%\admin\<SID>\restart (Windows).
Q: If I am applying a patch and it fails, should I simply rerun it from the beginning after fixing
the issue?
A: If a patch driver fails, fix the issue and restart Auatch. Auatch will allow you to continue
where the patch left off. Rerunning the patch from the beginning may result in a patch being
applied incorrectly.
Q: What should I do when the Oracle Applications Auatch Prerequisite Checking Feature Fails?
A: There are various issues that could cause a failure in the Auatch Prerequisite Checking
Feature.
Q: If a worker fails when Auatch is running, what should I do?
A: When a worker fails its job, the AD utility running the worker will take one of several possible
actions:
Defer the job to the end of the list of jobs to run, and assign the worker another job
Set the worker status to Failed and continue to run jobs in other workers
FAQS
If all other workers are in failed or waiting state, wait for user input (interactive mode) or
exit (non-interactive mode)
If the worker remains in a failed state, examine the worker log file and determine the cause of the
failure. The worker log files are named adwork<number>.log (for example adwork01.log or
adwork001.log). They are located in the same directory as the main AD utility log file. By default
this is under $APPL_/admin/<SID>/log.
Attempt to correct the problem and restart the failed job. If you cannot determine the cause of the
failure, try restarting the failed job to see if it works the second time (it may have failed due to a
concurrency or resource issue).
To restart a failed job, run AD Controller and choose the option to restart a failed job. Enter the
worker number when prompted. You can use AD Controller to see the status of jobs both before
and after restarting them. The status before restarting should be Failed, and the status after
restarting should be Fixed, Restart.
If you are unable to fix the failed job, contact Oracle Support Services for assistance.
If the AD utility exited after the job failed, you must use AD Controller to restart the failed job
before you can restart the AD utility. Otherwise, the AD utility will detect the failed job and shut
down again.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. Why does the create releases process not create a Release when we have run the CREATE
RELEASES program against a Blanket Purchase Order whose EFFECTIVE DATES are in the
future with a valid Sourcing Rule?
A: The CREATE RELEASE program must be run within the EFFECTIVE DATES of the Blanket
Purchase Order. This is because the program verifies whether the SYSTEM DATE falls within the
EFFECTIVE DATES, when looking for the Releases to be created. This is a standard functionality.
Q2. Why cant we create a release of a blanket purchase order, When there exists a valid BPA
and in the release form we pick the blanket PO from the list of values (LOV). Once selected,
we cannot tab past that field and does not get any error messages.
A: Check for the invalid objects in the database. Invalid objects can prevent improper screen field
action. There are numerous packages and library handling code that the form utilizes.
Q3. When we try to run Requisition import after running a Min-Max planning request why is
it that requisitions are created from Requisition import but no releases are created against
blanket POs.
A: For Releases to get created automatically in the Requisition Import process:
- Check for the profile option PO: Release During Requisition Import which should be set to
'Yes to create releases during requisition import.
- 'Sourcing Rule' must have current date between 'effective date' and 'to date'.
- Check that the requisition is sourced with the blanket, and the requisitions are approved as part
of the Requisition Import process.
- If the Encumbrance is ON, then the requisition will not get approved and will be in pre
approved status and hence release will not get created.
- Check the profile option MRP: Purchasing By Revision (If requisitions are coming from MRP)
and INV: Purchasing By Revision (If requisitions are coming from INV). This must be set
according and should not be null. This profile option must be set to 'Yes' or 'No' according to the
customers requirement.
- Verify the table PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE, column AUTOSOURCE_FLAG is Y.
- Verify if this item has a blanket purchase agreement approved and it is not closed or cancelled.
Q4. Why are we able to create releases against a Blanket Purchase Order even though the sum
of amount of all the releases that have been created is equal to the amount on the Blanket
Purchase Order?
A: Oracle Purchasing does not do any validation on the agreed amount limit on the Blanket until
approval of the release.
FAQS
Q5. Why is it so that even though the Release is not approved, the amount against this release
is on the blanket gets updated?
A: This is standard functionality. As soon as a release is created, the amount released on the
blanket gets updated. In fact the amount released is not stored anywhere, system always
calculates It whenever the blanket is queried.
Q6. Why are the releases not getting generated automatically after the requisition import is
run successfully for those requisitions, which are created from MRP?
A: Check that the Release Time Fence on the item in setup is defined. Creating a Release Time
Fence on the item in setup solves the problem. The Release Time Fence on the item must fall
within the established schedule in MRP. The Release method should be set to Automatic Release.
Q7. Why is the Reqimport Automatically Creating Releases Although Profile PO: Release
During ReqImport is set to No?
A: This might be because of the Incorrect WorkFlow attribute setting. Check the attribute "Is
Automatic Creation Allowed" in the work flow process. This should set to N. Then the release is
not created automatically
Q8. Why is the amount released on the blanket PO is not updated and still includes the
amount of the cancelled release after a release is cancelled?
A: Released amount of the blanket PO is not automatically updated if an invoice was previously
matched and not cancelled before the release was cancelled.
Q9. Why is the Create Releases program, PORELGEN is not creating any releases for
requisitions, which are sourced to blanket agreements and have been generated from a
template?
A: The Source details on the requisition line have not been populated. The Create Releases
program will only create a releases if the Source Document Number has been populated on the
requisition line. When creating a requisition template, if you manually enter the item line there is
no where to enter the blanket information. When the requisition is created from the template, the
Source details on the requisition line are left blank so the Create Release program does not select
the requisition. Instead of entering the lines manually while creating the template, use the Copy
button, enter the type as Purchase Order and enter the blanket agreement number. The Source
details will be correctly populated with the blanket agreement number and the requisition will be
picked up by the Create Release program.
FAQS
Q10. Is the user allowed to modify quantity on distribution zone of an approved and reserved
release?
A: Oracle Purchasing does not allow the user to modify the quantity on the distribution of an
encumbered shipment nor does it allow creation of new distributions against encumbered
shipments.
Q11. Is the user allowed to delete an Incomplete Release?

A: Yes, The users are allowed to delete the incomplete releases in the application.
Q12. Can we save and approve blanket PO releases without entering promised and need-by
date?
A: If the item is either MRP/DRP, MPS/DRP or DRP planned item the promised date or need by
date is mandatory and the user has to enter the date. If the item is not planned, then it is not
mandatory.
Q13. Can the users enter the P-Card number in the Enter Releases Form?
A: No. The users can not enter the P-Card number the core apps. A P-card may be specified in
iProcurement, but is only a display only in Core Apps. We can see the P-Card data if the profile
option PO: Use P-card in Purchasing is set to YES.
Q14. Can we cancel the releases if they are in 'incomplete' status?

A: Cancellation is an authorization provides to revert back the approved status. If we cancel the
'Incomplete' release we will loose the traceability of the document actions. Hence we will not be
able to cancel an incomplete release.
Q15. Does the Blanket Purchase Orders get Automatically closed After the Release is Fully
Received and Invoiced?
A: The Blanket Purchase Orders will not automatically close after the Release is fully received
and invoiced. The roll-up of closed status for the Blanket Release Shipment happens to the
Blanket Release Header and not to Blanket Purchase Order. This is the Standard Functionality.
FAQS
Q16. What is the significance of "PO: Convert Requisition UOM to Source Document UOM"
profile option?
A: Earlier in Autocreate if the requisition UOM is different from the BPA UOM the user would
not be allowed to create a release. But in Create releases program this was possible. To make the
behavior consistent we have introduced this profile option. If this profile is set to yes we allow
the autocreation of the release with the quantity and UOM converted to that of the BPA. If the
profile is set to yes we do not allow the creation of the req both in autocreate as well as the create
releases program.
Q17. Doesn't the Create Releases report support one time items? Is this a bug?
A: Create Releases report does not support one time items. This is the intended functionality.
This is not a Bug.
Q18. Is it correct functionality that the enter req form will not raise a warning when the item is
tied to a BPA when the selection is made from the catalog via a Requisition Template?
A: Yes this is the correct functionality. We do not raise a warning when the item is tied to a BPA
when the selection is made from the catalog via a Requisition Template. There is already an ER
690225, which is logged for this issue.
FAQ Details
Q1. Why doesn't cancel PO automatically cancel assigned requisition, even when the checkbox
'Cancel requisition' is checked?
A: The intended functionality is that when a PO is canceled and the cancel requisition option is
selected, it only cancels the backing requisition lines not the header. So only requisition lines will
get canceled not the header.
Q2. Why do I get an APP-14056 error when canceling a PO shipment that has been matched?
A: Please check to see if the shipment being canceled is not Over Billed [billed more than
received]. In that case it cannot be canceled.
Q3. Why doesn't 'Canceling of Standard PO' change the status of the document? The Status
stays in value 'Approved'.
A: The authorization status remains Approved. Even if PO is canceled, only the canceled flag is
set to 'Y'. It is intended functionality.
Q4. Can I automatically 'Close' the Purchase order without receiving the full quantity?
A: The Receipt Close Tolerance lets you specify a quantity percentage within which Purchasing
FAQS
closes a partially received shipment. For example, if your Receipt Close Tolerance is 5% and you
receive 96% of an expected shipment, Purchasing automatically closes this shipment for
receiving.
Q5. When does a Purchase Order line get Closure Status 'Closed for Receiving'?
A: Purchasing automatically closes shipments for receiving and invoicing based on Tolerances
that you specify in the Purchasing Options window. Once all shipments for a given line are
received and invoiced within these tolerances, Purchasing automatically closes the line.
Q6. When does a Purchase order get Closure Status 'Closed'?

A: When all lines for a given header are closed, Purchasing automatically closes the document.
Q7. What is the difference between the control actions 'On Hold' and 'Freeze' for a Purchase
order?
A: You can place a Purchase order 'On hold' only at the header level. This unapproves the
purchase order while preventing printing, receiving, invoicing, and future approval until you
remove the hold. You can 'Freeze' only at the header and release level. You freeze a Purchase
order when you want to prevent any future modifications to the Purchase order. When you
freeze a Purchase order, you can still receive and pay for goods you already ordered. If you use a
Requisition template or AutoSource to source requisition lines from a Purchase order line,
Purchasing does not automatically update the corresponding sourcing information when you
freeze a purchase order with which you source requisition lines. If you freeze a purchase order,
you have to update the corresponding information in the Requisition Templates or the
AutoSource Rules window.
Q8. What are the different document statuses/actions used in Oracle Purchasing?
A: This discusses mainly the statuses/actions of a purchase order:
Delete
Before documents are approved, you can delete them or their components from the document
entry window. If you use online requisitions, Purchasing returns all requisitions associated with
your delete action to the requisition pool. You can reassign these unfilled requisitions to other
purchase orders or releases using the AutoCreate Documents window.
Cancel
Purchasing lets you terminate an existing commitment to buy from a supplier by canceling
document headers, lines, shipments, or releases. When you cancel a purchase order entity, you
are unable to receive or pay for cancelled items and services, however, you can pay for all
previously received orders. You also cannot modify a cancelled entity or its components.
FAQS
Final Close
Prevent modifications to or actions against completed documents, lines, and shipments by final
closing them. Final-closed documents are not accessible in the corresponding entry forms, and
you cannot perform the following actions against final-closed entities: Receive, Transfer, Inspect,
Deliver, Correct receipt quantities, Invoice, Return to supplier, or Return to receiving.
You can approve documents that include final-closed entities, but you cannot approve
documents that are final closed at the header level. You can print final-closed documents. Finally,
you can Purge documents that were final closed at the header level before the Last Activity Date
that you specify when you submit Purge.
Freeze
Freeze your purchase orders and releases to prevent changes or additions while maintaining the
ability to receive and match invoices against received shipments. You cannot access frozen
documents in the entry forms.
Hold
Place documents on hold to un-approve them while preventing printing, receiving, invoicing,
and future approval until you remove the hold.
Firm
When you firm an order, Master Scheduling/MRP uses the firm date to create a time fence
within which it will not suggest new planned purchase orders, cancellations, or reschedulein
actions. It continues to suggest rescheduleout actions for orders within the time fence. If
several shipments with different promised or needby dates reference the same item, Master
Scheduling/MRP sets the time fence at the latest of all scheduled dates.
You can firm orders at the document header or shipment level. If you firm at the header level,
Purchasing applies this control to every shipment on the document.
Close
Purchasing automatically closes shipments for receiving and invoicing based on controls that you
specify in the Purchasing Options window. Once all shipments for a given line are closed,
Purchasing automatically closes the line. When all lines for a given header are closed, Purchasing
automatically closes the document.
Close for Receiving
The Receipt Close Tolerance lets you specify a quantity percentage within which Purchasing
closes a partially received shipment. For example, if your Receipt Close Tolerance is 5% and you
receive 96% of an expected shipment, Purchasing automatically closes this shipment for
receiving.
The Receipt Close Point lets you choose which receiving action (Received, Accepted, or
Delivered) you want to use as the point when Purchasing closes a shipment for receiving based
on the Receipt Close Tolerance. For example, if you set a Receipt Close Tolerance of 5% and
choose Delivered as your Receipt Close Point, Purchasing closes shipments for receiving when
you have delivered 95% or more of the ordered quantity.
Close for Invoicing
The Invoice Close Tolerance lets you specify a similar quantity percentage within which
Purchasing automatically closes partially invoiced shipments for invoicing.
Open
You can open at the header, line, and shipment levels.
FAQS
Open for Receiving

You can reopen for receiving at the header, line, and shipment level.
Open for Invoicing
You can reopen for invoicing at the header, line, and shipment level.
Unfreeze
You can unfreeze only at the header and release levels.
Q9. Will shipment of a PO be cancelled if these conditions are met?

A: Shipment Checks:
Quantity received >= quantity ordered -> Fully received
Quantity billed >= quantity ordered -> fully billed
Distribution Checks:
Quantity billed > quantity ordered -> over billed
Quantity delivered > quantity ordered -> over delivered
If you partially received a shipment corresponding to multiple distributions, Purchasing cannot
always cancel the shipment. To make sure Purchasing can cancel a shipment, enter the delivery
transactions for the receipts you entered against that shipment. You can use express delivery to
facilitate this process.
No records in receiving interface for this entity being cancelled. The ASN for this entity being
cancelled should be completely received.
Q10. What are need to be tried If USER_EXIT error is raised when 'Canceling'?
A: Regenerate the message file.
Disable all the custom triggers.
Check the quantities whether they are matching with the conditions.
Q11. Why Closed Code is set to 'I' when Cancellation failed with user exit error?
A: When using encumbrance, the funds checker will be called before canceling the document.
Fund checker will change the cancel flag to I. Now the cancellation code will process the
record and change the cancel flag to Y. In our case the fund checker went through fine. But it
failed in the cancellation code.
Q12. Is there anyway I can revert back the document if a Purchase Order/Requisition is
cancelled accidentally?
A: No. The cancellation is a non-reversible process. Once the document is cancelled we cannot
revert it back.
FAQS
Q13. Can I Receive a shipment even when it is "Closed for Receiving"?

A: Yes, it does not prevent you from receiving.
Q14. Can a Closed / Finally Closed Purchase Order be reopened?
A: You can Open a Closed purchase order but you cannot take any control action on Finally
Closed PO.
Q15. Can I match an Invoice against a line even when it is 'Closed for Invoicing'?
A: The Close for Invoicing status does not prevent you from matching an invoice to a purchase
order or to a receipt.
Q16. What are the valid Statuses/Actions for Requisitions?

A: For requisitions, the only available actions are Cancel and Finally Close.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What is the setup needed for using Create Documents workflow?
A: - If you want document creation to be launched online upon requisition approval, then item
Send PO Autocreation to Background in requisition approval process should be set to N.
Otherwise if this attribute is set to Y (default) then the requisition approval process launches
the create document workflow when workflow background process is run. In this case, workflow
background process must be run with parameters: item type PO Requisition Approval and
deferred Yes.
- Sourcing should be set up, so that the requisition gets sourced while creating it.
- If you want Create Document workflow to create the documents, then the Release Method
in ASL attributes should be defined as Release Using AutoCreate.
- In workflow definition for workflow PO Create Documents, the item attribute Is
Automatic Creation Allowed? should be set to Y (Default). Also if attribute Should
Workflow Create the Release? is set to Y (default), then workflow tries to create the
releases.
Q2. Can POs be automatically approved when created by this workflow?

A: In workflow PO Create Documents, set item attribute Is Automatic Approval
Allowed? to Y. By default this attribute is set to N. If you change this attribute to
Y, then upon document creation, PO approval workflow is automatically launched.
Q3. How does the Create Document Workflow decide which buyer to use for the
automatically created documents?
A: Workflow tries to retrieve buyer information in following order:
- Buyer specified on the Requisition Line
- Default buyer from Master Item
- Category
- Buyer of the source document
When creating a release, workflow retrieves the buyers name from the blanket agreement. If
workflow cannot find a buyer, it doesnt create a document
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. How do you generate a PO that includes tax and freight?
A: This is not handled under Purchasing. PO only sets a taxable flag for the item to identify it as a
taxable item which is calculated correctly upon being invoiced. - Accounts Payables handles this.
- Tax codes and freight costs are setup in AP. - Tax code varies by state and freight costs may
vary due to different packing methods, etc. and these costs are summed when invoiced.
Q2. How do you reflect discount from a supplier on a Purchase orders?

A: Purchase order is a legal document, not the quotation. Therefore, the purchase order should
reflect agreed upon price. Secondly if the discount comes after the PO then AP should be able to
handle it while invoicing. If you are using a blanket Purchase order then you can use price
breaks.
Q3. What is 2-way, 3-way, 4-way matching? How is this set-up?

A: 2-way matching verifies that Purchase order and invoice information match within your
tolerances as follows:
Quantity billed <= Quantity Ordered
Invoice price <= Purchase order price
(<= Sign is used because of tolerances)
3-way matching verifies that the receipt and invoice information match with the quantity
tolerances defined:
4-way matching verifies that acceptance documents and invoice information match within the
quantity tolerances defined:
Quantity billed <= Quantity accepted.
(Acceptance is done at the time of Inspecting goods).
Whether a PO shipment has 2-way, 3-way or 4-way matching can be setup in the Shipment
Details zone of the Enter PO form (character)
RECEIPT REQUIRED - INSPECTION REQUIRED - MATCHING
Yes &n Yes 4-way
Yes No 3-way
No No 2-way
In Morealternative region of Shipments block, you define the Invoice Matching option,
where you can choose 2-way, 3-way or 4-way match. You can find more detailed information
about matching in the Oracle Payables Reference Manual (Volume 3) ical Essay on Integrating
your Payables and Purchasing Information.
Q4. Where are standard notes?
FAQS
A: In 11.x, notes are replaced by attachments. Go to Setup -> Attachments -> Create attachment.
Go to Purchase Order and attach the attachment to the Purchase Order.
Q5. What is the difference between the agreed amount and the amount limit fields while
entering a contract purchase agreement and issues related to these fields?
A:1. The agreed amount field at the header level is copied to the amount limit in the terms and
conditions block. This is also the amount that is printed on the blanket agreement and represents
the contract amount between you and the vendor.
2. The amount limit field will restrict the cumulative releases applied to this purchase agreement
from exceeding the specified dollar amount entered here. The value of this field must be equal to
or greater than the agreed amount field. This column is used for release approval amount
validation. If the total cumulative releases exceed this amount approval will fail. The purpose of
this field is to allow user to set a higher approval amount limit than the amount agreed.
Q6. You are unable to view the PO from the Invoice Match window. It gives an error: APP14122: NO RECORDS MEET YOUR SEARCH CRITERIA.
A: This could happen if the document security setup of PO does not allow this user to access the
PO. - You need to ensure that user is set to Buyer in the Purchase Order, or - You need to alter the
setup (Security Level) to Public.
Q7. What is the difference between PO_LINE_ID and LINE_NUM in the table
PO_LINES_ALL?
A: PO_LINE_ID is the unique system generated line number invisible to the user. LINE_NUM is
the number of the line on the Purchase Order.
Q8. What's the difference between the due date and close date on the RFQ?
A: Enter the Due Date when you want your suppliers to reply. Purchasing prints the reply due
date on the RFQ. Purchasing notifies you if the current date is between the RFQ reply due date
and the close date and if the RFQ is Active. Purchasing knows that a supplier replied to an RFQ if
you enter a quotation for this supplier referencing the RFQ. Enter the Close Date for the RFQ.
Purchasing prints the close date on the RFQ. Purchasing notifies you if the current date is
between the RFQ reply due date and the close date and if the RFQ is Active. Purchasing warns
you when you enter a quotation against this RFQ after the close date.
Q9. When does a Purchase Order line get the closure status of 'Closed for Receiving'?
FAQS
A: Purchasing automatically closes shipments for receiving and invoicing based on controls that
you specify in the Purchasing Options window. Once all shipments for a given line are closed,
Purchasing automatically closes the line.
Q10. When does a Purchase order get the status of 'Closed'?
A: When all lines for a given header are closed, Purchasing automatically closes the document.
Q11. What is the use of list price and market price on Purchase Order?
A: If you have entered an item, Purchasing displays the list price for the item. You can accept the
default list price or change it. You can use this field to help evaluate your buyers. Purchasing
uses the list price you enter here in the savings analysis reports. Savings Analysis Report (By
Buyer) and Savings Analysis Report (By Category). If you enter an item, Purchasing displays the
market price for the item. Use this field to help evaluate your buyers. Purchasing uses the price
you enter here in the savings analysis reports if you do not provide a value in the List Price field.
Q12. What is the significance of the fields 'Allow Price override' and 'Price limit'?
A: For planned purchase orders and blanket purchase agreements only, check Allow Price
Override to indicate that the release price can be greater than the price on the purchase
agreement line. If you allow a price override, the release price cannot exceed the Price Limit
specified on the line. If you do not allow a price override, the release price cannot exceed the Unit
Price. You cannot enter this field if the line type is amount based. If you allow price override,
enter the Price Limit. This is the maximum price per item you allow for the item on this
agreement line.
Q13. What is the difference between the control actions 'On Hold' and 'Freeze' for a Purchase
order?
A: You can place a Purchase order 'On hold' only at the header level. This un-approves the
purchases order while preventing printing, receiving, invoicing, and future approval until you
remove the hold. You can 'Freeze' only at the header and release level. You freeze a Purchase
order when you want to prevent any future modifications to the Purchase order. When you
freeze a Purchase order, you can still receive and pay for goods you already ordered.
Q14. What is the difference between the Field 'Firm' in the 'Terms and Conditions' window
and in the alternate region 'more' in the PO shipments?
A: The Field 'Firm' in the 'Terms and Conditions' indicates that the Purchase order is firm. Firm
FAQS
your purchase order when you want to indicate to Master Scheduling/MRP or your
manufacturing application that it should not reschedule this purchase order. The Field 'Firm' in
the alternate region 'more' in the PO shipments indicates that the Purchase order shipment is
firm. Firm your purchase order shipment when you want to indicate to Master Scheduling/MRP
or your manufacturing application that it should not reschedule this purchase order shipment.
Q15. Unable to open the Purchase Orders form due to error: You are not setup as an employee.
A: The error is referring to the Buyer form setup in the Purchasing module. The employee setup
might state that they hold a Buyer position or job. However, in order to access the Purchase
Orders or Autocreate form you must define the employee in the Buyer form
(Setup/Personnel/Buyers). Also, ensure the employee name is defined in the employee's login
information (System administrator/Security/User/Define)
Q16. How do I change the Supplier on a saved or approved PO?

A: The system does not allow Supplier update on a saved or approved PO. You will need to
cancel the PO and create a new PO with the correct Supplier.
Q17. I have accidentally cancelled a PO.
A: The System asks for your confirmation before canceling a PO. Canceling is not a reversible
process. You cannot retrieve back a cancelled PO.
Q18. Can I setup a different Purchase Order type default for the PO form?
A: The Purchase Orders form always defaults a PO type of 'Standard Purchase Order', and there
is no setup, which can change this. Although the default value cannot be changed, the user can
overwrite the defaulted type once the Enter PO form is opened.
Q19. The Item is setup in the item master but is missing from the item List of Values.
A: You should check the Financial Options setup and ensure in the alternate region zone
Supplier-Purchasing that you have in the Inventory Org the correct organization. The majority of
Oracle customers have this set to their Item Master for the best results. Selecting another
organization limits items and related activity to that specific org. With the broad selection of item
master the client will have greater functionality across multiple organizations.
Q20. How do you change the unit price on a PO line once the line has been received or
invoiced?
FAQS
A: Oracle Purchasing will not allow unit price update on Inventory line items when the line is
received or billed because accounting transactions have already taken place. The difference
between the PO price and invoice price will be recorded in the Invoice Price Variance Account,
which will show up on the Invoice Price Variance report. If you have mistakenly entered the
incorrect price on the PO, then you can workaround this by canceling or backing out the invoice
and processing a return on the receipt, which will allow unit price update.
Q21. Can the original Purchase Order can be viewed in any way, for a revised Purchase Order?
A: The original version of a revised PO cannot be viewed from the PO form or PO summary
form. Information on the original PO is stored in the PO_HEADERS_ARCHIVE and
PO_LINES_ARCHIVE tables, and can be obtained through SQL, using the PO_HEADER_ID
column as a common reference.
Q22. Where is the automatic numbering for Purchase Orders defined and maintained?
A: It is defined in Purchasing Options window. The navigation is:
Setup/Organizations/Purchasing Options, Numbering alternate region.
Q23. Why is my Purchase Order closing before a receipt is processed?

A: Check the Receipt Closed Tolerance and the Matching setup. If Matching is set to equal 2-way,
the PO will close once the Purchase Order is approved. If the line of the Purchase Order is
received within the tolerance the line will close.
Q24. Create a Purchase Order. Input the Header and Line information and find that the
Shipments button at the bottom of the form is grayed out.
A: Setup the Receiving Options to enable the Shipment Button in the Purchase Order form.
Navigation: Setup --> Organizations --> Receiving Options. Once set-up these options for your
Organization you will have the Shipments button enabled. Ensure that the Purchasing Options
and Financial Options are defined for your Organization.
Q25. Accessing the Purchase Order entry screen and getting the error: APP-14142
GET_WINDOW_ORG_SOB 040 ORA-1403 No Data Found.
A: Attach the correct Operating Unit to the responsibility B. Define Purchasing Options C. Define
Financial Options.
FAQS
Q26. When I enter a new PO, the Preparer is always defaulted as the buyer. Why am I unable
to change it?
A: Uncheck the check box 'Enforce Buyer Name in the Purchasing Options. Setup ->Organization
-> Purchasing Options (Alternative region 'Control')
Q27. Why is there no category displayed or list of values for the category field in the purchase
order you are creating?
A: You must also create category codes for your items. Then create a Category set for Purchasing
controlled at the master level. Assign your items to a category code and the Purchasing category
set you have created. Confirm that in Default Category Sets the Purchasing application points to
the Purchasing Category set. This will populate the category and description when the item
number is selected at the PO line level.
Q28. I have enabled PO_LINES DFF with a context field capital_expense_flag as reference. I
now receive APP-FND-00676 error in Enter Quotations form.
A: This DFF is based on PO_LINES_ALL table. The Quotation lines as well as the PO lines share
this table as the base, as well as share the same DFF. Field capital_expense_flag is not present in
Quotations form. Therefore you may not use this field as the reference field for PO Lines DFF.
Other fields which you may not use include: Inspection_Required_Flag,
Item_Class_Lookup_Code, List_Price_Per_Unit, Negotiated_By_Preparer_Flag, Reference_Num,
Taxable_Flag
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What does the Account Generator process do?
A: The Account Generator process builds charge, budget, accrual, and variance accounts for each
purchase order, release, and requisition distribution based on the distributions destination type.
It is a synchronous Workflow process.
Q2. What are the Pre-requisites to use Account Generator?

A: Before using the Account Generator you must:
- Define your Accounting flexfield structure for each set of books.
- Define flexfield segment values and validation rules.
- Set up Oracle Workflow.
- Decide whether you want to use the Account Generator processes as seeded in Oracle
Purchasing, or you need to customize them to meet your accounting needs.
Q3. What are the workflow item types used in Account Generator?
A: For Purchase Orders: POWFPOAG
For Requisitions: POWFRQAG
Each Account Generator item type contains the following -level workflow processes:
Generate Default Account
Generate Account Using Flex Builder Rules
If you are upgrading from 10.7, and you have been using the flex builder to generate the
accounts, you have an option of upgrading your existing flex builder rules to Account Generator.
In which case, you should use the Generate Account Using Flex Builder Rules process.
Q4. I have been using the Flex builder rules in Release 10.7 to build the accounts. Can I
continue using the same setup in account generator in 11.x also?
A: Yes. The same setup can be used with account generator also. To achieve this, the following
actions should be performed on up gradation to account generator.
- Run the program in $FND_/bin/FNDFBPLS. This will create a PL/SQL package that will
contain all the flex builder rules.
- Apply the newly created PL/SQL file to the database. This will create a package called
PO_PO_CHARGE_ACCOUNT /
PO_REQ_CHARGE_ACCOUNT
- Verify that the package is created successfully and that it is valid in database.
- Choose the Account Generator level process as Generate Account Using Flex Builder.
- Test the account generator.
FAQS
Q5. The flex builder rules package PO_PO_CHARGE_ACCOUNT is being overwritten

whenever I apply a family pack. Why?
A: The family pack will contain POXWFB1S.pls and POXWFB1B.pls, which contains a blank
definition of the PO_PO_CHARGE_ACCOUNT for compilation purpose. This will override the
already existing PO_PO_CHARGE_ACCOUNT
package created from flex builder rules. So the Client must take a backup of the Flex builder rules
package before applying the patch, and revert back the package PO_PO_CHARGE_ACCOUNT
using that file.
Q6. What are the steps to generate the WFSTAT output for Account Generator?
A: 1. Set the following profiles:
- Account Generator: Run in Debug Mode=> Yes
- Account Generator: Purge Runtime Data=> No
PO: Set Debug Workflow On => Yes
2. Make sure that the concurrent program "Purge Workflow Obsolete Runtime Data" is NOT
running.
3. Open Purchase Order/Requisitions form, go to the distributions window, enter necessary
fields and click on charge account field to start generating the charge account. After the account
generator has done building the account, or errors out, do the following from the toolbar (DO
NOT exit the form or navigate to any other block or record, otherwise this information would be
lost):
Help=> Diagnostics => Examine
Enter in 1st field => parameter
Enter in 2nd field => charge_acc_wf_itemkey
Then tab out. The Item key will appear in the third field.
4. Now save the purchase order/requisition. If you are not able to save, then clear the
distribution record and navigate back to the shipment window and save the form. Saving the
form is must, because a commit is required to save the workflow information in tables, for
generating the wfstat output.
5. If step#3 could not give you an item key, then use the following query to identify the relevant
item key:
Select item_key, item_type, begin_date
from wf_items
where item_type = '&item_type'
order by begin_date desc;
For PO, use 'POWFPOAG' item type in above query, and for requisition, use 'POWFRQAG'.
6. To generate the WFSTAT output,
Run the sql in $FND_/sql/wfstat.sql with above item_type and item_key. Spool the output.
7. To get the wf debug information, run the following query:
SELECT item_key, item_type, debug_message
FROM po_wf_debug
WHERE item_key = '&Item_key'
FAQS
ORDER BY execution sequence;
Q7. What exactly does profile option "Account Generator: Run in Debug Mode" do?
A: This profile option controls whether the account generator workflow process runs in
synchronous mode (workflow-on-a-fly) or asynchronous/persistent mode (save the runtime
data).
When this profile is NULL or "No", the workflow runs in synchronous mode and it will NOT
store any runtime data in database. So you cannot generate the wfstat etc for debug purposes.
However once you set this profile option to "Yes", then the process would run in persistent mode,
thereby the runtime data would be stored in database. Now you can generate the wfstat etc.
Q8. Will the account generator build the charge account based on project information?
A: No. By default, the Account Generator process as seeded in Oracle Purchasing would not
consider the project information to build the account. To achieve this functionality, you should
customize the Account Generator to consider the project details. There is a dummy sub process
'Build Project Related Account' seeded in the Account Generator workflow, available for
customization. You would also have to modify function
PO_WF_PO_CHARGE_ACC.IS_PO_PROJECT_RELATED to return a value of "True".
For more information on how to customize the Account Generator, please refer to the manual
Oracle Purchasing Account Generator Workflow Customization Example.
Q9. Will the account be generated for amount based/one time item lines?
A: No the Account will not be generated if you are using the Account Generator as seeded in
Oracle Purchasing. Either the account should be manually entered or the account generator
should be customized.
Q10. When the charge account field is non updateable?

A: In the following cases the charge account field is not updateable:
1. If the destination type code is INVENTORY or SHOP FLOOR.
2. If the distribution is already encumbered.
3. If the PO is created from a encumbered Requisition
4. If the destination type code is Expense and
If the project is entered and the profile option PA_ALLOW_FLEXBUILDER_OVERRIDES is set to
NO
If the expense accrual code= RECEIPT
FAQS
Q11. If the account generator process raises a blank error message, what does it mean?
A: Check the invalid objects in the database. Recompile the invalid objects.
FAQ Details
Q1. What should I do if the Purchase Document Open Interface (PDOI) process fails?
A: The first thing is to check for the error message and examine description from the
po_interface_errors table for the given interface_header_id. The description would be self
explanatory. Accordingly check for the data in the po_headers_interface, po_lines_interface
tables and correct them and run the PDOI again with the corrected data.
Q2. How do I to get the log file for the PDOI run?
A: To get the log file for the PDOI set the following profile option to Yes : PO: Write server
output to file.
Q3. How to view/purge and correct the errors tables?

A: To view the errors run the following Report:
Purchasing interface open report.
To Purge the error table run the following Report:
Purge purchasing open interface processed data report.
Q4. What do I do when POs are not being picked up by PDOI and these records remain in
pending status?
A: Check if the client is a single org instance. If you are using single org instance then you are not
supposed to populate the org_id in the interface tables. Org_id should be null for a single org
implementation.
Q5. How should I populate the project and task information in PDOI?
A: The point to be noted here is that always populate project name and task name into the project
and task column of po_headers_interface table instead of project number and task number. Based
on project name and task name PDOI derives the project_id and task_id and inserts in the
po_distributions table.
Q6. What should I do if PDOI errors out with "po_pdoi_invalid_dest_type destination type
(value = expense) is not valid" for expense items?
FAQS
A: This Error can arise out of following situation:

1. Validation of destination organization id fails.
2. Validation of destination type code fails.
3. Item_id is NULL and destination_type_code is INVENTORY.
4. Validation of destination subinventory fails.
5. Destination_type_code in ('SHOP FLOOR','EXPENSE') and destination_subinventory is not
null.
6. Validation of destination organization id fails.
Q7. How and when are the Blanket effective dates updated though PDOI?
A: If you are using the UPDATE action code then PDOI only VALIDATES the line level info. If
you want to update headers then use REPLACE instead of UPDATE. By using UPDATE you can
only update some columns at the PO lines level as mentioned in the users guide.
Q8. What should I do if PDOI errors out with "ship to organization id (value=769) specified is
inactive or invalid" when creating new items on the fly?
A: This has been taken upon as an enhancement. Previously we were not creating an item for the
destination/ship_to_org in the PDOI run. But as part of the enhancement 2064961 now we create
items for the ship_to_org also.
Q9. Why are supply records are not created for standard purchase orders?
A: Supply records are created in mtl_supply while approving the PO and since prior to
Procurement family pack G, we were not supporting approved standard purchase orders we
were not creating the supply records.
Q10. Can you update documents via PDOI which were created manually?
A: No. Please check the enhancement 2128450.
Q11. When using encumbrance accounting I want the funds to be reserved and encumbrance
entries created in gl_bc_packets?
A: The functionality is part of Procurement Family Pack G or Release 11.5.7.
Q12. Why does PDOI error out with "ora-00001 unique constraint violation in po_headers_u2"?
FAQS
A: Though this issue may occur rarely but it can and its explained below:
The document number is generated at the end of the PDOI process before commit and updated
in the po_headers table. When the PDOI process starts, po_headers table is updated with
poi_temp_po_b679535 value in segment1 and then later after headers and lines are processed
document_number is generated and the po_headers is updated with that. Assume for any reason
on account of an incomplete transaction there is a record in po_headers table with
poi_temp_po_b679535 value in segment1 then PDOI would fail with the above error message. So
just check for a record in po_headers table with poi_temp_po_b679535 value of the segment1 for
this error.
Q13. What should I do when PDOI creates approved standard purchase orders but no charge
account is being generated?
A: We do not support importing approved standard purchase orders. But in the Procurement
Family Pack G onwards this feature has been added.
Q14. How do we debug when PDOI does not create any Pos?
A: Two methods can be employed:
1. Before running the PDOI program, set the profile option PO :Write server output to file to
'Yes' and then you can view the log file thus generated while running the PDOI.
2. After the PDOI is run, run the report 'Purchasing interface error report' to debug what is the
exact error.
Q15. I had submitted the PDOI conc. request for updating the unit_price of a blanket purchase
agreement line with an action of "UPDATE". PDOI instead of updating the line, has created a
new line with new price. Every updated line is being created multiple times. How can this be
avoided?
A: This might be because the line you are trying to update is already expired. PDOI creates
another line with the updated information if the line which is getting updated is already expired.
Q16. How is data deleted from the interface tables after it has been loaded?
A: After successful creation of data through PDOI, the process_code in the interface tables will be
set to 'Accepted'. If the Customer wants to delete this interface data which is used no more then
they need to run the concurrent request 'Purge purchasing interface processed data'.
Q17. Is there an example script to load new blanket, new item and new sourcing rule?

A: Yes. Please see the script below:
insert into po_headers_interface
(interface_header_id,
action,
org_id,
document_type_code,
vendor_id,
vendor_site_code,
vendor_site_id,
effective_date,
expiration_date,
Vendor_doc_num,
load_sourcing_rules_flag)
values
(po_headers_interface_s.nextval,
'ORIGINAL',
204,
'BLANKET',
21,
'SANTA CLARA',
41,
'01-JAN-2001',
'01-JAN-2002',
'VENDOR02',
'Y');
insert into po_lines_interface
(interface_line_id,
interface_header_id,
action,
item,
item_description,
unit_price,
unit_of_measure,
effective_date,
expiration_date,
template_name,
sourcing_rule_name)
values
(po_lines_interface_s.nextval,
po_headers_interface_s.currval,
'ORIGINAL',
'BB54888',
'BB54888 Description',
10,
FAQS
FAQS
'Each',
'01-JAN-2001',
'01-JAN-2002',
'Purchased Item',
'Sourcing Rule BB54888');
Q18. I had loaded all the data into the interface tables and with process_code as 'PENDING'. I
run the PDOI program, but data is not getting picked up by PDOI. The records remain in
status 'PENDING' in the interface tables. What do I do?
A: Check whether client is single org. If they are single org, then they should not populate org_id
into the interface tables. make the org_id null in the interface tables and re-run PDOI.
Q19. I want to update header of a document. Is it possible via PDOI?

A: No. It is not possible to update header information but only line information can be updated
from PDOI. you can use 'Replace' option to replace the entire document in this case.
Q20. I am trying to update item description through PDOI. The program is updating the item
description at the line level but is not updating the same at item master.
A: This is desired functionality of PDOI. PDOI will only update the item description at the line
level and not at item master.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What is Receiving functionality?
A: Receipt of goods from vendors/suppliers, internal organizations and customers originating
from procurement activities and documents including but not limited to purchase orders,
releases, internal requisitions, Return Material Authorizations and intransit shipments
Q2. What are the different Source Types supported?

A: Internal Orders - An internal sales order sourced from Inventory.
These are generated from internal requisitions:
Inventory - A transfer within inventory
Vendor - A purchase Order/releases from a vendor
Q3. What are the different Destination Types used?

A: Multiple - One shipment has more than one distributions.
When choosing receiving routing = Direct Receipt or Substitute Direct, you need to click the "+"
sign on the receipt line to open the distributions, then do the receipt and delivery.
Receiving - When choosing receiving routing = Standard Receipt or Substitute Standard,
destination type = Receiving. The Goods are only received to Receiving dock, Not Expense or
Inventory destination. Delivery is not performed.
Expense - The goods are delivered directly to the requestor and expensed out of inventory.
Inventory - The goods are received directly into inventory upon delivery.
Destination organization and subinventory are required.
The locator or serial numbers are required if the item is locator controlled or serial controlled.
Shop floor - The goods are received from an outside processing operation defined by Oracle
Work in Process.
Q4. What can Receiving Routing be used for and how does it default?
A: Direct Delivery - Perform Receive and Delivery on Receipts Screen at the same time.
3-way matching.
Standard Receipt - Perform Receive on Receipts screen.
Perform Delivery on Receiving Transactions screen.
3-way matching.
Inspection Required - The inspection is required after Receiving and before Delivery.
4-way matching.
FAQS
You can override the Receiving Routing on the Receipts screen only if the Profile RCV: Allow
Routing Override is set to 'Yes'.
The Receiving Routing on the receipts screen is defaulted as follows:
1. Purchase Order shipment
2. if 1 is null, then Item Attribute
3. if 2 is null, then Vendor Attribute
4. if 3 is null, then Receiving Option
Q5. What Receiving Mode will be used?

A: This is determined by the value from Personal Profile RCV: Processing Mode
On-Line - Receiving Transaction Manager processes the receipts just after you save the receipt.
Immediate - After you save the receipt, the receipt records are inserted into
rcv_transactions_interface.
The System will run the Receiving Transaction Processor to process the records in the
rcv_transacitons_interface as background process. The user can do other things while the process
is running.
Batch - Receipt records are inserted into rcv_transactions_interface.
The user needs to manually to run the Receiving Transaction Processor as concurrent request to
process the records in
the rcv_transacitons_interface.
Q6. How many Transaction Types exist?
A: Receive - Receive the items into Receiving Dock.
Deliver - Deliver the items into expense or inventory destination.
Return to Vendor - Return the received items directly to vendors.
Return to Receiving - Return the delivered items to Receiving Dock or inspection.
Accept - Accept items following an inspection.
Reject - Reject items following an inspection.
Transfer - Transfer items between locations.
Correct - Enter a positive or negative adjustment to a receiving or delivery transaction.
Match - Match unordered receipts to purchase orders.
Unordered - Receive items without purchase orders
Q7. How does Receipt Close Point work?
FAQS
A: Navigate: Define Purchase Option -> Control Options -> Receipt Close Point
There are three choices:
Accepted - Oracle Purchasing closes the shipment for receiving when you record the shipment as
being fully accepted.
Delivered - Oracle Purchasing closes the shipment for receiving when you record the shipment as
being fully delivered.
Received - Oracle Purchasing closes the shipment for receiving when you record the shipment as
being fully received.
Oracle Purchasing displays this option as the default.
You also need to set the receipt close tolerance percentage in the Default Options Region. Choose
one of the above values for the receipt close point.
Q8. Why isn't my PO found when I Query for it on the Receipt form?
A: Please check the following:
1. Query the PO from the Purchase Order form and note the Organization on the Shipment.
Ensure you are using the same Organization on the Receipt form.
2. On the Receipt form, select the checkbox for 'Include closed POs' then requery the PO.
Q9. After completing the Receipt (Navigate - Receiving - Receipts), why can't I find the receipt
in the Receiving Transaction Summary?
A: 1. From Transaction Status Summary query for the Receipt Number or PO number and check
to see if the transactions have been stuck in the interface (Status=Pending).
2. If using RCV: Process mode = Batch, make sure to run the Receiving Transaction Processor.
3. If using RCV: Process mode = Batch or Immediate...go to Concurrent Request screen...check to
see if the concurrent process = Receiving Transaction Processor is finished.
Q10. What is Receiving Transaction Manager RCVOLTM?

A: RCVOLTM is the executable that runs the Online Receiving Transactions.
The Executable is stored in the server ($PO_/bin)
You can check the versions by the following command:
cd $PO_/bin
strings -a RCVOLTM|grep -i '$header: rv'
FAQS
Q11. How many processes are needed for the Receiving Transaction Manager?
A: In most cases, there are 3 processes. If you are in multi-org environment, then you need at
least one for each operating unit.
Ensure that there are at the same number of actual and target processes.
Q12. What happens if Receiving Transaction Manager fails using on-line mode?
A: If the RCVOLTM fails, you will get the error message on the screen.
There should be nothing stuck in the RCV_TRANACTIONS_INTERFACE. However, the header
information inserted into the RCV_SHIPMENT_HEADERS table will not rollback or be deleted.
This process is followed to ensure that there is no break to the sequence of receipt numbers that
have been generated when a header transaction was inserted.
Potential workaround for failed receipts:
Where there are headers without shipment lines, due to RCVOLTM failure, users can query the
receipt number in the Enter Receipts form, and perform an 'Add to' receipt, to re-process the
failed lines.
Q13. What are the typical causes of RCVOLTM failure?

A: 1. Receiving transaction managers may not be up and running.
Use the Administer Concurrent Manager form to check if Receiving Transaction Manager is
Active, and make sure the Actual and Target process > 0
2. An SQL error has occurred due to insufficient tablespace, etc. Please check the Alert log.
3. Make sure Inventory Manager is running if receiving against inventory items.
Q14. How does RCVOLTM work in a Multi-org environment?

A: Since release 11 and 11i, there is only one DATA GROUP = apps schema and one installation
for multiple operating units. We do not need to define multiple Receiving Managers for different
operating unit. One Receiving Manager typically is sufficient.
Q15. What are the differences between Batch, Immediate and on-line mode?
A: Three choices on Profile RCV: Processing Mode:
Immediate
Batch
On-line
Immediate: the form will start running Receiving Transaction Processor as a background process.
FAQS
The system will not hold the screen and the user can do something else. Uses Receiving
Transaction Processor (RVCTP). This essentially can be thought of as an immediate execution of
the batch process hence the term "Immediate"
On-line: The user will not be able to perform any other application activities until the process
completes. Uses Receiving
Transaction Manager (RCVOLTM). This is an online process that will return any encountered
errors to the user online while the process is running.
Batch: Control is returned to the User immediately so other application activities may be
performed. The transaction will be processed by running Concurrent Program Receiving
Transaction Processor (RVCTP). Typically, Customers will run this program periodically based
on their processing and system requirements. This process is or can be run as a batch process on
the server or it can be manually run by submitting from the concurrent process screen. All
records in the interface under the batch process will be transacted.
Note: Beginning with Release 11, Trace Mode can be set for the Concurrent Program for the
debug purpose:
System Administrator Responsibility -> Concurrent -> Program -> Define
Query for Receiving Transaction Processor and select Enable Trace checkbox. To create a trace
file, set Personal Profile RCV: Processing Mode to Batch, perform a Receipt then run Concurrent
Program Receiving Transaction Processor.
Q16. What are the major receiving tables involved?
A: RCV_SHIPMENT_HEADERS
RCV_SHIPMENT_LINES
RCV_TRANSACTIONS
RCV_RECEIVING_SUB_LEDGER
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What is the order of defaulting of the Receipt Routing on the receipts screen which may
be set at various levels?
A: For Inter-Org Shipments (In-Transit Receipts) the Receipt Routing is defaulted as follows:
1. Item Attribute
2. if 1 is null, then Shipping Network for the Receiving Organization
Q2. What are the different types of Inter-Organization Transfers?

A: Inter-Organization transfers can be performed as either direct or intransit shipments.
Direct inter-organization transfers: Inventory is moved directly from a shipping organization to
the destination organization. Inter organization transfers using intransit inventory: Usually done
when transfer time is significant. Delivery location isn't specified during transfer transaction, You
only need to enter subinventory you are shipping from, a shipment number, the freight
information and inter-organization transfer charge. Then you need to perform Receipt from the
Receiving forms.
Q3. What are the minimum setups required for Items which we use for Internal Sales Order?
A: The items which we use for Internal Sales Order must be Inventory enabled, internally
orderable and stockable, shippable, and Order Management transactable for the source
organizations. Under Inventory, you need to select the Inventory Item, Transactable, and
Stockable options. Under Order Management, you need to select the Internal Ordered, Internal
Orders Enabled, OE Transactable, and Shippable options.
Q4. How do we define the Inter-Organization Shipping Network?
A: Use the Shipping Networks window to define your inter?organization network. You must
enable the network between each source (shipping) and destination (receiving) organization.
-Select Internal Order Required if you want all transfers between these two organizations to use
internal orders.
-Specify whether you ship material directly, or use intransit inventory for shipments between
these two organizations.
-For intransit transfers, you can choose from the following primary receipt routings: Standard
receipt, Inspection required, or Direct delivery.
Q5. What are the steps to perform Inter-Organization Transfer?

A: Follow these 3 simple steps:
FAQS
1. Setup Shipping Network: This information describes the relationships and accounting
information that exists between a from (shipping) organization and a to (distribution)
organization.
Navigation path:
A. Choose the Inventory Manager responsibility.
B. Setup/Organizations - Make sure that there is an entry for from/to organization (between the
organizations you intend to perform the transfer). When you click on this form, you will get a
LOV with orgs.
-Choose the From Org.
-Transfer Type can be either Intransit or Direct (Direct would ship directly to Inventory, so it
would be a Direct Delivery).
-FOB can be either Receipt or Shipment, if the transfer type is entered as Intransit.
If Receipt the source inventory quantities get updated at time of receipt.
If it be Shipping, then the quantities get updated as soon as the shipment is done.
2. Inventory/Transactions/Interorganization Transfer: When you click on this form, you will get
a LOV with orgs. Choose the from org. Specify the to-org, transfer type as intransit, and input a
value for shipment-number.
Click on the transaction lines button. Input the item, the quantity and the subinventories between
which you want to do the transfer. (Sometimes there might not be enough quantity in the fromorg to do this. For this : Go to: Inventory/Transactions/Miscellaneous Transactions. Specify the
Type as Miscellaneous Receipt. Click on transaction lines button and specify item/quantity).
3. Receive against an Inter-org Transfer: Choose Purchasing Super User responsibility.
Under Purchasing/Receiving/Receipts - Query up against Shipment Number in the find
window. In RCV Transactions block, specify the quantity you want to receive and commit the
transaction.
Q6. What are the steps required for receiving against Internal Sales Order?
A: The process of receiving against Internal Sales Orders involves the following steps:
1. Create an Internally Orderable Item - To do this you need to create an Item and in the Order
Entry attributes, check the Internally Orderable check box.
2. Setup Shipping Network: This information describes the relationships and accounting
information that exists between a from (shipping) organization and a to (distribution)
organization.
Navigation path:
A. Choose the Inventory Manager responsibility.
B. Setup/Organizations - Make sure that there is an entry for from/to organization (between the
organizations you intend to perform the transfer e.g.. GLO -> SAC).
When you click on this form, you will get a LOV with orgs.
FAQS
-Choose the From Org.

-Transfer Type can be either Intransit or Direct (Direct would ship directly to Inventory, so it
would be a Direct Delivery).
-FOB can be either Receipt or Shipment, if the transfer type is entered as Intransit.
If Receipt the source inventory quantities get updated at time of receipt.
If it be Shipping, then the quantities get updated as soon as the shipment is done.
3. Create an Internal Requisition.
-Enter the item you created in step 1.
-Enter the Source and Destination Organization. Source Organization is on the right of the form
and Destination to the left.
-Enter location (e.g.. SACHQ) and Source as Inventory.
-Save and approve requisition.
4. Run the Create Internal Orders concurrent program.
5. Change responsibility to Order Entry Superuser.
6. Run Order Import concurrent program.
7. When the process completes, you will see the Order Number in the log file.
8. If the process errors : "You must enter Tax Code. Tax code attribute is missing" then:
-Change responsibility to AR Manager (Receivables)
-Navigate Setup->Transaction->Transaction Types
-Query up record with Name = "Invoice Hdwe/svcs"
-Uncheck the Tax Calculation check box
-Save
9. Run the Demand Interface concurrent program.
10. Run the Manufacturing Release concurrent program.
11. Navigate to:
-Orders, Returns -> Orders, Returns -> Do a Find on the Order Number
-Click on the View button
-Click on Cycle Status
-Your Order should now be Pick Release Eligible
12. Navigate to Shipping -> Pick Release -> Release Sales Order
-Enter a Batch Name and your Order Number
-Save
-Note the Batch_ID by doing a Help->Tools->Examine.
13. Run the Pick Release concurrent program. Use Batch Name/Order Number as parameter.
FAQS
This can be run from command line as:

./OESREL apps_appdemo/fnd@comp16p 0 Y <Batch ID> (from step L)
Perform Step K. Your Order should now be Ship Confirm Eligible
14. Navigate to Shipping->Confirm Shipments->Pick Slip
-Do a Find on the Order Number
-Click on Open
-Click on details
-Check if all values of quantity to be shipped are correct
-Save
15. Change Responsibility to Purchasing Super User.
Navigate to the Enter Receipts form and query on the Requisition Number.
You can now receive against the Internal Order.
To override the destination type at receipt time you need to set the profile option RCV: Allow
routing override = Yes.
Q7. How are Lot and Serial Numbers handled in Inter-Organization Transfers?
A: When you perform an inter?organization transfer, the source and destination organization
may have different lot/serial controls. Purchasing handles this situation as follows:
1. When the source organization uses controls and the destination organization does not, the
control numbers are recorded as being issued from the source organization. Lot/serial
transactions are recorded for the destination organization.
2. When the source organization does not use controls and the destination organization does, the
transaction is processed normally.
3. When both source and destination organizations use controls, the control numbers are
recorded as being issued from the source organization. These control numbers are tracked to
insure that the same control numbers that were shipped are the ones
that are received. When items are returned from inventory to receiving or to the supplier, only
the control numbers originally recorded for the delivery transaction can be used.
Q8. What's the cause of the error RVTSH-150 and what's the solution for it?
A: Error RVTSH-150 is because the following select is failing, returning 0 rows:
SQL> select ms.unit_of_measure
from mtl_supply ms
where supply_type_code = 'REQ'
and supply_source_id = :req_line_id;
The error is because the Req. Supply missing. This is mostly a data problem caused at customer
site. Look into why the records are missing. May be the data has been manually changed or some
FAQS
cancellations for the req. shipment has taken place.
Q9. What are the main tables involved in Inter-Organization Transfer?

A: A check is carried out to see if the transaction date is in an open period as specified in the
profile option (INV: Transaction Date Validation). The column is acct_period, the table is
ORG_ACCT_PERIODS.
The organizations setting, cost information, etc, are derived from:
ORG_ORGANIZATION_DEFINITIONS, MTL_PARAMETERS, MFG_LOOKUPS,
MTL_INTERORG_PARAMETERS
[HR_ORGANIZATION_INFORMATION - for rel 11I].
The transaction information is derived from MTL_TRX_TYPES_VIEW for inter-org transactions
where transaction_source_type_id=13.
The item information is derived from MTL_SYSTEM_ITEMS [MTL_SYSTEM_ITEMS_B - for rel
11I].
A check is carried out to verify the available item quantity on MTL_DEMAND and
MTL_ONHAND_QUANTITIES [MTL_RESERVATIONS included in rel 11I].
MTL_SUBINVENTORIES_TRK_VAL_V keeps track of the values of the subinventories.
MTL_ITEM_LOCATIONS is searched for the locators specified (if used).
GL_CODE_COMBINATIONS is searched for a valid locator combination (if used).
The cost of the item is gotten from CST_CG_ITEM_COSTS_VIEW.
The transaction is inserted into MTL_MATERIAL_TRANSACTIONS_TEMP table.
If the item is under lot control, lot information is deleted from
MTL_TRANSACTION_LOTS_TEMP, likewise the serial numbers information if the item is
serialized is deleted from MTL_SERIAL_NUMBERS_TEMP, MTL_SERIAL_NUMBERS.
The new lot information is inserted into MTL_TRANSACTION_LOTS_TEMP.
Q10. How can we correct delivered lines in an Internal Requisition?

A: The system allows corrections to internal requisition, but only the receiving lines and not the
delivered lines. Once the internal requisition is delivered, correction is not allowed.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What is the Receiving Transaction Processor, how do I launch it and what is the meaning
of the various modes?
A: The Receiving Transaction Processor processes pending or unprocessed receiving
transactions. How the Receiving Transaction Processor handles these transactions depends on
the processing mode, which is a profile option (RCV: Processing Mode) that you can set at the
site, application, responsibility, and user levels. The debug log file can be generated if profile
RCV: Debug Mode is set to Yes. However the log file will be generated only if the Processing
Mode is Immediate or Batch.
In On-line processing mode, Purchasing calls the Receiving Transaction Processor when you save
your work.
In Immediate processing mode, when you save your work, the receiving forms call the Receiving
Transaction Processor for the group of transactions you have entered since you last saved your
work. Note that this is a specific group of transactions. Transactions belonging to other groups
(for example, those entered by another user in Batch processing mode) are not included.
In Batch processing mode, the receiving forms insert transaction information into the receiving
interface tables. These transactions remain in the interface table until you run the Receiving
Transaction Processor. The receiving forms take into account all pending transactions, but
Purchasing does not update the transaction history, source documents, and supply information
until the transactions are processed. You can set Standard Report Submission parameters to run
the Receiving Transaction Processor at specified intervals so that your pending transactions are
processed as often as required.
The Receiving Transaction Processor performs the following functions:
. validates Advance Shipment Notice (ASN) and Advance Shipment and Billing and Notice
(ASBN) information in the receiving open interface
. derives and defaults values into the receiving interface tables (For example, if a particular value
or field is not received, the receiving open interface tries to derive the value using defaulting and
derivation rules.)
. creates receipt headers for intransit shipments
. creates receipt lines for all receipts
. maintains transaction history information
. maintains lot and serial transaction history
. accrues uninvoiced receipt liabilities
. maintains the following purchase order quantities: quantity received, quantity delivered,
quantity accepted, and quantity rejected
. closes purchase orders for receiving
. maintains the following requisition quantities: quantity received, quantity delivered
. maintains supply information
. maintains inventory information (for Inventory destination type)
. maintains outside processing information (for Shop Floor destination type)
FAQS
To run the Receiving Transaction Processor :

1. Navigate to the Submit Requests window.
2. Select Requests in the first field.
3. Select Receiving Transaction Processor in the Name field.
4. Choose Submit to begin the process.
Q2. Which tables are populated when we create a Standard receipt against a PO before the
Receiving Transaction Processor is invoked?
A: Records are inserted into rcv_transactions_interface with processing_status_code and
transaction_status_code as 'PENDING' and transaction_type of 'RECEIVE'. Records are also
inserted into rcv_shipment_headers which creates the shipment header.
Q3. Why can't I find the receipt in the Receiving Transaction Summary even after completing
the Receipt (Receiving -> Receipts)?
A: a) From Transaction Status Summary query for the Receipt Number or PO Number and check
b) If using RCV: Processing Mode = Batch, make sure to run the Receiving Transaction Processor.
c) If using RCV: Processing Mode = Batch or Immediate...go to Concurrent Request screen...check
to see if the concurrent
process = Receiving Transaction Processor has completed.
d)If the RCV: Processing Mode is Online or Immediate and records are fetched in the Transaction
Status Summary form in
PENDING or ERROR status, these can be deleted from the form and the receiving transaction
done again.
Q4. How many processes are needed for the Receiving Transaction Manager?
A: In most cases, there are 3 processes. If you are in multi-org environment, then you need at
least one for each operating unit.
Q5. What is Receiving Transaction Manager RCVOLTM?

A:RCVOLTM is the executable that runs the Online Receiving Transactions. The Executable is
stored in the server ($PO_/bin).
You can check the versions by the following command:
cd $PO_/bin
strings -a RCVOLTM | grep -i '$Header: rv'
FAQS
Q6. What happens if Receiving Transaction Manager fails using on-line mode?
A: If the RCVOLTM fails, you will get the error message on the screen. There should be nothing
stuck in the RCV_TRANACTIONS_INTERFACE.
However, the header information inserted into the RCV_SHIPMENT_HEADERS table will not
rollback or be deleted. This process is followed to ensure that there is no break to the sequence of
receipt numbers that have been generated when a header transaction was inserted.
Potential workaround for failed receipts: Where there are headers without shipment lines, due to
RCVOLTM failure, users can query the receipt number in the Enter Receipts form, and perform
an 'Add to' receipt, to re-process the failed lines.
Q7. Why do we get TIMEOUT error while Receiving in On-line mode?

A: In on-line mode we launch a concurrent program (RCVOLTM) and wait for its completion
before the control returns to the user. The time allotted is 60 seconds (hard coded) and if the
program does not complete in 60 seconds, AOL raises "Timeout" error.
($PO_/resource/RCVCOTRX.pld). This occurs mainly as the process cannot complete within
60secs due to huge processing size of the receiving transaction or heavy load on the CPU.
Q8. What are the typical causes of RCVOLTM failure?
A: a) Receiving transaction managers may not be up and running.
Use the Administer Concurrent Manager form to check if Receiving Transaction Manager is
Active and make sure the Actual and Target process > 0.
b) A SQL error has occurred due to insufficient tablespace, etc. Please check the Alert log.
c) Make sure Inventory Manager is running if receiving against inventory items.
Q9. How does RCVOLTM work in a Multi-org environment?

A: Since release 11 and 11i, there is only one DATA GROUP = apps schema and one installation
for multiple operating units. We do not need to define multiple Receiving Managers for different
operating unit. One Receiving Manager is good enough.
Q10. What is the cause of the following error?

A: "APP-FND-00204 Concurrent Manager encountered an error while running the spawned
concurrent program Receiving Transaction Manager - RCVOLTM for your concurrent request
1180 TM-SVC LOCK HANDLE FAILED."
This would mean that the Receiving Transaction Manager is inactive or terminated.
FAQS
This is the manager used for processing receiving transactions in the Online mode.
Ask your system administrator to activate the Receiving Transaction Manager.
If that does not help you will have to take this up as with the AOL team.
Q11. What are the differences between Batch, Immediate and on-line mode?
A: Three choices on Profile RCV: Processing Mode: Immediate, Batch, On-line
Immediate: The form will start running Receiving Transaction Processor as a background process.
The system will not hold the screen and the user can do something else.
Uses Receiving Transaction Processor (RVCTP).
On-line: The user will not be able to perform any other application activities until the process
completes. Uses Receiving Transaction Manager (RCVOLTM).
Batch: Control is returned to the User immediately so other application activities may be
performed. The transaction will be processed by running Concurrent Program Receiving
Transaction Processor (RVCTP). Typically, Customers will run this program periodically based
on their processing and system requirements.
Q12. How should I get a log file and database trace files for the Receiving Transaction
Processor?
A: To get the database trace file :
Set the profile option PO: Enable Sql Trace for Receiving Processor = Yes.
To get the log file :
Set the profile option RCV: Debug Mode to Yes.
Set the profile option RCV: Processing Mode to either Immediate or Batch.
Debug messages will not be printed to the concurrent log file if the mode is On-line.
Q13. Why is the log file not built even after setting the profile option RCV: Debug Mode =
Yes?
A: The profile option RCV: Debug Mode works only if the profile option RCV: Processing Mode
= Immediate or Batch. Debug messages will not be printed to the concurrent log file if the mode
is On-line.
FAQS
Q14. What's the cause of the error RVTSH-150 and what's the solution for it?
A: Error RVTSH-150 is because the following select is failing, returning 0 rows:
SQL> select ms.unit_of_measure
from mtl_supply ms
where supply_type_code = 'REQ'
and supply_source_id = :req_line_id;
The error is because the Req. Supply missing. This is mostly a data problem caused at the
customer's site. Look into why the records are missing. May be the data has been manually
changed or some of the req. shipment has been cancelled.
FAQ Details
Q1. What pre-requisites are required for a vendor sourced receipt?
A: PO Receipt (vendor sourced receipt) can be performed for Shipments that are currently
Approved even though the Purchase Order may not be currently Approved. Only Approved
Shipments which have the ship-to-organization same as the active Inventory Organization are
eligible to be received.
This means that a PO supply exists in mtl_supply. Check the values of the following columns in
PO_LINE_LOCATIONS:
APPROVED_FLAG = 'Y' AND
CANCEL_FLAG = 'N' AND
CLOSED_CODE != 'FINALLY CLOSED'
Q2. Where are the records inserted when a standard receipt is created against a PO before the
Receiving Transaction Processor is called?
A: Records are inserted into rcv_transactions_interface with processing_status_code and
transaction_status_code as 'PENDING'. Records are also inserted into rcv_shipment_headers
which creates the shipment header.
Q3. How does Receipt Close Point work?

A: Define Purchase Options -> Control Options -> Receipt Close Point.
Three choices:
Accepted - Oracle Purchasing closes the shipment for receiving when you record the shipment as
being fully accepted.
Delivered - Oracle Purchasing closes the shipment for receiving when you record the shipment as
being fully delivered.
Received - Oracle Purchasing closes the shipment for receiving when you record the shipment as
being fully received.
Oracle Purchasing displays this option as the default.
You also need to set the receipt close tolerance percentage in the Default Options Region.
FAQS
Choose one of the above values for the receipt close point.
Q4. Why isn't my PO found when I query for it on the Receipt form?
A: Please check the following:
a) Query the PO from the Purchase Order form and note the Organization on the Shipment.
Ensure you are using the same Organization on the Receipt form.
b) On the Receipt form, select the checkbox for 'Include closed POs' then requery the PO.
Q5. Why can't I find the receipt in the Receiving Transaction Summary even after completing
the Receipt (Receiving -> Receipts)?
A: a) From Transaction Status Summary query for the Receipt Number or PO Number and check
b) If using RCV: Processing Mode = Batch, make sure to run the Receiving Transaction Processor.
c) If using RCV: Processing Mode = Batch or Immediate...go to Concurrent Request screen...check
to see if the concurrent process = Receiving Transaction Processor is finished.
Q6. Why can't I perform Direct Receipt if using Standard Receipt Routing or Inspection
Required?
A: To override the destination type at receipt time you need to set the profile option RCV: Allow
routing override = Yes.
Q7. What is the order of defaulting of the Receipt Routing on the receipts screen which may
be set at various levels?
A: The Receipt Routing on the receipts screen is defaulted as follows:
1. Purchase Order Shipment
2. if 1 is null, then Item Attribute
3. if 2 is null, then Vendor Attribute
But for Inter-Org Shipments (In-Transit Receipts) the Receipt Routing is defaulted as follows:
1. Item Attribute
2. if 1 is null, then Shipping Network for the Receiving Organization
Q8. Where is the receipt history saved when I do various receiving transactions?
A: The history records are saved in the rcv_transactions table and organized by transaction_type.
FAQS
In case item is under lot or serial control, records are also inserted into rcv_lot_transactions and
rcv_serial_transactions.
Q9. What are the various transactions types?

A: Receive - Receive the items into Receiving Dock.
Deliver - Deliver the items into expense or inventory destination.
Return to Vendor - Return the received items directly to vendors.
Return to Receiving - Return the delivered items to Receiving Dock or Inspection.
Accept - Accept items following an inspection.
Reject - Reject items following an inspection.
Transfer - Transfer items between locations.
Correct - Enter a positive or negative adjustment to a receiving or delivery transaction.
Match - Match unordered receipts to purchase orders.
Unordered - Receive items without purchase orders.
Q10. Where does the mandatory Location field on the receipts form gets populated from when
performing "Direct Receipt"?
A: The location field on the receipts form gets populated from the Purchase Order distributions.
Here, there is a field called Deliver_To. This field populates the Location field in the receipts
form.
Q11. When is the Express button enabled in the Receiving form RCVRCERC?
A: The Express function is available in the Receipts window if you have specified or inferred a
source in the Find Expected Receipts window. (The source would be inferred if you entered, for
example, a purchase order number). In the Receiving Transactions window, the express function
is available for deliveries regardless of your search criteria in the Find Receiving Transactions
window.
Performing any manual action in a line disables the Express button, and it is not enabled until
you have again selected the find button.
You also need to check the option "Allow Express Transactions" in the Receiving Options Form
as a prerequisite.
Navigation - Setup --> Organizations --> Receiving Options.
Q12. When will the Inspect button on the Receiving Transactions form get highlighted?
A: The Inspect button will be highlighted when:
1) 'RCV: Allow routing override' is set to YES.
2) 'RCV: Allow routing override' set to NO but the Routing is set to Inspection Required.
FAQS
Q13. How does Receiving interface with Inventory?

A: Once the PO is received, it creates the inventory interface record i.e. inserts a record into
mtl_material_transactions_temp and calls the inventory function inltpu() which completes the
delivery of the item into Inventory and also updates the on hand quantities.
($PO_/src/rvtp/rvtii.lpc)
Q14. How does Receiving interface with WIP for OSP items?
A: The function rvtooperation() in rvtoo.lpc calls the following WIP API which takes care of the
interface with WIP for OSP items. WIP_Transaction_PVT.Process_OSP_Transaction (
p_OSP_rec => osp_rec,
p_validation_level => WIP_Transaction_PVT.NONE,
p_return_status => :ret_status:ret_status_ind,
p_msg_count => msg_count,
p_msg_data => msg_data);
Q15. Which tables are populated for accrual accounting to happen?

A: The following tables must be populated for accrual accounting to happen:
GL_INTERFACE
RCV_RECEIVING_SUB_LEDGER
RCV_SUB_LEDGER_DETAILS (for match-to-receipt)
Files: $PO_/src/accrual/rvcac.opc
$PO_/src/accrual/rvacj.lpc
FAQ Details
Q1. What is a Debit Memo Invoice?
A: Negative amount invoice which is created and sent to a supplier to notify the Supplier of a
credit you are recording.
Q2. When should a Debit Memo be created?

A: To correct over billing errors, we create a Debit Memo by doing a Return To Supplier
transaction for the extra quantity that got invoiced.
Q3. Is Debit Memo functionality supported in 10.7 and 11.0?
A: No, Debit Memo functionality is supported only in Release 11i.
FAQS
Q4. How does Create Debit Memo from RTS Functionality Work?
A: Steps to Create a Debit Memo via RTS:
1. Create a PO with supplier and supplier site.
2. Receive the goods using Enter Receipts Form.
3. Create an Invoice. If Pay on Receipt is used to create then Invoice then set Pay on as
Receipt and Invoice Summary Level as Receipt in Supplier sites window under purchasing
tab.
4. Do a Return To Supplier (RTS) transaction for some of the goods using Returns form.
5. Make sure the check Box 'Create Debit Memo' is checked in the Return line while doing the
RTS transaction.
6. This will automatically create a Debit Memo invoice in AP.
Depending on how the RCV: Processing Mode Profile option, Receiving Transaction Processor
will be kicked off as soon as Receipt/Return transaction is saved.
If profile option RCV: Processing Mode = Batch, then user has to go and manually launch
Receiving Transaction Processor concurrent request.
If profile option RCV: Processing Mode = Immediate, then Receiving Transaction Processor
concurrent request will be launched and runs in the background. In this case control comes back
to user and he can do his operations.
If profile option RCV: Processing Mode = Online, then Receiving Transaction Processor
concurrent request will be launched. In this case control will not come back to user until
processor completes processing.
Q5. What setup is required to create a Debit Memo?

A: Navigate: Supply Base -> Suppliers -> Query on supplier -> Sites -> Query on site ->
Purchasing tab -> Check the box for Create Debit Memo from RTS Transaction. Make sure the
check Box 'Create Debit Memo' is checked in the Return line while doing the RTS Transaction.
Q6. Under what Conditions a Debit Memo can be created?

A: Automatic Debit Memo will be created only when billed quantity of Purchase Order is greater
than or equal to Returned Quantity. Return To Supplier reduces the PO billed quantity by the
returned quantity but in any case PO billed quantity will never go below zero.
Q7. What to do if Debit Memo is not created after doing an RTS transaction?
A: Set the profile options RCV: Processing Mode to Immediate and RCV: Debug Mode
to Yes. Receiving Transaction Processor log file (with debug messages of Receiving and AP code)
FAQS
and database trace file for RTS transaction will help in finding the cause of the problem.
Q8. Is Debit Memo not getting created when Inspection is involved?

A: This functionality has been incorporated in Procurement Family Pack H, and is also
available via interim patch 2151718 (plus pre-reqs shown below). These are the list of patches to
be applied for Debit Memo functionality to work if Inspection is involved.
If applying Procurement If applying PO Family Pack H: - OR - interim patch 2151718:
----------------------- ---------------------11i.PRC_PF.H 1763128
1842268 (AP patch) 1842268 (AP patch)
2045028
2144921
2179807
2151718
If Inspection is not involved, then no need to apply the above mentioned patches.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What is Pay On Receipt?
A: Pay on Receipt (also known as ERS (Evaluated Receipt Settlement) or Self-Billing) is an Oracle
Purchasing's concurrent program, which automatically creates invoices in Oracle Payables and
matches them with PO's automatically for the received amount. The short name for the program
is POXPOIV.
Q2. What is the minimum set-up required?

A: 1. In Oracle Purchasing responsibility, navigate to Supply base ->Suppliers. Query the
supplier to be used in the PO and Query the site to be used in PO. In the General Tab, check the
checkboxes for PAY SITE and PURCHASING. In the Purchasing tab, the Pay on field should
have a value of' Receipt'. The invoice summary level should also have the value of 'Receipt'.
2. Apart from the above set-up in R11i, we need to enter the value of ?Receipt? against the Pay on
field in the Terms window of the PO.
Q3. What is the impact of payables options on ERS?

A: From Payables options, under GL date basis there are four options. The accounting date will
be based on the option selected here. Make sure that the date is in the open period.
Q4. How can we identify the invoices created by Pay on receipt?

A: The invoices created by ERS will have ERS prefix generally. To identify the invoice created for
a particular receipt we can query with the combination of ERS and receipt number in the invoice
number field. In R11i, the profile option PO: ERS invoice number prefix can be set as needed
which can be used to identify the invoices.
Q5. What are the parameters passed?
A: For R107 and R11, the parameters passed are Parameter name value:
1. Transaction Source - ERS
2. Commit interval- default 1
3. Organization- Receiving org
4. Receipt Number- optional
If a receipt number is not specified all the receipts for that organization, which are eligible for Pay
on Receipt, are picked. For R11i, the organization parameter does not exist instead a new
parameter called Aging period exists.
FAQS
Q6. What is the significance of Ageing Period (R11i)?

A: The parameter Aging period determines the transactions on the receipt that can be considered
for the invoice creation. For ex if aging period is given as 1, then all the transactions that have a
transaction date less than or equal to the (sysdate-1) are considered for invoice creation. The
aging period can be set thru the profile option PO: ERS Aging period.
Q7. How can we debug what went wrong?

A: We can refer to the log file and check for error messages in po_interface_errors.
There could be many errors. Listed below are some common errors and possible resolutions.
1) Error Occurred in routine: create_invoice_header - Location: 110. Please refer note 1071391.6.
2) Pay on receipt Autoinvoice does not create any invoice. Note 1047839.6 might be useful. Please
ensure the setup is complete in payables and Purchasing modules.
3) You have a supplier who has a separate site for purchasing and Payables. When running the
ERS (Evaluated Receipt Settlement) it is selecting the purchasing site and therefore does not
create the invoice and gets a message that the POXPOIV: 'pay site is invalid'.
4) Purchasing Pay on Receipt Autoinvoice shows multiple occurrences of same receipt number in
multiorg environment. See Note 95384.1 for the solution.
5) Pay On Receipt AutoInvoice errors: po_inv_cr_invalid_gl_period. Please refer to note 179693.1
for resolution.
Q8. Does ERS work for unordered receipts?

A: No. ERS does not work for unordered receipts. This means invoice needs to be created
manually for those PO?s that are created from unordered receipts
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. Can I use any forms to view receiving transactions stuck in the
RCV_TRANSACTIONS_INTERFACE table?
A: The Transactions Status Summary form can be utilized to view all transactions currently in the
RCV_TRANSACTIONS_INTERFACE table. Navigation: Receiving -> Transaction Status
Summary
Q2. Is the Receiving Open Interface (ROI) functionality available in release 10.7 and how can
the support avail this functionality?
A: For release 10.7, this functionality was only available as a controlled production release. The
controlled production program now has an acceptable number of customers enrolled, and is not
being offered to any other customers wishing to use this functionality in 10.7.Customers that
currently have release 10.7 and do not have this functionality will need to upgrade to release 11.0
or higher, which contains the production version of this functionality.
For approved customers enrolled in the controlled production program, support is offered as
usual through Oracle Support Services. In addition, CAI partners and their customers are
supported by development for this functionality as well.
Q3. Where can the receipt information be imported from?

A: Receipt information can be imported from the following sources:
- Other Oracle Applications products, such as EDI Advance Shipment Notices sent from
suppliers
- Non-Oracle applications
Q4. What are some of the supported and non-supported features of the Receiving Open
Interface?
A: The non-supported features include:
- Lot number transactions
- Serial number transactions
- Dynamic locator control
- Replace transactions
- Separate RECEIVE and DELIVER transactions
This means that if there is a RECEIVE transaction processed using the open interface, then the
DELIVER transaction for that RECEIVE transaction needs to be manually created using the
Receiving Transactions form.
- DELIVER transactions as a single transaction
- May not handle Inter-Org Transfers or Internal Sales Order transaction types
- May not be used for creating unordered receipts
FAQS
The supported features are the ones that exist in the Oracle Purchasing application, excluding the
above. The receipt information from Advance Shipment Notice, Advance Shipment Notice with
billing information, and other sources can be used to create in transit shipments, receipts and
delivery transactions as output in the database.
The supported transaction types are:
- SHIP for a standard shipment
- RECEIVE for standard receipt
- DELIVER for standard receipt and delivery transactions.
Q5. What are the tables associated with the Receiving Open Interface?
A: There are two (2) main tables associated with the Receiving Open Interface:
RCV_HEADERS_INTERFACE, which should contain one row per receipt number, and
RCV_TRANSACTIONS_INTERFACE, which may contain one or more transactions per header.
Q6. How can you view the error messages, for any rows that failed to import successfully?
A: There are a couple of methods that can be used to accomplish this:
1) Run the Receiving Interface Errors Report.
Navigation: Reports/Run
Select the Receiving Interface Errors Report
2) If the desire is to see the errors directly from the PO_INTERFACE_ERRORS table (this is where
any errors are written to), the following statements can be executed in SQL*Plus using the APPS
schema:
Select interface_type, a.interface_transaction_id, column_name, error_message, processing_date
from po_interface_errors a, rcv_headers_interface b where a.interface_transaction_id =
b.header_interface_id and processing_status_code in ('ERROR','PRINT');
Select interface_type, a.interface_transaction_id, column_name, error_message, processing_date
from po_interface_errors a, rcv_transactions_interface b where a.interface_transaction_id =
b.interface_transaction_id and processing_status_code in ('ERROR', 'PRINT');
Q7. Which columns are required in the open interface tables?

A: Refer to the Oracle Manufacturing, Distribution, Sales, and Service Open Interfaces Manual
for this information. Within the section for the Receiving Open Interface, there is a listing of
every column for all open interface tables, as well as an indication of whether data for each
column is required, optional, conditionally required, or derived.
References: Oracle Manufacturing, Distribution, Sales, and Service Release 11 Open Interfaces
Manual (Part #: A57332-01), pages 6-67 to 6-90
FAQS
Q8. Is there a test script available that can be used to generate a receipt using the Receiving
Open Interface?
A: There are test scripts available that can be used to load data into the required interface tables.
These scripts can be used to whether or not the Receiving Transactions Processor is set up and
functioning properly. The scripts are now available in Patch 1362526 for Release 11.0.X and
11.5.X.
Q9. How can you debug the Receiving Open Interface program?
A: There is a script called 'runit.sql' that can be used to help debug and troubleshoot Receiving
Open Interface issues. This script helps to find where the Receiving Open Interface is failing. The
script is now available in Patch 1362526 for Release 11.0.X and 11.5.X.
Q10. I need to use runit.sql from SQL*Plus. However, I do not see the debug messages on
screen. Am I missing anything?
A: Open the file $PO_/admin/sql/RCVDBUGB.pls and search for a procedure PUT_LINE.
Uncomment the following line:
-- dbms_output.put_line (v_line);
Apply the file into the database and it should show the debug messages now on the screen
Q11. Can we use Receiving Open Interface for RMA receipts?

A: The functionality of creating an RMA receipt using the Receiving Open Interface is not yet
available. Enhancement Request 2142948 was logged to provide this functionality in future
releases.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What is an ASN?
A: The ASN (Advanced Shipment Notice (856)) is a document that is sent to a buyer in advance
of the buyer receiving the product. It is typically used within the context of an EDI environment.
It can be used to list the contents of an expected shipment of goods as well as additional
information relating to the shipment, such as order information, product description, physical
characteristics, type of packaging, marking carrier information, and configuration of goods
within the transportation equipment. In the implementation of the transaction the latest the ship
notice may be sent is the time of shipment. In practice the ship notice just arrive before the
shipment.
The process flow is as follows:
1. Supplier sends ASN.
2. EDI validates the data for EDI standards and inserts data into Receiving Interface tables.
3. Receiving Open Interface validates ASN data. If accepted shipment lines are populated.
4. Supply details are maintained.
5. Application Advice is generated. The supplier can check if there is a rejection of ASN through
the advice.
Q2. What are the business needs for an ASN?

A: Receive a Shipping notice in Advance.
Load ASN electronically into Oracle Apps using ROI.
Respond using Application Advice via EDI against the received ASN.
Q4. How can we debug if an error occurs?
A: We can check in the po_interface_errors for errors with shipment numbers. As each ASN uses
distinct shipment number, we can identify the error for the shipment. We may get a very generic
error message RCV_ASN_NOT_ACCEPT. When we get the error message either there are a
series of errors have occurred which cannot be handled or an undetermined error has occurred.
To handle this kind of situation we have a script called runit.sql. This actually prints debug
messages as the pre-processor process the interface records. We can also run the Receiving
Interface report. This report shows you what warnings or errors occurred while the Receiving
Transaction Processor was processing rows in the Receiving Open Interface tables. Rows
processed in the Receiving Open Interface include Advance Shipment Notices (ASNs), receipts,
and deliveries. Any errors that occur during this process are displayed in the Receiving Interface
Errors report when you run the report. At the same time, the errors are also sent to the Oracle
eCommerce Gateway process responsible for generating Application Advices. (For example,
Application Advices are sent back to suppliers detailing errors that occurred when the suppliers
sent ASNs.)
For R11i we have a profile option PO: Enable sql Trace on for Receiving, which actually prints the
debug messages of runit.sql in the log file.
FAQS
Q5. What are the profile options available for ASN?

A: The profile option available for ASN is RCV: Fail All ASN Lines if One Line Fails. When this
profile option is set to YES, when multiple lines are being processed, even if one line fails
validations or errors, the valid lines also error out.
Q6. Is ASN available for every customer?

A: In R107, ASN is a controlled production, which means only customers in the
controlledproduction list can use ASN. In R11 and R11i, it is available for all customers.
Q7. Can we cancel a PO after shipping the ASN but before receiving the ASN?
A: We cannot cancel a PO if ASN is yet to be received.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What is a Drop ship PO?
A: Oracle Order Management and Oracle Purchasing integrate to provide drop shipments. Drop
shipments are orders for items that your supplier ships directly to the customer either because
you dont stock or currently dont have the items in inventory, or because its more cost
effective for the supplier to ship the item to the customer directly. Drop shipment was introduced
in R11.
Q2. How is a Drop Ship PO created?

A: Drop shipments are created as sales orders in Order Management. The Purchase Release
concurrent program or workflow in Order Management creates rows in the Requisition Import
tables in Purchasing. Then Purchasings Requisition Import process creates the requisitions.
Drop shipments are marked with the Source Type of External in Order Management and
Supplier in Purchasing.
Q3. What is the setup required for Drop ship PO?

A: ITEM ATTRIBUTES:
Navigate: Inventory -> Items - > Organization items
Purchased (PO) Enabled
Purchasable (PO) Enabled
Transactable (INV) Enabled
Stockable (INV) Optional
Reservable (INV) Optional
Inventory Item (INV) Optional
Customer Ordered (OM) Enabled
Customer Orders Enabled (OM) Enabled
Internal Ordered (OM) Disabled
Internal Orders Enabled (OM) Disabled
Shippable (OM) Optional
OE Transactable (OM) Enabled
All Drop Ship items must be defined in the organization entered in the profile option OE: Item
Validation Organization and in the Receiving Organization.
All drop ship sub-inventory must have Reservable box checked. If the sub-inventory is not
Reservable the sales order issue transaction will not be created in
MTL_TRANSACTIONS_INTERFACE. After drop ship inventory organization is created,
subinventories should be defined. To create the subinventory, go to an inventory responsibility
and navigate to Setup -> Organizations -> Subinventories. Asset subinventories must have the
reservable and Asset boxes checked. Expense subinventories must have the Reservable box
checked and the Asset box unchecked.
Subinventory Attributes for Asset Subinventory
FAQS
Reservable/Allow Reservations
Asset Subinventory
Subinventory Attributes for Expense Subinventory
Reservable
Asset-must NOT be enabled.
Q4. How can we avoid the miscounting of supply as logical organization is involved?
A: You must receive drop-ship items in a logical organization. If you use Oracle master
Scheduling/MRP and Oracle Supply Chain Planning, to avoid miscounting supply you may not
want to include logical organizations in your planning. If you choose to include logical
organizations, ensure that doing so does not cause planning and forecasting complications.
Q5. If you make changes to a sales order after the Purchase Order (PO) has been generated,
will the order changes automatically be updated on the PO?
A: Order changes will not be automatically updated on the PO. Pulling up the Discrepancy
report will allow you to view the differences between the Sales Order and PO. However, you will
have to manually update the POs in the Purchasing application.
Q6. If items on a Drop Ship order are cancelled, does the system automatically generate a PO
Change to the PO originally sent to the supplier?
A: No, Drop Ship functionality in this regard remains the same as in R11. There is a discrepancy
report available that will report differences between the PO and the Sales Order.
Q7. Does Order Management 11i have functionality to do serial number management with
Drop Shipments?
A: You are able to receive serial numbered Drop Ship stock. Order Management will receive the
serial number noted on the PO.
Q8. Can Configurable Items be drop shipped?

A: Currently only Standard Items can be drop shipped. Functionality for Configurable Items will
be added in future releases.
Q9. How do I drop ship across operating units?

A: Release 11i does not currently support this functionality.
FAQS
Q10. How are over/under shipments handled in drop shipment?

A: If part of a drop-ship line ships, and you do not wish to fulfill the remaining quantity, cancel
the line. Over shipments must also be handled manually. If the supplier ships more than the
ordered quantity, you can bill your customer for the additional quantity or request that they
return the item. Use the Drop Ship Order Discrepancy Report to view differences between your
drop-ship sales orders and their associated purchase requisitions and orders.
Q11. Will Blanket PO's work with Drop Shipment?

A: Blanket PO's will not work with Drop shipment because the PO must be created when OM
notifies PO that a drop ship order has been created. This PO is linked to the drop ship order so
that when the receipt is done (partial or complete) .OM is updated to receiving interface eligible.
Drop ship lines do not use the pick release, ship confirm or inv interface order cycles.
Q12. Can we cancel drop shipment after it is received?

A: Drop shipments cannot be cancelled once Oracle Purchasing obtains the receipt. A user who
wants to cancel a drop ship sales order line must ensure no receipts have been created against the
line and that the requisition and/or purchase order associated with the line is cancelled.
Cancellation of a Partial Drop Ship receipt is allowable. But only the portion that has not been
received can be cancelled. If you cancel a drop shipment line for which you have not shipped the
entire quantity, the order processing splits the line. The first line contains the quantity shipped
and the second line contains the non-shipped quantity in backorder. You can cancel the second
line the backorder on the sales order. The PO line quantity should be changed to reflect the new
quantity.
Q13. What debugging tools are available for Drop shipments?

A: 1. Note 133464.1 contains a diagnostic script that can be used for troubleshooting problems
with sales orders.
2. Debugging receipt transaction or the sales order issue transaction, Set the following profile
options:
RCV: Processing Mode to Immediate or Batch
RCV: Debug Mode to Yes
OM: Debug Level to 5
INV: Debug Trace to Yes
INV: Debug level to 10
TP: INV Transaction processing mode to Background
-Then go to Sys Admin: Concurrent: Program: Define; query up the Receiving Transaction
FAQS
Processor and check the Enable Trace box.

-Save the receipt for the deliver transaction (destination type will say Inventory for the deliver
transaction).
-View the Receiving Transaction Processor log file, the Inventory Transaction Worker log file, as
well as, the trace for the errors.
Q14. What is the Import source and status of PO generated from Drop Shipment?
A: Import source is Order Entry.
Status of PO will always be Approved.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What is RMA?
A: RMA stands for Return Material Authorization. RMA functionality allows user to authorize
return of goods delivered against a sales order. Also authorize returns for replacement, as well as
returns with or without credit. Returns from a customer occur for a variety of reasons including
damage, shipment error, or sampling.
Q2. How does it work?

A: For RMA overview, setup, RMA processing please refer to Order Management user guide. To
know about the process of receiving against an RMA maintained in Oracle Order Management,
please refer to Oracle Purchasing user guide in receiving section.
Q3. Can we return or correct an RMA?

A: We can correct/return a RMA that is received. Once the RMA is delivered, it cannot be
corrected or returned.
Q4. How can we debug a RMA receipt error?

A: If Receiving Transaction Processor is online, the error message will be displayed on screen. If
we are using Immediate or batch mode, set the RCV: Debug mode to yes and check the log file
for the error message.
a) If the error message is a subroutine error/unknown error Relink RCVOLTM executable,
bounce the Receiving Transaction Manager and process again for online mode.
Relink RVCTP for immediate/batch mode.
If still the error is occurring, check if the same error occurs with other modes of receiving. If not
compare the versions of the files in the executables. For this pocheck.sql can be used.
Development should be provided with the DB trace, pocheck.sql output for any mode of
receiving, while logging a bug to analyze further.
b) If the error is FRM error, which is not a known error message, then please regenerate the
respective fmb and pll files and check if the issue is resolved. If not provide the FRD and form
level trace for the development to analyze further.
c) If the error is related to rvtoe_RmaPushApi, Order Management team should analyze the
cause of the problem as the API belongs to Order Management.
d) In Batch or Immediate mode, if the receiving transaction errored out, the order line status
should be checked to confirm whether OM processing completed successfully and if the error is
FAQS
pertaining to the receiving module.

e) For any mode to check if the error is from COGS (OM) or inventory, need to set the profile
options ?OM: Debug level? to 5 and ?INV: Debug level? to 10. The cogs11i.sql is the OM script to
debug COGS. The inventory log file also shows the errors that occurred in the inventory module.
Q5. Can RMA be received across operating units?

A: We can receive, inspect, correct, return and deliver RMA?s across Operating units. The
changes are made in Bugs 1786778 and 2023665.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. Is it possible to perform Returns for Internal Shipments (Inter-Org and Internal Order)?
A: No, it is not possible to perform Returns on Internal Shipments. You need to reverse the
original process if you want to return an internally ordered item. You have to create an internal
requisition for the item in the source organization, and then process that order back to the source
organization.
Q2. Is it possible to perform Returns/Corrections for RMAs?

A: The Returns/Corrections for RMAs that are delivered to Inventory is not supported if the
customer have poxrcv.odf version higher than or equal to 115.52.
Q3. Can I return/correct a cancelled PO line to a vendor?
A: It is not possible to return/correct a cancelled PO line.
Q4. Can I change the line status of PO to Closed for Receiving and then query the PO in
Returns/Corrections Form to correct them?
A: The customer should NEVER change the status of the cancelled/finally-closed line without
developments consent via a bug.
Q5. I cannot do returns/adjustments for an un-ordered receipt. Why?

A: Adjustments and/or returns to vendor on unordered receipts can only be done after the
receipt has been matched to a Purchase Order. Verify this has been done.
Q6. Can Returns/Corrections be performed when the deliver_to person is not active?
A: Returns/Corrections are not allowed if the deliver to person is not active. You have to reactivate the employee to perform returns/corrections.
Q7. I am not able to return an item under serial control. What should I do?
A: Check whether the Serial Number is available in the subinventory and organization.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. Is it possible to show more than two decimal places in the "PRICE" column that is
currently being printed on the 'Printed Purchase Order Report - (Landscape or Portrait)'?
A: Currently, it is not possible to print more than two decimals in the 'PRICE' field without
customizing the reports. There is currently an enhancement request (628857) under review that
will, if approved, bring this desired functionality to future releases. This answer holds true to
Releases 10.7, 11.0, and 11.5 (11i).
Q2. When I print out a purchase order from the Document Approval window, does it only
print in Portrait style?
A: Currently this is the only way it will print from the Document Approval window. An
enhancement request (466551) has been filed to allow the choice of either Portrait or Landscape
as the format when printing purchase orders from the Document Approval window.
Q3. Why does the blanket purchase agreement print every time a release is printed?
A: This is the current functionality of the application. The blanket purchase agreement will be
printed every time you choose to print an associated release. An enhancement request (432017)
has been filed to allow only the release to be printed.
Q4. What is the name of the file that controls printing of reports related to Oracle Purchasing,
and where is it located on the system?
A: The name of the file is porep.odf. This file creates the Oracle Purchasing views which generate
the data that is printed by the reports. The file can be found in the following locations:
$PO_/admin/odf This is where the base release version of the file is seeded by the install.
$PO_/patch/110/odf This is where the most current version of the file resides on your system
for Release 11.
$PO_/patchsc/107/odf This is where the most current version of the file resides on your system
for Release 10.7.
For Windows NT, it is best to use the FIND FILE utility to locate the various versions of the file.
Q5. How can a report file name and version be located?

A: There are two methods that can be used to find the report short (file) name:
1. Please see Note 106968.1, titled "Purchasing: PO Report Short Names". This note contains an
alphabetical listing of all Oracle Purchasing reports and lists the short name for each one.
FAQS
2. Each report is a concurrent process that can be found in System Administration.

- Responsibility: System Administrator
- Navigation: Concurrent > Program > Define
- Select the Program Name
Under the Program Name field, you will see a field called Short Name. This is the name of the
report file. This name should be the same as the name of the file in the Executable field.
To find the version of the file:
For Unix
********
For Release 10.7, go to $PO_/srw
For Release 11, go to $PO_/reports
Type the following command at a Unix prompt:
strings -a <FILENAME.rdf>|grep Header:
For Windows NT
**************
Use the FIND FILE utility to locate the file. Use MS-DOS to navigate to the
file and type the following command at the prompt:
find /i "Header:" <FILENAME.rdf>
Q6. Why do asterisks (******) appear on report output in place of the quantity?
A: Oracle Reports will allow a maximum of 13 characters to be printed in the Quantity column.
These characters include a -/+ sign at the beginning and then a combination of 12 more
characters, including commas, periods, and digits. Therefore, if the quantity on a report contains
more than 13 characters, you will see the asterisks show in place of the quantity.
Examples:
9,999,999.00 actually contains 13 characters and will be displayed. Remember, the + sign is
holding the first character position in the database.
-1.2245833524335 would print asterisks, as more than 13 characters are involved.
You do have the ability to change the way your reports print out the numbers in the Quantity
region; this may make the difference in allowing you to see the actual quantity. You cannot
change the number of characters in the field, but you can change the way they display. This will
give you more options. To do this:
Query the profile 'INV: Dynamic Precision Option for Quantity on Reports'
Click on the List of Values and you will see the different options available for you to use on your
FAQS
reports. You will notice that all options still only represent 13 characters; it just changes the way
they are represented.
See Note 1072855.6 for further clarification.
Q7. When a report has been submitted to print, the output can be viewed by using the View
Output button, but no hard copies of the report print out. What causes this to occur??
A: The number of copies Oracle Reports will print is controlled in System Administration.
Query the profile 'Concurrent: Report Copies'
If this profile is not populated, Oracle will not print any copies of any report.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. How do the 'Accrued Receipts' and 'Include Online Accruals' parameters determine the
output of this report?
A: The values of these parameters control which purchase orders are eligible to be printed on the
report. Each of these parameters can be set to 'Yes' or 'No', thus giving four (4) combinations
total; here are the four combinations possible and what the expected output can be:
A. Accrued Receipts = Yes
Include Online Accruals = No
Using these settings, the report output will include purchase orders that have a value in either
the Item and Category fields or just the Category field. In this scenario, the
PO_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL table will have the following values:
ACCRUED_FLAG = Y
ACCRUE_ON_RECEIPT_FLAG = N
B. Accrued Receipts = Yes
Include Online Accruals = Yes
Using these settings, the report output will include purchase orders that have a value in both the
Item and Category fields. In this scenario, the PO_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL table will have the
following values:
ACCRUED_FLAG = Y
ACCRUE_ON_RECEIPT_FLAG = Y
C. Accrued Receipts = No
Include Online Accruals = Yes
Using these settings, the report output will include purchase orders that have a value in either
the Item and Category fields or just the Category field. In this scenario, the
ACCRUED_FLAG = N
ACCRUE_ON_RECEIPT_FLAG = Y
D. Accrued Receipts = No
Include Online Accruals = No
Using these settings, the report output will include purchase orders that have a value in just the
Category field. In this scenario, the
ACCRUED_FLAG = N
ACCRUE_ON_RECEIPT_FLAG = N
FAQS
Q2. Does the Uninvoiced Receipts Report take the Currency Rate from the purchase order
header or its individual distribution lines?
?
A: The Uninvoiced Receipts Report was initially designed to take the Currency Rate from the
header of the purchase order. Bug 1396659 was logged, for Releases 10.7 and 11.0, initially as an
enhancement request to change the report to look at the individual distribution lines; this
enhancement will be enabled in Purchasing patch set P for Release 10.7, and in Purchasing minipack G for Release 11.0.
For Release 11i, this issue is currently being reviewed and the change may not be made since
Release 11i allows the users to override the currency rate at the time a receipt is entered.
Q3. Will a cancelled purchase order line appear on the Uninvoiced Receipts Report?
A: Yes, a cancelled line will continue to show on the Uninvoiced Receipts Report.
Q4. Will a closed purchase order line appear on the Uninvoiced Receipts Report?
A: No, closed purchase order lines do not show on the Uninvoiced Receipts Report.
Q5. POXPORRA - Uninvoiced Receipts Report Returns No Data Or Wrong Data?

A: Ensure that the correct values used for the parameters Accrued Receipts and Include Online
Accruals when running the report. These parameters are listed as optional but they are essential
in determing which transactions are included in the report output.
1. For receipts (for expense items) that Accrue At Period-End and have not been accrued:
Accrued Receipts=No
Include Online Accruals=No
2. For receipts (for expense items) that Accrue At Period-End and have been accrued or have not
been accrued:
Accrued Receipts=Yes
Include Online Accruals=No
3. To include receipts for expense or inventory items that Accrue On Receipt and have been
accrued or have not been accrued:
Accrued Receipts=Yes
Include Online Accruals=Yes
4. To include receipts for expense or inventory items that Accrue On Receipt and have not been
FAQS
accrued:
Accrued Receipts=No
Include Online Accruals=Yes.
Q6. Uninvoiced Receipts Report Does Not Reconcile With Accrual Journals in General
Ledger?
A: Apply patch 2274733. Patch 2274733 contains updated versions of the Uninvoiced Receipts
Report
(POXPORRA.rdf 115.23) and the code used by the Receipt Accruals - Period-End process.
Q7. Uninvoiced Receipt Missing From the Uninvoiced Receipts Report?
A: To correct this problem, take the following steps:
1. Under Purchasing responsibility > Purchase Order > Purchase Order Summary.
2. Query the PO of interest.
3. From the menu, navigate to Special > Control.
4. Select Open or Open for Invoicing.
5. Save.
Q8. The Uninvoiced Receipts Report does not Balance to the General Ledger?
A: Update the below files to the versions shown or higher. Apply Patch 1705773 or later.
rvacj.lpc 115.23
rvcac.opc 115.8.
Q9. The Uninvoiced Receipts Report does not Calculate tax properly.
A: Apply patch 1977474. This will upgrade the version of POXPORRA.rdf to 115.15.
The patch modifies the formula column C_Dist_Amount_Accrual so as to pro-rate the tax
amount based on dist_quantity ( dist qty ordered - dist qty cancelled) and dist_quantity_accrued.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What does invoice price variance report show?
A: Invoice price variance report shows the variance between the invoice price and the purchase
price.
The layout is in the following format:
Vendor
Po Details
Invoice details and Variances
Charge and variance account.
Q2. Does the UOM in which the price and quantity is reported depends on the way the
invoice is matched?
A: Yes, the UOM in which the price and quantity is reported depends on the way the invoice is
matched.
1. If the invoice is matched to a PO then the UOM in which price and quantity is matched is as
per the UOM of the PO or Invoice. Both are same in this case.
2. If the UOM is matched to a Receipt then the following fields are calculated as per the UOM of
the receipt.
(The UOM of the receipt may or may not be the same as that of the PO).
The PO Functional Price and the Invoice price variance.
The Unit is still as per the PO UOM. This is because the Unit in the report is shown at the PO
level.
Q3. Where do you set the Invoice match option?

A: 1. Purchase orders shipment window or
2. Supplier site.
The match option defined at the Purchase order shipment window has a preference over that of
Supplier site.
Q4. Which PO rate is considered for calculating the variance?

A: The rate at the distribution level is given preference. If this is null then only the rate from PO
headers is taken to calculate the variance.
Q5. What are the main tables used in this report?

A: 1. ap_invoice_distributions
2. ap_invoices

3. po_headers
4. po_distributions
FAQS
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What does Receipt Traveler report show and how is it organized?
A: The Receipt Traveler facilitates receiving inspection and delivery of goods you receive within
your organization.
After you receive the goods, you can print receipt travelers and attach these tickets to the goods.
You can enter selection criteria to specify the receipt travelers you want to print. One receipt
traveler prints per distribution, and each traveler has space for you to record delivery comments.
It prints in the following format:
Item
Source (Supplier/Inventory/Internal requisition/RMA)
Receipt
Delivery Instructions
Lot and Serial Number
Wip Shortage
Q2. Which PO level does the report print?
A: The report prints at the distribution level only if delivery has been made, else it prints the
receipt transaction.
Q3. How many pages does the report print for single/multiple shipments and single/multiple
distributions?
A:
<ALIGN=LEFTPages
<ALIGN=LEFT<ALIGN=LEFTFor One
1
shipment line and No distribution
1
shipment line and One distribution
2
shipment line and Two distributions
<ALIGN=LEFT<ALIGN=LEFTFor
Two shipment lines with Two
4
distributions each
Q4. Which are the most used views and tables in this report?
A: Views
1. RCV_RECEIPTS_PRINT
FAQS
2. RCV_DISTRIBUTIONS_PRINT
Table
1. RCV_TRANSACTIONS
Q5. Which transactions get printed on Receipt Traveler?
A: A receipt Traveler Report gets automatically printed under the following conditions:
- A standard receipt is performed.
- A direct delivery is performed.
- Matching of an unordered receipt.
Q6. What are the profile options used for this report?
A: Following are the two profile options used for this report:
RCV: Print Receipt Traveler (Yes/No)
Concurrent: Report Copies (Number of copies you want to print).
Q7. What could be the problem for report printing a blank page?
A: If the receipt is saved after the header information is added, the receipt traveler kicks off.
Because the line information has not been completed. The report only prints the header
information and a blank page. If the header information and the line information is complete the
receipt traveler will print with all correct information.
Q8. Can Receipt Traveler be printed if the RMA is received in a different Operating Unit than
where it was created?
A: Yes.
FAQ Details
Q1. What are the different authorization_status can a requisition have?
A: Approved, Cancelled, In Process, Incomplete, Pre-Approved, Rejected, or Returned.
Q2. Can an approved requisition be viewed in the Requisition form?

A: No, an approved requisition cannot be viewed in the Requisition form. Approved or In
Process requisitions can only be viewed in the Requisition Summary form. Only Requisitions,
which have Incomplete, Returned, and Rejected status, can be viewed from Enter Requisition
form.
FAQS
Q3. Can an approved requisition be revised?

A: No, an approved requisition cannot be revised.
Q4. Why is there no list of values for items in the requisition form after they have been
defined in the item master?
A: The list of values should be available. Please review Supplier-Purchasing information for the
Financial Options to ensure the correct organization has been selected for the Inventory Org.
Setup-> Organizations->Financial Options->Supplier-Purchasing
Q5. Is the Supplier item field a validated field?

A: No, the supplier item field is not a validated field. It is for reference only.
Q6. How can you have specific Requestor defaulted on Requisition form?
A: In order to have a specific requestor default onto the requisitions form, the user will have to
set the following in the user will have to set the following in the user's requisition preferences.
Navigation: /Purchasing -> Requisitions -> Requisitions Go to special ->preferences Click in the
requestor field Choose a requestor from the list of values Click the 'apply' button, a message '
new preferences now in effect.' Close the requisitions form Re-open the requisitions form Click in
the lines region, the requestor from requisition preferences should appear in the requestor field.
The requisition preferences are only valid while working on it , user needs to re enter requisition
preferences each time he starts the applications.
Q7. Can I change the item number in requisition lines after saving the record?
A: User is not allowed to change the item number of a saved record in Oracle Purchasing
Requisition Form. If user finds that the item entered by him in a saved record is wrong then he
has to delete that record and enter a new record for the required item. User is allowed to change
the Type, Description, UOM, Quantity, Price, Need by date in a saved record in the Enter
Requisition form. Also he can change the item category if item number of the saved record in the
Enter Requisition Form is NULL.
Q8. What all control actions I can perform on a requisition through Document control
window?
A: Cancel and Finally close.
FAQS
Q9. What is the authorization_status of a requisition after Finally closing it?

A: When we finally close the requisition from Requisition Summary form the
authorization_status of the requisition does not change. Instead it's closed_code becomes
'FINALLY CLOSED'.
Q10. Can I cancel or finally close any requisition from Document Control Window?
A: No. Purchasing lets you cancel or final close a requisition or requisition line before your
manager approves it or before a buyer places it on a purchase order. No control actions can be
performed on an Incomplete requisition. You cannot Finally close a 'Pre-Approved' Requisition.
Q11. What happens if the requisition cancelled of finally closed through Document Control
Window and encumbrance is on?
A: If you are using encumbrance or budgetary control, Purchasing automatically creates negative
debit encumbrance entries for the cancelled requisitions. When you final close a purchase order,
Purchasing creates credit entries which reverse the encumbrances.
Q12. How can I confirm that my requisition has sufficient funds?
A: Go to (M) Special->Check for funds.
Q13. How can I find out, which all requisition lines have went into purchase order?
A: In Requisition Summary form (M) Special-> View Purchase Order. In the 'Special' Menu itself
you can see the option' View Sales Order'.
Q14. What does the status Pre-Approved mean, and how does a document reach this status?
A: The status of Pre-Approved is the outcome of a person forwarding a document for approval
even though the forwarding person has the necessary authority to approve it. The document may
have been forwarded by mistake or for business reasons. It is not possible to perform a receipt
against a document with a status of Pre-Approved.
Q15. When you try to 'Save' a requisition, the following message appears:
PO_ALL_POSTING_NA.
FAQS
A: This happens when you do not have a valid code combination for the accounts defaulting on
the distribution account. Ensure that the account has a valid code combination.
Q16. While forwarding requisition for approval, error APP-14056: User exit po find_forward
returned error.
A: There is no Forward Method specified in the setup. The FIND_FORWARD function cannot
find any rules to determine the forward to person. Navigate to the Document Types Form
(POXSTDDT) in Purchasing Responsibility. Setup -> Purchasing -> Document Types. Select the
document type of Requisition (Internal or Purchase) and make sure that the field 'Forward
Method' is not blank. If it is blank, set it to either Hierarchy or Direct, then save.
Q17. Unable to enter Project information on the Distribution line of a Requisition.

A: You cannot enter project information for inventory destinations (unless you have Project Mfg
installed). Setting Destination Type = Expense will resolve the problem. You will then be able to
enter information in the remaining Project related fields.
Q18. When a requisition is autocreated to a purchase order, supplier information is not

populated in the purchase order header.
A: This happens when a requisition number is entered in the Find Requisition Lines window and
document is autocreated. But if you enter the requisition number and supplier details in the Find
Requisition Lines window and autocreated the document to purchase order. The purchase order
now contains supplier details in the purchase order header. Supplier information at the
requisition level is actually a suggested Supplier, and the buyer has an option to decide which
supplier to pick on the PO header. Also, if you try to Autocreate multiple requisitions with
different Suppliers Autocreate would not know which supplier to use. Hence the vendor
information cannot be defaulted. This is the standard functionality of Oracle Applications.
Workarounds: 1 - Enter the suggested supplier on the 'Find Requisition Lines' Search Criteria
window and this is populated on PO header when autocreated. 2 - Enter the supplier information
in the 'Select Purchase Order' zone.
Q19. The system does not allow you to change the Price and / or quantity of an approved
Requisition line before AutoCreating a Purchase Order.
A: When you are using Encumbrance Accounting, by enabling the Budgetary Control flag for a
set of books, the system automatically creates encumbrances from Requisitions, Purchase Orders
and other transactions originating from modules such as Purchasing & Payables.
In this case, the funds are checked at the Requisition Level. You cannot change the Price and
Quantity once the requisition has been approved. This is the Standard functionality of Oracle
FAQS
Applications.
After Autocreating a Purchase Order, you can change the quantity and price.
Q20. Cannot find a Document in the Notifications form which has been forwarded by an
intermediate Approver.
A: Several things with Oracle Workflow can cause documents to be stuck 'in process', however,
this particular issue deals with duplicate data in your HR system.
Using your SysAdmin responsibility, navigate to Security-->User-->Define and perform a query
on the Person field using the employee name of the approver you are trying to forward the
document to.
This should return a record for only 1 user. If the employee is assigned to more than 1 user name,
Workflow will not know who to deliver the notification to and the document will hang with a
status of 'in process'.
Q21. Cannot find cancel requisition option in requisition summary form.
A: Please check for the sql script poxdocon.sql. This can be found under the following directory:
$PO_/admin/import/poxdocon.sql & You then have to run the script by logging on to
SQL*PLUS as APPS/(PASSWORD). The control options will be created once you run the above
script and you can then view all the Control Options under 'Special' in the Requisition Summary
form after you log on to Applications once again.
Q22. You are allowed to update 'Destination Type' from 'Inventory' to 'Expense' in the
requisition form.
A: If you setup destination type as "Inventory" in the item setup and in the Requisitions form if
you change the destination type to "Expense", then this will override the destination type setup
in item setup. The Destination type will carry over from the Requisition into the Purchase Order
when autocreating.
Q23. Clicking on the LOV to select an employee to forward the document gives error:FRM41830: List Of Values contains no entries.
A: You need to run the following sql:
SQL>select can_preparer_approve_flag, default_approval_path_id
from po_document_types_all
where document_type_code = 'REQUISITION';
If the results return a NULL value for can_preparer_approve_flag then you need to perform the
following: Navigation: Purchasing -> Setup -> Purchasing Document Types. In the document
window type window use Requisition in the type field. Enable "Owner Can Approve" check box
FAQS
save it disable it save it and enable it. This is to set the flag accordingly. Now save the record.
Now when you enter a requisition and forward the requisition for approval you can have LOV in
the forward field.
Q24. The requisition can be saved without the need-by date field being populated.
A: Line items that are put on requisitions must be planned. It is necessary that the items are
planned in order for the need-by date to be enforced.
Step-by-step solution:
GUI - Query the item in the Item Master
- Choose the General Planning sub-region
- Make the item planned
Char - Navigate - Items - Update
- Query item
- In Item Details region choose select
- Make the item planned
Q25. In the Enter Purchase Order form and in the Enter Requisitions form, the List of Values
in the Items field is not retrieving some of the items.
A: In the Enter Purchase Order form and the Enter Requisitions forms, the List of Values (LOV)
in the Items field is not based on what organization your purchasing responsibility is pointing to.
Instead, it is based on the Inventory Organization entered in the Financial Options form under
Supplier - Purchasing. In the Enter Purchase Order form and the Enter Requisitions forms, the
List of Values (LOV) in the Items field is not based on what organization your purchasing
responsibility is pointing to. Instead, it is based on the Inventory Organization entered in the
Financial Options form under Supplier - Purchasing. Changing the Inventory Organization
defined in the Financial Options to the Item Master organizations will permit you to select those
items.
Q26. The items with destination type as Inventory have the destination type as Expense
defaulting in the Enter Requisitions form.
A: The defaults do not come in for a requisition, if the inv_organization_id column is blank in
HR_LOCATIONS table and does not get populated. The inv_organization_id is linked to location
and this in turn is linked to employee and which explains why when you enter the item in
requisition form the organization and Ship-To Location field were not get populated and
therefore the destination type was not coming as inventory. You have to populate
inv_organization_id in HR_locations table which will resolve the problem.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. Which Requisitions are processed via Create Internal Sales Order?
A: Only Requisitions Lines which are Internally Sourced and Approved are picked by the Create
Internal Sales Order process. Each Requisition Line is processed and picked up by the Create
Internal Sales order process if the Source Type is Inventory.
Q2. Why am I unable to select Inventory as my source type when I create a Requisition?
A: The Item attribute has to be Internal Orderable for Item to be internally sourced.
Q3. When I try to enter a Requisition line, which is internally sourced, I am unable to see my
source Organization in the LOV?
A: You need to define the Shipping Network between the Source Organization and the
destination Organization. You can do this in Inventory>Setup>Organizations>Shipping Network
and do the setup for the Shipping Network between the two organizations. Also make sure you
set the Internal Order Required flag.
Q4. Is the create Internal Sales Order process Operating Unit dependent?
A: Yes. In Release 11i we have the enhance functionality of creating the Sales Order in the Source
Organizations Operating Unit. All the Requisition line validations and Setup Validations are
done in the source Organizations Operating Unit. If the Create Internal Sales Order fails you
need to check if the Setup is done properly in the Source Organizations Operating Unit.
Q5. Why is it that after creating and approving an Internal Requisition and running the Create
Internal Sales Order process my Requisition line is not transferred to OE?
A: This could be because of various setup Issues. From the PO side make sure you have done the
Customer location associations for the location you select in the destination and Source Orgs
Operating Unit. Also check if you have entered the Order Type and Order Source in the
Purchasing>Setup>Organizations>Purchasing Options>Internal Requisition tab. From the
OE side also make sure you have done the Setup related with Create Internal Sales Order. The
Order type you entered in the PO system Parameters must have the Order type details defined in
OE.
Q6. Why is it that after Running Create Internal Sales Order process and Order Import the
records are still there in the Interface tables?
FAQS
A: This is because the Sales Order will be created in the source Organizations Operating Unit. In
Release 11 we created the Sales Order in the destination Org. But in the R11i we have the
enhanced functionality of creating the Sales Order in the Source Organizations Operating Unit.
Therefore you have to run Order Import in the Source Organization.
Q7. What are the ways to debug the Create Internal Sales Order?
A: You have the Concurrent Log created for each Create Internal Sales Order process run.
The log will have information related to the Source and destination Organizations Operating
Unit and whether the setups are done properly in the operating Units. It will also have
information of whether the record was picked for processing but failed validations later. You
need to get the Database level trace to check the code flow for the Create Internal Sales Order
Q8. Why is the transferred_to_oe_flag at the headers updated to Y even if some of the
records failed during the Create Internal Sales Order process?
A: This is a known issue. Check Enhancement Bug# 2204076.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What is the Basic Purchasing Setup for Requisition Import?
A: If importing requisitions from Inventory, input a value for the profile option INV: Minmax
Reorder Approval. If the value of INCOMPLETE is selected, the result will be imported
Requisitions that require an approval. If the value is APPROVED, then the requisitions cannot be
queried in the Requisition entry form; rather, the Requisition Summary form will have to be
utilized to view information on the imported approved requisitions.
If importing requisitions from MRP, input a value for the profile option MRP: Purchasing By
Revision. This profile option is important if you are using multiple revisions per item and using
sourcing rules to create Purchase Orders or Releases. This profile option indicates whether or not
to pass on the item revision to the purchase requisition.
Setup/Organizations/Purchasing - Default Alternate Region Requisition Import Group-By Field.
The Requisition Import process will first look at the Group By parameter selected when the
process is submitted; should this parameter be left blank, the system will then look to the GroupBy field residing in the Purchasing Options form. If you expect releases to be created from the
requisitions, which you import, make sure the profile option PO: Release During Req Import is
populated with the correct value. The choices for this profile are Yes or No. If the profile is set to
Yes and all sourcing rule information is properly set up, then blanket releases will be created via
the Create Releases process. If the profile is set to No, the Create Releases process will not run at
the completion of Requisition Import and all releases will have to be created manually via Auto
Create.
Q2. How does Requisition Import determine the grouping method for incoming pieces of
data?
A: This function groups requisitions. It first assigns values to REQUISITION_LINE_ID and
REQ_DISTRIBUTION_ID; the function then groups Requisitions based on the
REQ_NUMBER_SEGMENT1 column. All requisitions with the same NOT NULL
REQ_NUMBER_SEGMENT1 are assigned the same REQUISITION_HEADER_ID. The function
then groups Requisitions based on the GROUP_CODE column. All requisitions with the same
value in the GROUP_CODE column are assigned the same REQUISITION_HEADER_ID. It then
groups based on the GROUP_BY parameter, which takes on the value of DEFAULT_GROUP_BY
if not provided. GROUP_BY could be one of the following: BUYER, CATEGORY, ITEM,
VENDOR, LOCATION or ALL.
Q3. How is the PO_INTERFACE_ERRORS table purged and does this data have any
dependencies?
A: Oracle Purchasing provides the Requisition Import Exceptions Report, which can be used to
diagnose records in Error in the PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table. It also has an
option to purge the Error records in PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL and the
corresponding Error message in the PO_INTERFACE_ERRORS table: - Responsibility:
FAQS
Purchasing Super User

- Navigation: Reports/Run, then select Requisition Import Exceptions Report
There is a parameter titled 'Delete Exceptions'. If you select 'Yes', then records in the
PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table with a status of ERROR' and the corresponding
records in the PO_INTERFACE_ERRORS table will be deleted. You can also restrict the deleted
records by selecting the Batch_id and the Interface Source code. The dependency is between
PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL (transaction_id) and PO_INTERFACE_ERRORS
(interface_transaction_id)
Q4. How is the list of values derived for the Import Source column within the Requisition
Import report parameters window?
A: The list of values for the Import Source parameter drives off of the records, which currently
reside in the PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table. Within this table is the column,
INTERFACE_SOURCE_CODE, which contains the source from where the data was created and
in turn is the same value that shows in the list of values. Example: Say that there are currently 20
rows In PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL.Ten of the rows have an
INTERFACE_SOURCE_CODE of 'INV', and the other ten rows have an
INTERFACE_SOURCE_CODE value of 'WIP'. When the user then goes to view the list of values,
it will show 'INV' and 'WIP' in the list, as those are the only sources currently loaded and
unprocessed in the interface table.
Q5. What methods are available in the application to resolve errored records in the
PO_INTERFACE_ERRORS table?
A: Oracle Purchasing provides the Requisition Import Exceptions Report, which can be used to
diagnose problems with the records, which have currently errored out in the
PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table.
- Responsibility: Purchasing Super User
- Navigation: Reports/Run, then select Requisition Import Exceptions Report
There is a parameter titled 'Delete Exceptions. If this is populated with 'Yes', then all records in
the PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table with a status of ERRORwill be deleted
when the report is executed. If the parameter is set to No', then you will see the errors from the
report and be able to manually fix the data in the table, if so desired; then, upon completion of
the data correction, run Requisition Import again to process the modified rows in the interface
table.
Q6. Can Requisition Import handle multiple currencies?
A: Requisition Import is capable of handling multiple currencies, provided that all rate types and
currency conversions have been defined.
FAQS
Q7. Can Requisition Import handle multiple distributions?

A: Requisition Import can handle multiple distributions.
Q8. Is it possible to have all requisitions created from MRP to be imported with a status of
INCOMPLETE?
A: It is not possible to have Requisitions created from MRP imported into the Oracle Purchasing
application with a status of INCOMPLETE. The MRP Application inserts all data into the
PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table with an AUTHORIZATION_STATUS of
APPROVED. Therefore, when the Requisition Import program runs, all requisition lines from
MRP are created with a Status of APPROVED. If requisitions are created from MRP and the
AUTHORIZATION_STATUS is not APPROVED, then please contact support for assistance.
Q9. Is it possible to have all requisitions created from Inventory - Min-Max Planning to be
imported with a status of INCOMPLETE?
A: Yes, it is possible to have all requisitions created from Min-Max Planning with a status of
INCOMPLETE. If the desired outcome is Min-Max requisitions showing a status of
INCOMPLETE, it is necessary to set the profile option: INV: MinMax Reorder Approval to
Incomplete. Conversely, if this profile option is set to Approved, all requisitions imported from
Min-Max Planning will be imported with an approval status based on the approval authority of
the user initiating the Requisition Import process.
Q10. How can I achieve creating 10 requisitions for 10 lines populated into the interface table,
instead of 1 req. with 10 lines?
A: Requisitions are grouped according to the selection chosen by the initiator of the process,
based on the parameter of 'GROUP BY. If this parameter is left blank, the value will default
from the Default alternate region of the Purchasing Options form.
- Responsibility: Purchasing Super User
- Navigation: Setup -> Organizations -> Purchasing Options
Default alternate region
If the value selected is ALL, then all requisition lines will be on the same requisition. Any other
value will group the lines on requisitions based on the value selected.
Q11. Is Requisition Import organization-specific?
A: Requisition Import is operating unit-specific. Within the
FAQS
PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table lies the column ORG_ID.Upon Initiating the

Requisition Import program, the profile 'MO: Operating Unit' is queried to derive the value of
ORG_ID tied to the login running the program. Then the Requisition Import program executes,
all records in the interface table which are the same as the organization listed in the 'MO:
Operating Unit' profile will be processed. If you don't see any valid Import source when you
launch Reqimport but if you had already populated the Interface table then you have to check the
org_id Column you populated. this org_id will be your operating unit tied to your Applications
log-in responsibility. If the org_id is NULL then you can see you record in the Import Source.
Q12. When using encumbrance, is there any validation on the GL Date, ensuring the
appropriate periods are open?
A: The Requisition Import program will perform date integrity checks against the date value in
the PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL.GL_DATE field. This field GL_DATE, is reserved for
systems operating under Encumbrance Accounting constraints. It is necessary to ensure that the
encumbrance year is opened for the GL_DATE being specified.
Q13. How can I achieve grouping by Vendors?

A: First check to see if any records in PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL have a value for
the GROUP_CODE or REQ_NUMBER_SEGMENT1 columns. If there is no value in either of
these two columns, then the Requisition Import Program uses the Default Group By that you
setup to group requisition lines. Also Navigate to Purchasing -> Setup -> Purchasing Options
and Check the group by setting.
Q14. Why some times Requisition Import Process fails to create Requisitions when the Data is
imported from MRP?
A: Ensure that you use revision number for the item. This is mandatory when you use the profile
option Purchasing by Revision. The value will indicate whether to pass on item revision to
the purchase requisition. You can update this profile at the site level. If this profile is set to Yes,
then the item used for requisition import process should have a revision number. Now when you
repeat the process the Requisition Import works and the requisitions will be created Successfully
from MRP.
Q15. How does Requisition Import Process generate Accounts?

A: It can be either one of 2 methods for accounts to be generated:
1. By a valid CCID or
2. By a valid combination of account segments.
We do not generate the accounts using the Account generator process. We only validate the
FAQS
charge_account_id or by a valid combination of Account segments which are populated in the

interface table. This is the existing functionality.
Q16. How can automatically approve the Requisitions I am creating?

A: There are two ways of doing this:
1. You can populate records in the Interface table with status as APPROVED. In this case the
Approval process is not called after creating the Req. with APPROVED status.
2. If you still want the Requisitions created to go through the approval process then you have to
set Requisition Import Parameter 'Initiate Approval after Reqimport' to 'Yes' when Launching the
Requisition Import Concurrent Program.
Q17. How will I get the trace and detailed log for the Requisition Import Process?
A: You have to set the profile 'PO: Set Debug Concurrent On' to 'Yes to get the detailed log and
Database level for the Requisition Import Process.
Q18. When I load the Requisition Interface and create Requisitions it always does Sourcing.
How can I s sourcing from happening?
A: You have to set the autosource_flag in the Requisition interface to 'N' to avoid vendor
Sourcing
Q19. How can I avoid sourcing from overriding my vendor information?

A: You have to set the autosource_flag to 'P' for partial sourcing.
Q20. How does Requisition Import process use the Group-By parameter while launching
Requisition Import?
A: The Requisition Import process will first look at the Group By parameter selected when the
process is submitted; should this parameter be left blank, the system will then look to the GroupBy field residing in the Purchasing Options form. To setup in Purchasing option Form the
Navigation is Setup/Organizations/Purchasing Options - Default Alternate Region Requisition
Import Group-By Field.
Q21. What does the 'MRP: Purchasing by Revision' and 'INV: Purchasing by Revision' do?
A: The profile 'MRP: Purchasing by Revision' is maintained by MRP and the 'INV: Purchasing by
Revision' profile is maintained by Inventory. This profile option is mainly used by the respective
products to determine if the Item Revision needs to be populated while loading the Requisition
FAQS
Interface Tables. Most of the bugs related to these profiles are that sourcing gets affected during
Req Import. If the Blanket PO has the Item Revision and the Item in the Interface table does not
have the Item Revision field populated, then Sourcing could be a Issue and Releases will not be
created.
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. The information setup in the Purchasing Options form is not defaulting on to my
purchase order.
A: Verify the PO Options have been setup for each Organization. The Options are specific to each
Organization..
Q2. Why is my Purchase Order closing before a receipt is processed?

A: Check the Receipt Closed Tolerance and the Matching setup.
If Matching is set to equal 2-way, the PO will close once the Purchase Order is approved.
If the line of the Purchase Order is received with in the tolerance the line will close..
Q3. When creating a Requisition or Purchase Order I am unable to see my items.

A: Check the Inventory Organization defined in the Financial Options:
Setup > Organization > Financial Options - Supplier > Purchasing region
The Inventory Org specified here should be the Master Inventory Org, otherwise only the items
setup in the Org populated in this region will be viewable from the Requisition/Purchase Order
forms.
Q4. When querying Requisitions the order in which they are returned is not in sequential
order.
A: When using alphanumeric number type values can appear randomly. Consider entering all
numeric values with the same number of digits. For example: If you can assume all numeric
values contain six digits, you should enter the first value as 000001.
Q5. The Line Type value does not default or update the category if the Line type is changed
from the initial defaulted value.
A: Changing the Line Type does not change any of the existing defaults. cause: <Bug:772492>
This is the intended functionality for both the Purchase Order and Requisition forms. Whenever
the line type is changed, all of the information which was entered was lost and needed to be
entered again. The line information will change only if it is changed to a different family. If redefaulting is needed, please clear the line and enter it again.
Q6. Cannot enter the Receiving Options form. Receive the error: 'No organizations Currently
Defined'.
A: From Inventory Responsibility Setup/Org/Organizations Access, the Purchasing
FAQS
Responsibility need to be defined.
Q7. Receiving the following error when you save a new Requisition APP-14142
get_po_parameters-10: ora-01403: no data found Cause: A SQL error has occurred in
get_po_parameter @lsql_err.
A: You need to do the following:
1. Define the Purchasing Options and Financial Options for your Organization.
2. Ensure that the Master Organization, as well as the Child Organizations, have Receiving
Options defined.
Q8. Create a Purchase Order. Input the Header and Line information and find that the
Shipments button at the bottom of the form is grayed out.
A: Set-up the Receiving Options and to enable the Shipment Button in the Purchase Order form.
Navigation: Setup > Organizations > Receiving Options.
Once set-up these options for your Organization you will have the Shipments button enabled.
Ensure that the Purchasing Options and Financial Options are defined for your Organization.
Q9. Accessing the Purchase Order entry screen and getting the error: APP-14142
GET_WINDOW_ORG_SOB 040 ORA-1403 No Data Found.
A: 1. Attach the correct responsibility to the Operating Unit
2. Define Purchasing Options
3. Define Financial Options
Q10. Invoice Matching setting in POXPOEPO does not default to the setting in Purchasing
Options form.
A: Invoice matching can be set in five different areas of Oracle Purchasing:
In the list below, a setting at any level will override the settings above it.
1. Oracle Purchasing Options
a. Navigate to: Setup > Organizations > Purchasing Options
b. Select Default Alternative Region
2. Supplier Information
a. Navigate to: Supply Base > Suppliers
b. Query on specific supplier
c. Click on Open
d. Select Receiving Alternative Region
3. Line Types
a. Navigate to: Setup > Purchasing > Line Types
b. In the Receipt Required field: Yes = 3-way, No = 2-way
4. Items
a. Navigate to: Items > Master Items
b. Query on specific item
c. Select Purchasing Alternative Region
d. In the Invoice Matching section: Yes = 3-way, No = 2-way
5. Purchase Order Shipments
a. Navigate to: Purchase Orders > Purchase Orders
b. Enter (header and) line information
c. Click on Shipments button
d. Select More Alternative Region
FAQS
FAQS
FAQ Details
Q1. What is Pay On Receipt?
A: Pay on Receipt (also known as ERS (Evaluated Receipt Settlement) or Self-Billing) is an Oracle
Purchasing's concurrent program, which automatically creates invoices in Oracle Payables and
matches them with PO's automatically for the received amount. The short name for the program
is POXPOIV.
Q2. What is the minimum set-up required?

A: 1. In Oracle Purchasing responsibility, navigate to Supply base ->Suppliers. Query the
supplier to be used in the PO and Query the site to be used in PO. In the General Tab, check the
checkboxes for PAY SITE and PURCHASING. In the Purchasing tab, the Pay on field should
have a value of' Receipt'. The invoice summary level should also have the value of 'Receipt'.
2. Apart from the above set-up in R11i, we need to enter the value of ?Receipt? against the Pay on
field in the Terms window of the PO.
Q3. What is the impact of payables options on ERS?

A: From Payables options, under GL date basis there are four options. The accounting date will
be based on the option selected here. Make sure that the date is in the open period.
Q4. How can we identify the invoices created by Pay on receipt?

A: The invoices created by ERS will have ERS prefix generally. To identify the invoice created for
a particular receipt we can query with the combination of ERS and receipt number in the invoice
number field. In R11i, the profile option PO: ERS invoice number prefix can be set as needed
which can be used to identify the invoices.
Q5. What are the parameters passed?
A: For R107 and R11, the parameters passed are Parameter name value:
1. Transaction Source - ERS
2. Commit interval- default 1
3. Organization- Receiving org
4. Receipt Number- optional
If a receipt number is not specified all the receipts for that organization, which are eligible for Pay
on Receipt, are picked. For R11i, the organization parameter does not exist instead a new
parameter called Aging period exists.
FAQS
Q6. What is the significance of Ageing Period (R11i)?

A: The parameter Aging period determines the transactions on the receipt that can be considered
for the invoice creation. For ex if aging period is given as 1, then all the transactions that have a
transaction date less than or equal to the (sysdate-1) are considered for invoice creation. The
aging period can be set thru the profile option PO: ERS Aging period.
Q7. How can we debug what went wrong?

A: We can refer to the log file and check for error messages in po_interface_errors.
There could be many errors. Listed below are some common errors and possible resolutions.
1) Error Occurred in routine: create_invoice_header - Location: 110. Please refer note 1071391.6.
2) Pay on receipt Autoinvoice does not create any invoice. Please ensure the setup is complete in
payables and Purchasing modules.
3) You have a supplier who has a separate site for purchasing and Payables. When running the
ERS (Evaluated Receipt Settlement) it is selecting the purchasing site and therefore does not
create the invoice and gets a message that the POXPOIV: 'pay site is invalid'.
4) Purchasing Pay on Receipt Autoinvoice shows multiple occurrences of same receipt number in
multiorg environment. See Note 95384.1 for the solution.
5) Pay On Receipt AutoInvoice errors: po_inv_cr_invalid_gl_period.
Q8. Does ERS work for unordered receipts?
A: No. ERS does not work for unordered receipts. This means invoice needs to be created
manually for those PO?s that are created from unordered receipts.
Oracle Apps Inventory FAQs
Where do we set Inventory Organization for a particular responsibility??
Through Organizational Access Form
Transaction Source Type:
Item:
Items is a part or service you:
o
Purchase
o
Sell
o
Plan
o
Manufacture
o
Stock
o
Distribute
o
Prototype
The following Modules use items:
FAQS
Item Statuses and Item Attributes:

Status attributes are item attributes that enable key functionality for each item. An item status is
defined by selecting the value check boxes for the status attributes. Both status attributes and
item status can be controlled at the item level or organization levels.
Item Statuses are:
BOM Allowed
Build in WIP
Customer Orders Enabled
Internal Orders Enabled
Invoice Enabled
Transactable
Purchasable
Stackable
FAQS
Item Attributes
Item attributes are the collection of information about an item.
Stackable, Receivable, Financing Allowed, Purchased, Shippable, Returnable, Costing Enabled,
Transact able, BOM Allowed, Build in WIP, Purchasable, Customer Orders Enabled, Internal
Orders Enabled, Invoice Enabled, Inventory Item, Revision Control, Lot Control, Locator Control
Receipt Required, List Price.
Categories and Category Sets
Categories are logical groupings of items that have similar characteristics.
A category set is a distinct category grouping scheme and consists of categories.
Some application modules, Inventory, for example require that all items are assigned to a
category. The user specifies a default category for this purpose in each of these modules.
Categories and category sets are used to group items for various reports and programs.
Item Categories - Setup
Define the Flexfield structures for the item categories Flexfield.
Define categories.
Define category sets and assign the categories to the sets. Each set can use a different
Flexfield definition if required.
Assign default category sets to each functional area, like Purchasing, Planning and
Inventory
Assign items to categories. An item can be assigned to only one category within a set.
Item Cataloging
Item cataloging is used to add descriptive information to items and to partition the Item
Master into groups of items that share common characteristics. The characteristic required to
uniquely define an item in each group is configured in advance. While defining items, these
characteristics are assigned to an item catalog group.
FAQS
While the catalog group Flexfield is a required setup, item cataloging is optional.
To define a catalog, as many distinct item catalog groups as needed can be defined. Each
group has unique characteristics (called descriptive elements) that completely describe items
belonging to the group.
When assigning an item to an item catalog group, values for the descriptive elements that
apply to the item are defined. For example, an item catalog group called Computer could have a
descriptive element called Processing Speed. Possible values for Processing Speed might be
100MHZ, 133MHZ, and so on.
Transaction
A transaction is an item movement into, within, or out of inventory. A transaction changes
the quantity, location, or cost of an item. Inventory supports a number of predefined and userdefined transaction types.
Every material movement has a corresponding set of accounting transactions that Oracle
Inventory automatically generates.
All transactions validate the various controls (revision, locator, lot number, and serial
number) enabled for items.
Inventory Organization
An inventory organization can be a physical entity like a warehouse where inventory is
stored and transacted.
An inventory organization can be a logical entity like an item master organization which
only holds items with no transactions An inventory organization can have its own location with a
set of books, a costing method, a workday calendar, and a list of items.
An inventory organization can share one or more of these characteristics with other
organizations.
An inventory organization is an inventory location with its own set of books, costing
method, workday calendar and list of items. An organization can be a company, subsidiary, or
warehouse.
Consider the following when you plan your enterprise structure:
Sets of Books: You can tie one Oracle General Ledger set of books to each inventory
organization.
Costing Methods: You set your costing method (Standard or Average) at the organizational
level. The item attribute control level determines the costing organization.
Item Costs: Oracle Inventory keeps one cost per item per inventory organization.
Movement between Inventory Sites: You can use in-transit inventory for inter-organization
transfers.
Planning Method: You can choose how to plan your items.
Forecasting: You can forecast your items.
Accuracy Analysis: You can perform a cycle count, or a physical inventory
Item validation organization
FAQS
Item validation organization is a logical entity listing all the items that an enterprise sells to
customers. Multiple item validation organizations can be listed that share the same item master
organization.
A minimum of one item validation organizations is required per set of books.
A maximum of one item validation organization per operating unit is allowed to determine
the items that may be sold in each operating unit.
Item Master Organization
Item Master Organization is usually the first Inventory organization that is set up. Its single
purpose is for entering items. It has no sub inventories and is not used for inventory
transactions. Items are entered in an item master organization and then assigned to be used in
child organizations.
Child Organization
Child Organization is an inventory organization with at least one subinventory that is set up for
processing inventory transactions. It is not used to enter items. It gets a list of items from the
master.
What is Item Master organization and Child Organization?
Item Master Organization is usually the first Inventory organization that is set up. Its
single purpose is for entering items. It has no sub inventories and is not used for inventory
transactions. Items are entered in an item master organization and then assigned to use in child
organizations.
Child Organization is an inventory organization with at least one sub inventory that is set
up for processing inventory transactions. It is not used to enter items. It gets a list of items from
the master.
What is the purpose of Organization Assignment?
After defining an Item in the Item master, it has to be assignment to the Organization and is
known as Organization Assignment. The purpose of the Organization Assignment is to make the
item available for Transactions in particular Organizations.
What are Organization Assignment and Organization Item?
Item can be enabled in all child organizations under master organization or child organizations
where the item to be used is chosen. Inventory propagates item to all organizations in which the
item is to be defined.
Organizational attributes for item attributes which are enabled in that organization, can be
entered or changed which are enabled in that organization. For example, go to an organization
to choose reorder point planning for an item, and then go to another organization and choose
Min-Max planning for the same item.
Deletion Constraints and Deletion Groups
FAQS
If you want to enforce specific business rules and add custom checks before you can delete
an item, you must define item deletion constraints to supplement the standard predefined item
deletion conditions.
You can delete items that have incorrect attribute information. For example, if you make a
mistake in entering an item number, use the Deletion Groups window to delete the item.
If you decide to purge the item immediately after incorrectly defining it and before using it
anywhere in the system, you will be able to delete it.
Subinventory
A sub inventory is a Subdivision of an organization, representing either a physical area or a
logical grouping of items, such as a storeroom or receiving dock
A subinventory is a physical or logical grouping of inventory, such as raw material,
finished goods, defective material, or a freezer compartment.
The subinventory is the primary place where items are physically stocked. A subinventory
must be specified for every inventory transaction
Sub inventories can be further divided into areas designated as locators.
Each subinventory must contain the following information:
Unique alphanumeric name
Status
Cost Group (feature enabled if you have WMS installed)
Parameters
Lead times
Sourcing information
Account information
Inventory Controls
Any combination of the four controls can be implemented for each item. Inventory controls are
optional for all items
Locator
Revision
Lot
Serial Number
Stock Locator / Locator Control
Locators are optional structures within sub inventories.
Locators are the third level in the enterprise structuring scheme of Oracle Inventory.
Locators may represent rows, aisles, or bins in warehouses. Items can be received directly
into and shipped items directly from locators.
You can structure your Oracle Inventory installation so some of the subinventories and
items have locator control while others do not. If locator control is turned on at the item level,
you must specify a locator when transacting the item into or out of a subinventory. If locator
control is turned on at the subinventory level, you must specify a locator when transacting any
FAQS
item into or out of that subinventory. Each stock locator you define must belong to a
subinventory, and each subinventory can have multiple stock locators. The possible locator
control types are:
o
None
o
Pre-specified
o
Dynamic entry
o
Item Level
Explaining Locator Control Reports
Locator Quantities Report
You use the Locator Quantities Report to identify items and their quantities stored in the
specified stock locators. If the stock locator has a zero on-hand quantity, then the locator is not
included in the report.
Locator Listing Report
You use the Locator Listing Report to list stock locators you defined. You also use this report to
review volume and weight allowed in a location before transacting items.
Revision Control
A revision is a particular version of an item, bill of material, or routing.
By using the Revision control option while defining items item quantities can be tracked
by item revision. To do so a revision is a must for each material transaction.
Revision control is enabled for items for which version changes or changes that are
significant enough to track but are not affecting the function and feature of the item are tracked.
Revision Control item attributes cannot be changed when an item has quantity on hand.
When defining Revision numbers letters, numbers and characters such as A, A1, 2B, etc can
be used.
Letters are always in upper case and numbers may include decimals.
To ensure that revisions sort properly, decimals should always be followed by a number.
Revisions are sorted according to ASCII rules.
Each revision must be greater than the previous revision. For example, revision 10 cannot
be used after revision 9 because, according to ASCII sorting, 10 precede 9.
The value entered in the Starting Revision field in the Organization Parameters window
displays as the starting revision for the item when assigning revisions to an item.
Lot Control
Inventory provides complete lot number support for inventory transactions.
A lot identifies a specific batch of an item that is received and stored in an organization.
FAQS
Lot control is a technique for enforcing the use of lot numbers during material transactions,
thus enabling the tracking of batches of items throughout their movement in and out of
inventory.
If Lot Control is turned on for an item, the lot number must be indicated to perform a
transaction.
Lot Control must be turned on at the item level.
Lot numbers must be assigned whenever items under lot control are received into
inventory.
An inventory receipt can be split in to several lots, as necessary.
Quantities can be added to existing lot numbers.
Inventory will generate default lot numbers by using the default lot number generation
method which is configured in the Organization Parameters window during setup.
Explaining Lot Control Reports
Lot Transactions Register
You can use the Lot Transactions Register to report comprehensive lot number material
transaction detail within a specific date range. You can run the report for a range of lots, items,
transactions types, transaction reasons, and subinventories. You can also specify a specific
category set and display transaction quantities in their primary or transacted unit of measure.
Supplier Lot Trace Report
You can use the Supplier Lot Trace Report to trace a specific lot to its supplier lots. You can run
the report for a range of lot numbers and items and a specific supplier lot number. The report
shows you the lot material transactions related to the selected items as, lot numbers, transaction
dates, and transaction quantities.
Expired Lots Report
You can use the Expired Lots Report to show lots in your organization that expire on or before
the date you specify. You can run the report for a range of items or for a specific item only.
Serial Control
A serial number is an alphanumeric piece of information assigned to an individual unit of
an item. A serialized unit is a combination of an item number and a serial number.
Individual units of items can be tracked by using serial numbers. Serial number control is a
system technique for enforcing the use of serial numbers during a material transaction. Serial
numbers can be used to track items over which a very tight control is to be maintained.
One serial number per unit of an item can be assigned
Depending on how Serial Number Control is set at the Master Item level will determine
how serial numbers are generated.
If No Control is specified as the serial number control type, no serial number control will be
enforced.
If Predefined is specified as the serial number control type, serial numbers for that item
must be predefined.
FAQS
If control At inventory receipt or At sales order issue, optionally serial numbers for the
item can be predefined.
Generating Serial Numbers
Inventory uses the starting serial number prefix and the starting serial number specified in
the Item screen.
The process of generating serial numbers is done through a concurrent report. This does
not assign numbers to units in inventory; it simply reserves serial numbers for an item, for later
use.
Serial Genealogy
Enables to view the composition and transaction history of a serial-controlled item through
a graphical user interface.
Includes all material transactions within an organization.
Enables to trace serial numbers from an assembly to all components.
Enables to trace serial numbers from a component to a final assembly.
Explaining Serial Number Control Reports
Serial Number Transactions Register
You can use the Serial Number Transactions Register to report comprehensive serial number
material transaction detail within a specific date range. You can run the report for a range of
serial numbers, items, transaction types, transaction reasons, and subinventories. You can also
specify a specific category set and display transaction quantities in their primary or transacted
unit of measure.
Serial Number Detail Report
You can use the Serial Number Detail Report to report on information about current serialized
units in your organization for a specific source type or serialized unit status. Oracle Inventory
enables you to run the report for a range of serial numbers, items, suppliers, and supplier serial
numbers.
Item Templates
Templates are defined sets of attributes that can be used over and over to create many
similar items. Templates make initial item definition easier and more consistent.
Templates can be applied at any time after the item is created. Multiple templates can be
applied to a single item.
Templates can hold a complete set of attributes or a partial set. If a partial set, then only
values stored in the template overwrite those on the item
Users can define their own templates or predefined templates include:
ATO Model
ATO Item
ATO Option Class
Kit
PTO Model
FAQS
PTO Option Class

Planning Item
Phantom Item
Subassembly
Purchased
Freight
Finished Good
Outside Processing Item
Reference Item
Supply Item
Product Family
Item Relationships
The following types of relationships can be defined for items:
Item cross-references
Substitute items
Related items
Manufacturer part numbers
Customer item numbers
Relationships between items can be defined to improve purchasing management and item
searching capabilities. Substitute items can be received in Oracle Purchasing.
Item cross-references
Crossreference types define relationships between items and entities such as old item
numbers or supplier item numbers. For example, a crossreference type Old can be created to
track the old item numbers , and a cross-reference type Supplier to track supplier part numbers.
Multiple cross-reference types can be assigned to a single item.
What is the Importance of UOM?
A unit of measure (UOM) is a term used along with a numeric value, to specify the quantity of an
item. For example, each is a unit of measure that used to specify the number of units of an
item.
A unit of measure class is a group of units of measure with similar characteristics. For example,
weight can be a unit of measure class with units of measure such as kilogram, gram, pound,
and ounce.
A unit of measure conversion is a mathematical relationship between two different units of
measure.
What is the difference between Organization_Id and Org_Id?

Organization_Id represents Inventory Organization Id.
Org_Id represents Operating Unit Id.
FAQS
A Global Variable exists in the Oracle Database called CLIENT_INFO, which is 64 byte long. First
10 Bytes are used to store Operating Unit ID(or ORG_ID) for the multiple organization support
feature. Multi-Org views are partitioned by ORG_ID. The ORG_ID value is stored in
CLIENT_INFO variable. (It comes in AP, PO, AR and OM Levels).
ORGANIZATION_ID For inventory, Mfg and BOM.
Receipt to Issue Life Cycle:
Oracle Inventory uses the receipt to issue process to manage your inventory. The three main
pieces of the process are as follows:
Receiving
When you take delivery of inventory in to your warehouse you receive it. You can receive
inventory using the following applications
Oracle Purchasing
Oracle Work in Process
Oracle Inventory
Transferring
You can transfer inventory within an organization, and from one organization to another
organization using the following applications
Oracle Shipping
Oracle Order Management
Oracle Inventory
Issuing
When you send materials out of inventory you issue it. You use the following applications to
issue inventory.
Oracle Order Management
Oracle Purchasing
Oracle Inventory
Receiving Inventory
There are different ways you can receive inventory in to stock.
Purchasing
You can receive inventory from outside of your organization using purchasing. The ways you
use purchasing in relation to receiving are:
Purchase Order Receipt
Internal Requisition
In transit Receipt
Return Material Authorization
Unexpected Receipt
FAQS
Work in Process
You can receive inventory from the manufacturing floor using Oracle Work in Process
Component Return
Negative Component Issue
Assembly Return
Inventory
You may receive inventory in to stock using the inventory application in the following ways:
Miscellaneous Account
Receipt from Project
User Defined
Inter-organization receipt
Types of Inventory Receipts
Receipt and Deliver
Receipt and then Deliver
Inspection
Receipt
Deliver
Inspection
Transferring Inventory
Different applications can generate requests to transfer inventory.
Shipping
Shipping can generate a transfer to move stock from a finished goods area to a staging to for
shipping.
Order Management
Order management can generate a transfer to move stock from a finished goods area to a staging
area for shipping.
Work in Process
Work in Process can generate a transfer to acquire components for a project.
Inventory
Inventory transfers materials using the following methods:
Transfer between Organizations
Replenish materials
Request transfers
Issuing Inventory
You can issue stock out of inventory using the following applications:
FAQS
Order Management
Order Management can generate an inventory issue through:
Sales Orders
Internal Orders
Purchasing
Purchasing can generate an inventory issue for:
Return to Vendor materials

Work in Process
Work in process can generate an inventory issue through:
Component Issue
Assembly Return
Inventory
You can issue stock using the inventory application in the following ways:
User Defined
Inter Organization Transfer
Cycle Count Negative
Request Issue
Transaction Types:
Receive items into your organization using a general ledger account number
Issue items from your organization using general ledger account number
Transfer items from a subinventory in your organization to another subinventory in the
same organization
Transfer items directly between organizations
Transfer items between organizations by way of intransit
Reserve items for a specific account or temporarily prevent the release of items onto the
shop floor
A transaction type is the combination of a transaction source type and a transaction action. It is
used to classify a particular transaction for reporting and querying purposes.
A transaction type is the combination of a transaction source type and a transaction action.
It is used to classify a particular transaction for reporting and querying purposes.
Oracle Inventory also uses transaction types to identify certain transactions to include in
historical usage calculations for ABC analysis or forecasting.
A number of transaction types are predefined in Oracle Inventory. The user can also define
additional types by setting up new combinations of source types and actions.
Transaction Source Type
FAQS
You use a transaction source type with a transaction action; it uniquely identifies the type of
transaction performed. Oracle Inventory provides the following predefined transaction source
types. You can define additional source types. Predefined transaction types are as follows:
Purchase Order
Account Alias
Move Order
Internal Order
Standard Cost
Update
Internal Requisition
Sales Order
Cycle Count
Periodic Cost Update
Physical Inventory
RMA (Return Material Authorization)
Inventory
Job or Schedule
Transaction Action
You use transaction actions with a source type. A transaction action identifies a transaction
type. Oracle Inventory provides the following transaction actions:
Assembly completion
Issue from stores
Subinventory transfer
Direct organization transfer
Cycle count adjustment
Physical inventory adjustment
Intransit receipt
Intransit shipment
WIP assembly scrap
Cost update
Receipt into stores
Negative component issue
Delivery adjustments
Negative component return
Assembly return
Vendor Managed Inventory Planning Transfers

Transaction Managers
Transaction mangers control the number of transaction workers, processing intervals and the
number of transactions processed by each worker during each interval.
These run at the periodic intervals you specify until you disable them with the concurrent
manager.
FAQS
Cost Transaction Manager

The material cost transaction manager must run to cost material transactions.
Remote Procedure Manager
Remote procedure manager processes online inventory transactions WIP initiates, such as
completions or component issue.
Material Transaction Manager
Immediately executes a material transaction after you save your changes in a transaction
window.
Move Transaction Manager
The move transaction manager moves assemblies received from an outside processing supplier
to the next operation.
You do not have to launch the other transaction managers if you decide to process your
transactions on-line, and do not use the transaction interface.
What are the Types of Inventory Transactions?

Miscellaneous Transactions
This transaction is used to do adjustments in stock due to damage, obsolescence, issuing items
for R & D or issuing track able expense items.
Subinventory Transfer
This transaction is used to transfer goods from one stockroom to another with in the same
inventory organization.
Use the Subinventory transfer window to:
Transfer material within your current organization between sub inventories, or between two
locators within the same subinventory
We can transfer from asset to expense subinventories, as well as from tracked to nontracked
subinventories. If an item has a restricted list of subinventories, we can only transfer material
from and to subinventories in that list.
Inter ORG Transfers

This transaction is used to transfer goods from one inventory organization to another.
Interorganization Direct Shipment
You use the Interorganization Transfer window to move inventory directly from a shipping
organization to a destination organization.
Interorganization Intransit Shipment
FAQS
When you perform the transfer transaction, you do not need to specify the delivery
location.
You only need to enter the subinventory you are shipping from, a shipment number, the
freight information, and, a percentage of the transaction value or a discrete amount that Oracle
Inventory uses to compute transfer charges.
Transfer type:
Direct: Inter-organization transfers move inventory directly from the shipping organization to
the destination organization.
Intransit: Inter-organization transfers move inventory to intransit inventory first. You can track
this inventory until it arrives at the destination organization.
Receiving Transactions
This transaction is used to move goods from receiving dock to specified subinventory and
locator.
Sales Issue
This transaction is used to move goods from pick subinventory to staged subinventory.
WIP Issue
This transaction is used to issue materials against production orders.
Note: WIP issue and Sales issue will not be covered as part of Oracle inventory training. These
two inventory transactions will be covered in Oracle Shipping and WIP training
You Can Perform the Following Oracle Inventory Transactions
Receive items into your organization from a general ledger account number
Issue items from your organization to a general ledger account number
Transfer items from a subinventory in your organization to another subinventory in the
same organization
Transfer items directly between organizations
Transfer items between organizations by way of in-transit
Reserve items for a specific account or temporarily prevent the release of items onto the
shop floor
What is Move Order?
A move order is a request for a sub inventory transfer or account issue. The pick release process
creates move orders which are pre-approved requests for sub inventory transfers to bring
material from its source locations in the warehouse to a staging sub inventory. Reservations
created for sales orders are automatically updated and transferred you as the move order is
released and transacted.
FAQS
It is a transaction type in inventory. It is used to make sub inventory transfers. Shipping

Execution uses it to move the items during the shipping process into a stage area before the items
are really shipped to the customer.
Anatomy of a Move order:
Oracle Order Picking and Shipping stores the move order source type in the header. This refers
to the entity that created the move order. An order could be a pick wave (for sales order picks) a
replenishment type, a requisition for sub inventory transfer and so on. Order Picking and
Shipping also stores the default source and destination if available, the order number, and the
requested date.
The lines are the requests on that move order. They store the item, requested quantity,
completed quantity (if the move order has been partially fulfilled), a source and destination if
known, and any project and task references if the organization is Project Manufacturing
enabled. The user can also request specific serial or lot numbers if know, on the move order line.
The line details are the Inventory transactions that occur to fulfill a particular request line (move
order line). If the material is locator, lot, or serial controlled, this information is filled in at the
line detail level. These details are automatically filled in by Oracle Inventory using the Inventory
Picking Rules and the Item - Transaction defaults (for destination locators), or the user can
manually fill in the details. These details can be edited prior to transaction by a user.
The Move Order Line Details (transaction lines) created by the detailing process must be
transacted to confirm the material drop-off in staging. This process is called Pick Confirmation.
Pick confirmation executes the subinventory transfer that moves the material from its source
location in the warehouse into the staging location. Pick Confirmation automatically transfers
the high level reservation to a detailed reservation (including lots, subinventory, revisions, and
locators) in the staging location. At pick confirmation, a user can report a missing quantity or
change the transaction line if the picker chose to use material from a different lot, serial, locator,
or subinventory. If an organizations picks rarely deviate from the suggested picking lines and
the overhead of requiring a Pick Confirmation is unmanageable, the Pick Confirm transactions
can occur immediately after the lines are detailed. This option is called auto pick
confirm. Users can set up a default Pick Confirm policy in the Inventory organization
parameters. This default can be overridden at each Pick Release.
Note that even if an automatic pick confirm is employed, the material is only transacted to the
staging subinventory and reserved. A user can still manage any discrepancies found by deleting
the reservation and transacting the material back to its original subinventory. If mobile devices
such as bar code scanners are used to perform inventory transactions, you should use manual
pick confirmation for greatest inventory accuracy and control.
Move Order Source Types
Oracle Inventory Release 11i provides three types of move orders.
Move Order Requisitions
Replenishment Move Orders
FAQS
Pick Wave Move Orders

The move order type refers to the entity that created the move order. For all move orders, the
final result is one of the two supported transactions: subinventory or move order issue.
Move Order Requisition
The requisition is a manually generated request for a move order. You must create a move order
requisition. You can generate requests for subinventory transfers or move order issues. The
requisition can optionally go through an Oracle Workflow approval process before it becomes a
move order. If no approval process is used, the requisition becomes a move order immediately.
Replenishment Move Order
These move orders are generated by kanban cards where the pull sequence calls for a
subinventory transfer (intra-organization kanbans), or by min-max planned items where the
items replenishment source (set at the item-sub inventory level) is another sub inventory. In this
case, the min-max or replenishment count report automatically generates a move order.
Replenishment move orders are pre-approved and ready to be transacted.
Pick Wave Move Order
The pick release process generates move orders to bring the material from its source location in
stores to a staging location, which you define as a subinventory in Oracle Inventory. This
transaction is a subinventory transfer. These move orders are generated automatically by the
Oracle Shipping Execution pick release process. These orders are pre-approved and ready to
transact. Pick slips and other shipping and inventory reports will also be available with Oracle
Order Management.
Allocating Move Orders
Allocating is the process in Oracle Inventory that uses picking rules and item transaction defaults
to suggest move order line details to fulfill a move order line. The line details are the inventory
transactions that must be fulfilled to complete the move order line. You can consider the
allocating process as a sourcing process. Allocating occurs when you click the Allocate button in
the move order transaction window.
Suggesting Sources
Oracle Inventory uses the picking rules you set up at the organization or organization-item level,
to suggest source locators, revisions, and lots to source the material in order to fulfill a move
order line.
Suggesting a Destination
The picking rules only suggest source locations. If the destination subinventory is locatorcontrolled and no locator was specified on the move order line, Oracle Inventory generates a
suggestion based on the item subinventory locator default you set up for move orders. Before
release 11i, the item subinventory defaults were used only for put away locations in the receiving
process. You can now set up a default locator for each item that you want to move around the
FAQS
warehouse on a move order. This is not the same default type that you would use for receiving or
shipping.
Oracle Shipping
Oracle Shipping provides two choices for when and how the user will fill in the line
details. These choices are made by setting up an organization parameter but can be overridden
at pick release.
Auto allocate --the allocating process is done at pick release instantly after the move order
is created. No more human intervention is needed and the pick slip can be printed
automatically.
Pick release only creates move orders but does not fill in the line details. A user must
navigate to the move order form after pick release and press the Allocate button. This option
allows warehouse managers to determine when to release the pick to the floor and might be a
better solution for implementations running a global order entry with distributed warehouse
management and/or shipping. In these cases orders can be released to regional warehouses
from the central order management location in advance and individual warehouses can schedule
picks closer to actual ship time.
What is Transact Order?
Once the lines have been allocated, you can commit all of the transactions for a single move order
line by selecting the lines you want to transact and clicking the Transact button. You can save
and exit the move order line details without transacting if you need to print a pick slip report.
This enables you to transact each detail line before or after picking the material.
If the user transacts less than the requested quantity, the order remains open until the full
quantity is transacted or the order is closed or canceled.
What does the Auto Detail option do?
Pick Release always creates a Move Order transaction. When you check this option in the Pick
Release parameters, the Pick Engine creates transaction lines suggestions. This is a suggestion
of sourcing material and it is called "Detailing". The Detailing also creates a high level
reservation on the material if no reservations previously existed. The Detailing can be made
manually.
What does the Auto pick Confirm option do?
This option should be active if you want the Pick Engine to accept the suggested values during
Detailing. It can be activated only if you select the Autodetail option.
FAQs on COGS in Oracle Apps
1 - When does an RMA debit inventory and credit DCOGS account?
A. RMA has created after COGS Recognition. So RMA debits inventory and credits COGS
account. If RMA happens before COGS Recognition then RMA debits inventory and credits
DCOGS account.
FAQS
2 - Why there is no accounting for COGS recognition?

A. There is no accounting for COGS recognition because it has zero quantity.
Reason:- Customer has created RMA against this Sales Order Line.
3 - No COGS Recognized (COGS will never be recognized as there is no reference to the original
invoice). Why?
A. COGS recognition is designed to match with AR revenue recognition. If you don't have an
invoice yet but only a credit memo, what would be the percentage of revenue recognized from
AR?
Eg:
The COGS recognition is not going to happen at the individual RMA level, it is at the order line
level that has been shipped.
Say you have debited the Deferred COGS for the original shipment at $100, then you have
credited the Deferred COGS for the RMA receipt at $40. The net Deferred COGS is $60, so far so
good. After the credit memo and invoice have gone through, what matters at this point of time is
how much net percentage of revenue is recognized from AR for this order line. Suppose a 50%
revenue recognized, then a distinct COGS recognition transaction is going to be created that will
credit deferred COGS at $30 and debit COGS at $30. The accounting of original shipment and
RMA transactions would not change, but the additional COGS recognition transaction will make
the order line's recognized COGS to be matched with recognized revenue.
4 - Why Inter company COGS account is not working after completing mandatory setup?
A. There is a difference between the internal order flow and drop shipment or global
procurement flow. The intercompany COGS account defined in the Inter-company Relations
form is only used in drop shipment and global procurement flows. For internal order flows, the
account is driven by the Inventory Cost of Goods Sold Account workflow. In default, the
workflow process uses the item COGS account, but the user can configure the process to use any
other account.
5 - How to diagnose missing COGS Recognition events?
A. Checking whether the COGS events are costed is easy, you just verify mmt.costed_flag.
Checking whether COGS events are created is more functional and less simple. You can use the
R12 Revenue COGS matching report to find out whether the result is expected. If the expected
COGS recognition percentage does not match Revenue percentage, there could be a potential
problem.
6 - Can we close the Inventory period without running the
COGS recognition concurrent programs? If not, what prevents it? If so,
what are the entries that are created when the recognition is run the
following month and the inventory period for the current month is
closed?
FAQS
A. If the customer is using perpetual Costing Method "Standard", "Average", "Layer" then the
inventory period can be closed prior COGS recognition process. If the customer is using PAC
then the "Collect Revenue" and "AR period" needs to be closed prior PAC period close.
7 - How to derive COGS Account Cost Center using Salesperson Value from Sales Order form in
Order Management thru SLA?
A. Looking at gmf_xla_extract_headers, for the OM issue from stores transaction, the
transaction_id on that row points to a row in mtl_material_transactions and the column
source_line_id in that table points to the line_id in oe_order_lines_all.
8 - Why when generating accounting--the COGS, accounting does not follow the Revenue
Accounting for the Receivable Invoices?
A. COGS account in Oracle EBS is driven and derived from Order Management COGS account
generator workflow. If you need help for that workflow, contact Order Management team.
9 - Is there a way for Cost Management SLA (Subledger Account) to utilize the same sources as
the AR SLA?
A. Right now, there is no built-in cross reference of sources in SLA between Receivables and Cost
Management. There are two options for the customer:
a - Inside SLA, build a few custom sources for Cost Management Application that the customer is
using for Receivables.
b - Even though the deferred COGS account is a fixed organization parameter, the true COGS
account is derived from Order Management COGS Account Workflow. That is well-known in 11i
and the functionality remains in R12. The logic can be mimicked inside the workflow.
10 - Trying to generate Deferred COGS but instead the Inventory Accrual account appears on the
Inter-company AP invoice. How can they get this to be a deferred accrual account?
A. There is only deferred COGS, no such a thing called deferred accrual. To do the drop
shipment right, you need to set up the transaction flow and inter-company relations with
advanced accounting, not the shipping network setup.
When the setup is right, you would get one physical transaction out of OU2, one logical
transaction for OU2, and two logical txns for OU1. The logical sales order issue transaction of
OU1 will hit deferred COGS account. The deferred COGS will be transformed into true COGS
after you run the COGS recognition programs. As for the inter-company AP invoice, it should
use the intercompany accrual account defined in the inter-company relations form. There is no
concept of deferred accrual.
11 - COGS account is going 100% into the account instead of getting deferred into 5 groups. Our
revenue accounting rule splits the revenue into 5 deferred periods and we expect the COGS to do
the same. I ran the 3 programs under Cost Management (Resp.) -> COGS accounting and the
Material Distributions is still going 100% into a single account, instead of creating 5 records for
20% each in each period. Why?
A: For a given sales order shipment, it always goes to 100% deferred COGS at first. Then after
you run those programs for each period and assuming AR passes the right percentage of revenue
FAQS
recognition, we will move from deferred COGS to COGS accordingly. For example, at period 1, if
AR says 20% revenue recognized, then you then programs and you will have 80% deferred
COGS and 20% COGS. And at period 2, if AR says now 40% revenue recognized, you run the
programs and you will have net 60% deferred COGS and 40% COGS.
12 - After the COGS generation program is run, COGS entry can be viewed from Material
Transactions Distribution screen in Inventory. The COGS account is wrong as the workflow was
not updated. How to change the cogs account after it is generated?
A. The COGS entry is recorded in material distribution, sub-ledger accounting (SLA) and general
ledger. There is no way to go back to re-cost or re-account for old transactions. Practically
speaking, the best way is to manually adjust them inside GL and move forward with the correct
accounting for new transactions.
13 - How to use COGS Account Relationship to Advanced Pricing?
A. n order to get it working, both profile options INV:Inter-company Invoice for Internal Orders
and CST: Transfer Pricing Option must be set to Yes at site level. Cost manager is at global level,
there is no support at responsibility level. Please study the following white papers:
14 - RMA Receipt transaction does not credit actual Cogs Account. Why?
A. This is intended behavior in R12.
For RMA receipt Transaction with reference to original Sales Order document will create below
accounting distribution:
Dr.Inv
Cr.Deferred COGS
There will be separate COGS Adjusting entries created for the COGS Adjustment based on the
COGS Recognition percentage.
Dr./Cr.COGS
Cr./Dr.DCOGS
For RMA receipt Transaction without any reference to Sales Order document will create below
accounting distribution:
Dr.Inv
Cr.COGS
This will result in balanced journal entries.
15 - Sales Orders are for a single customer, linked to a single sales rep, and can contain an item
A which, depending on the usage at sales order lines level, has to be linked to two distinct
business lines.
Thus the same item used in the same order and in 2 sales order lines has to generate revenue
account and cogs accounts linked to 2 distinct business lines. How this can be achieved ? Can
we use the order line type for this ? Impacts on the AR and COGS auto-accounting ?
FAQS
A. COGS and revenue accounts are not built the same way.
For revenue account, the auto-accounting allows to default your business line segment from the
bill to site, the transaction type (AR one, not the OM one), the sales rep or the product. If the
product is not the single driver for your business line segment value, does one of these other
values could be used ? If not, it means the value will have to be corrected manually in the
invoice, or a custom to be built depending on customer rules. For the COGS, it's generated by the
account generator workflow, this can be customized to default the value expected by the
customer.
17 - Can we "Turn Off" DCOGS in Release 12.0.x ?
A. Deferred COGS and Revenue-COGS matching are mandatory new features in R12 to help
customers be legal-compliant. There is no standard way to support disabling this best-practice
feature set.
18 - Why is COGS charged to the incorrect GL account?
A. COGS account is stamped as MMT's (MTL_MATERIAL_TRANSACTIONS table) distribution
account, and it is driven by the Order Management Cost of Goods Sold Account workflow.
Customers can configure the workflow process to achieve their business needs based on item
types.
19 - In 11.5.10.x mtl_material_transactions table and locator_id field was used to get
information on inventory charged to projects. In R12 locator_id field is blank, how to find?
A. In EBS release 12.x.x COGS is a logical transaction --not a material transaction as 11.5.10.x.
COGS transactions will not have project and locator information.
20 - Can COGS Recognition transactions created in a closed inventory period?
A. Refer Oracle Cost Management User Guide ->Revenue and COGS Matching ->Period Close
Considerations Here its clearly mentioned that COGS Recognition transactions can be created in
Closed Inventory Period. If the GL period is closed then COGS Recognition events/transactions
will be created in next open GL period.
FAQS
Oracle Apps AR Interview Questions

1. What is TCA? Tables?
A) Trading Community Architecture. It is a centralized repository of business entities such as
Partners, Customers, and Organizations etc. It is a new framework developed in Oracle 11i.
HZ_PARTIES: The HZ_PARTIES table stores basic information about parties that can be shared
with any relationship that the party might establish with another party. Although a record in the
HZ_PARTIES table represents a unique party, multiple parties can have the same name.
The parties can be one of four types:
Organization for example, Oracle Corporation
Person for example, Jane Doe
Group for example, World Wide Web Consortium
Relationship for example, Jane Doe at Oracle Corporation.
HZ_LOCATIONS: The HZ_LOCATIONS table stores information about a delivery or postal
address such as building number, street address, postal code, and directions to a location. This
table provides physical location information about parties (organizations and people) and
customer accounts.
HZ_PARTY_SITES: The HZ_PARTY_SITES table links a party (see HZ_PARTIES) and a location
(see HZ_LOCATIONS) and stores location-specific party information. One party can optionally
have one or more party sites. One location can optionally be used by one or more parties. This
party site can then be used for multiple customer accounts within the same party.
HZ_CUST_ACCT_SITES_ALL
HZ_CUST_SITE_USES_ALL
HZ_CUST_CONTACT_POINTS etc.
2. What are Base Tables or Interface Tables for Customer Conversions, Autolockbox, Auto
Invoice?
A) Customer Conversion:
Interface Tables :RA_CUSTOMERS_INTERFACE_ALL,
RA_CUSTOMER_PROFILES_INT_ALL, RA_CONTACT_PHONES_INT_ALL,
RA_CUSTOMER_BANKS_INT_ALL,
RA_CUST_PAY_METHOD_INT_ALL
Base Tables
:RA_CUSTOMERS, RA_ADDRESSES, RA_SITE_USES_ALL,
RA_CUSTOMER_PROFILES_ALL, RA_PHONES etc
B) Auto Invoice:
Interface Tables :RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL, RA_INTERFACE_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL,
RA_INTERFACE_SALESCREDITS_ALL, RA_INTERFACE_ERRORS_ALL
Base Tables :RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_ALL, RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_LINES_ALL,
RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_GL_DIST_ALL, RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_SALESREPS_ALL,
RA_CUST_TRX_TYPES_ALL
C) AutoLockBox:
Interface Tables
:AR_PAYMENTS_INTERFACE_ALL (POPULATED BY IMPORT PROCESS)
Interim tables
: AR_INTERIM_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL (All Populated by Submit
FAQS
Validation)
: AR_INTERIM_CASH_RCPT_LINES_ALL,
AR_INTERIM_POSTING
Base Tables
: AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL, AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATIONS_ALL,
AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL ( All Populated by post quick cash)
3. What are the tables in which Invoices/transactions information is stored?
A) RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_ALL, The RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_ALL table stores invoice, debit
memo, commitment, bills receivable, and credit memo header information. Each row in this table
includes general invoice information such as customer, transaction type, and printing
instructions.
RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_LINES_ALL, The RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_LINES_ALL table stores
information about invoice, debit memo, credit memo, bills receivable, and commitment lines
(LINE, FREIGHT and TAX).
RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_SALESREPS_ALL, The RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_SALESREPS_ALL table
stores sales credit assignments for invoice lines. If Receivables bases your invoice distributions on
sales credits, a mapping exists between the sales credit assignments in this table with the
RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_GL_DIST_ALL table.
The RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_GL_DIST_ALL table stores the accounting records for revenue,
unearned revenue, and unbilled receivables for each invoice or credit memo line. Oracle
Receivables creates one row for each accounting distribution, and at least one accounting
distribution must exist for each invoice or credit memo line. Each row in this table includes the
General Ledger account and the amount of the accounting entry.
The RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_SALESREPS_ALL table stores sales credit assignments for invoice
lines. If Receivables bases your invoice distributions on sales credits, a mapping exists between
the sales credit assignments in this table with the RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_GL_DIST_ALL table.
4. What are the tables In which Receipt information is stored?
A) AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL, The AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL table stores all
transactions except adjustments and miscellaneous cash receipts. Oracle Receivables updates this
table when activity occurs against an invoice, debit memo, chargeback, credit memo, on-account
credit, or receipt.
Transaction classes determine if a transaction relates to either the RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_ALL
table or the AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL table. Using the CUSTOMER_TRX_ID foreign key
column, the AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL table joins to the RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_ALL
table for non-payment transaction entries, such as the creation of credit memos, debit memos,
invoices, chargebacks, or deposits. Using the CASH_RECEIPT_ID foreign key column, the
AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL table joins to the AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL table for
invoice-related payment transactions.
AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL, The AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL table stores one record for each
receipt that you enter. Oracle Receivables concurrently creates records in the
AR_CASH_RECEIPT_HISTORY_ALL, AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL, and
FAQS
AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATIONS_ALL tables for invoice-related receipts. For receipts that are

not related to invoices, such as miscellaneous receipts, Receivables creates records in the
AR_MISC_CASH_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL table instead of the
AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATIONS_ALL table.
AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATIONS_ALL, The AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL table stores one
record for each receipt that you enter. Oracle Receivables concurrently creates records in the
AR_CASH_RECEIPT_HISTORY_ALL, AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL, and
AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATIONS_ALL tables for invoice-related receipts. For receipts that are
not related to invoices, such as miscellaneous receipts, Receivables creates records in the
AR_MISC_CASH_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL table instead of the
AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATIONS_ALL table. Cash receipts proceed through the confirmation,
remittance, and clearance steps. Each step creates rows in the AR_CASH_RECEIPT_HISTORY
table.
5. What are the tables in which Accounts information is stored?
RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_GL_DIST_ALL
6. What are the different statuses for Receipts?
A) Unidentified Lack of Customer Information
Unapplied Lack of Transaction/Invoice specific information (Ex- Invoice Number)
Applied When all the required information is provided.
On-Account, Non-Sufficient Funds, S Payment, and Reversed receipt.
8. What is Autolockbox?
A) Auto lockbox is a service that commercial banks offer corporate customers to enable them to
out source their account receivable payment processing. Auto lockbox can also be used to
transfer receivables from previous accounting systems into current receivables. It eliminates
manual data entry by automatically processing receipts that are sent directly to banks. It involves
three steps
Import (Formats data from bank file and populates the Interface Table),
Validation(Validates the data and then Populates data into Interim Tables),
Post Quick Cash(Applies Receipts and updates Balances in BaseTables).

9. What is Transmission Format?
A) Transmission Format specifies how data in the lockbox bank file should be organized such
that it can be successfully imported into receivables interface tables. Example, Default, Convert,
Cross Currency, Zengen are some of the standard formats provided by oracle.
10. What is Auto Invoice?
A) Autoinvoice is a tool used to import and validate transaction data from other financial
systems and create invoices, debit-memos, credit memos, and on account credits in Oracle
receivables. Using Custom Feeder programs transaction data is imported into the autoinvoice
interface tables.
Autoinvoice interface program then selects data from interface tables and creates transactions in
FAQS
receivables (Populates receivable base tables) . Transactions with invalid information are rejected
by receivables and are stored in RA_INTERFACE_ERRORS_ALL interface table.
11. What are the Mandatory Interface Tables in Auto Invoice?
RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL, RA_INTERFACE_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL
RA_INTERFACE_SALESCREDITS_ALL.
12. What are the Set up required for Custom Conversion, Autolockbox and Auto Invoice?
A) Autoinvoice program Needs AutoAccounting to be defined prior to its execution.
13. What is AutoAccounting?
A) By defining AutoAccounting we specify how the receivables should determine the general
ledger accounts for transactions manually entered or imported using Autoinvoice. Receivables
automatically creates default accounts(Accounting Flex field values) for revenue, tax, freight,
financial charge, unbilled receivable, and unearned revenue accounts using the AutoAccounting
information.
14. What are Autocash rules?
A) Autocash rules are used to determine how to apply the receipts to the customers outstanding
debit items. Autocash Rule Sets are used to determine the sequence of Autocash rules that Post
Quickcash uses to update the customers account balances.
15. What are Grouping Rules? (Used by Autoinvoice)
A) Grouping rules specify the attributes that must be identical for lines to appear on the same
transaction. After the grouping rules are defined autoinvoice uses them to group revenues and
credit transactions into invoices debit memos, and credit memos.
16. What are Line Ordering Rules? (Used by Autoinvoice)
A) Line ordering rules are used to order transaction lines when grouping the transactions into
invoices, debit memos and credit memos by autoinvoice program. For instance if transactions are
being imported from oracle order management , and an invoice line ordering rule for sales_order
_line is created then the invoice lists the lines in the same order of lines in sales order.
17. In which table you can see the amount due of a customer?
A) AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL
18. How do you tie Credit Memo to the Invoice?
At table level, In RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_ALL, If you entered a credit memo, the
PREVIOUS_CUSTOMER_TRX_ID column stores the customer transaction ID of the invoice that
you credited. In the case of on-account credits, which are not related to any invoice when the
credits are created, the PREVIOUS_CUSTOMER_TRX_ID column is null.
19. What are the available Key Flex Fields in Oracle Receivables?
A) Sales Tax Location Flex field, Its used for sales tax calculations.
Territory Flex field is used for capturing address information.
FAQS
20. What are Transaction types? Types of Transactions in AR?

A) Transaction types are used to define accounting for different transactions such as Debit
Memo, Credit Memo, On-Account Credits, Charge Backs, Commitments and invoices.

Oracle Applications Technical and Functional Interview Questions

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Oracle Applications Technical and Functional Interview Questions

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Oracle Applications Technical and Functional Interview Questions and Answers